Vol VII - B0.4 - Civil Works

AL-KHOBAR SWRO DESALINATION PLANT PHASE 2
Saline Water Conversion Corporation
Volume-VII
GENERAL WORKS SPECIFICATION
Part B.04:
CIVIL WORKS
Oct 2018
Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Scope of Work, Completeness .................................................................. 11
1.2 Civil Design/Engineering ........................................................................... 11
1.3 Codes and Standards ................................................................................. 11
1.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution ............ 14
1.5 Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling) ...................................... 22
1.6 Execution (Assembling, Installation) ........................................................ 23
1.7 QA/QC .......................................................................................................... 23
1.8 Acceptance ................................................................................................. 24
2 LAYOUT ....................................................................................................... 25
2.1 General ........................................................................................................ 25
3 SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND SERVICES ........................................................ 26
3.1 Description of Civil Works ......................................................................... 29
3.2 Landscaping ............................................................................................... 30
3.2.1 Scope............................................................................................. 30
3.2.2 Design Requirements .................................................................... 30
3.2.3 Materials ........................................................................................ 31
3.2.4 Delivery .......................................................................................... 31
3.2.5 Installation...................................................................................... 32
3.2.6 Maintenance .................................................................................. 32
3.3 Detailed Description of Individual Works ................................................. 33
4 LAND TOPOGRAPHY WORKS .................................................................. 40
5 SUBSOIL INVESTIGATIONS ...................................................................... 42
5.1 Codes and standards ................................................................................. 42
5.2 Fieldworks ................................................................................................... 43
5.3 Laboratory test ........................................................................................... 46
5.4 Reporting..................................................................................................... 47
6 MARINE BATHYMETRY AND RECIRCULATION STUDY ......................... 50
6.1 Marine Bathymetry Investigation .............................................................. 50
6.2 Recirculation Study .................................................................................... 56
7 SITE INSTALLATION/DEMOBILIZATION ................................................... 58

7.7 QA/QC .......................................................................................................... 59
7.8 Acceptance ................................................................................................. 59
8 SITE SUPERVISION/SURVEY/INVESTIGATIONS ..................................... 60
8.6 QA/QC .......................................................................................................... 61
8.7 Acceptance ................................................................................................. 61
9 DEWATERING DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................................ 62
10 EARTH WORK ............................................................................................. 65
10.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution. ........... 66
10.7 QA/QC, Test and properties....................................................................... 73
10.8 Acceptance ................................................................................................. 75
11 SPREAD FOUNDATIONS ........................................................................... 76

11.7 QA/QC 79
11.8 Acceptance ................................................................................................. 79
12 PILING WORKS ........................................................................................... 80
12.1 Scope of Work ............................................................................................ 80
12.2 Documents to be submitted ...................................................................... 80
12.3 Applicable standards and recommendations .......................................... 80
12.7 QA/QC 87
12.8 Acceptance ................................................................................................. 88
13 CONCRETE WORK ..................................................................................... 89
13.5 Execution (Assembling, Installation) ...................................................... 102
13.6 Exposure Classes ..................................................................................... 102
13.7 Minimum Requirements to Concrete Mix ............................................... 103
13.8 QA/QC 111
13.9 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 116
14 PRECAST CONCRETE ............................................................................. 117
14.1 General 117
14.2 Civil Design/Engineering ......................................................................... 117
14.3 Codes and Standards ............................................................................... 117
14.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution .......... 117
14.5 Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling) .................................... 118

14.6 Shop drawings .......................................................................................... 118
15 CONCRETE PIPES .................................................................................... 122
15.1 General 122
15.5 Materials .................................................................................................... 122
15.7 QA/QC 123
15.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 124
16 MASONRY, MORTAR, PLASTER ............................................................. 125
16.1 Scope of Work, Completeness ................................................................ 125
16.5 Plaster Materials ....................................................................................... 128
16.7 QA/QC 132
16.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 132
17 STEEL WORK............................................................................................ 133
17.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution. ......... 135
17.5 Materials .................................................................................................... 136
17.6 Execution/Workmanship .......................................................................... 138
17.7 Tests 164
17.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 164
17.9 SMALL NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL PARTS ........................................... 165
17.9.1 General ........................................................................................ 165
17.9.2 Design/Engineering ..................................................................... 165

17.9.3 Codes and Standards .................................................................. 165
17.9.4 Design Criteria ............................................................................. 165
17.9.5 Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling) .......................... 168
17.9.6 Execution (Assembling, Installation) ............................................ 168
17.9.7 QA/QC ......................................................................................... 168
17.9.8 Acceptance .................................................................................. 168
18 WATER PROOFING .................................................................................. 169
18.1 General 169
18.7 QA/QC 174
18.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 174
19 ROOFING ................................................................................................... 175
19.7 QA/QC 178
19.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 178
20 METAL WORKS–ROOF AND WALL CLADDING SYSTEMS .................. 179
20.7 QA/QC 187

20.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 187
21 METAL WORKS/JOINER’S WORK–DOORS AND GATES ..................... 188
21.6 QA/QC 195
21.7 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 195
22 METAL WORKS/JOINER’S WORKS–WINDOWS .................................... 196
22.7 QA/QC 199
22.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 199
23 GLAZING ................................................................................................... 200
23.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution Design
and execution ........................................................................................... 200
23.7 QA/QC 206
23.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 206
24 COMPUTER FLOORS ............................................................................... 207

24.7 QA/QC 207
24.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 207
25 SUSPENDED CEILINGS ........................................................................... 209
25.7 QA/QC 211
25.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 211
26 PARTITION WALLS .................................................................................. 212
26.7 QA/QC 212
26.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 212
27 FLOORING................................................................................................. 213
27.7 QA/QC 217
27.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 217
28 TILING ........................................................................................................ 218

28.7 QA/QC 223
28.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 223
28.9 SANITARY INSTALLATION ...................................................................... 224
28.9.1 General ........................................................................................ 224
28.9.2 Materials ...................................................................................... 224
28.9.3 Execution of work ........................................................................ 226
28.9.4 Project requirements .................................................................... 228
29 FURNITURE ............................................................................................... 235
29.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Drawings, Execution .................................. 235
29.7 QA/QC 242
29.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 242
30 OUTDOOR FACILITIES ............................................................................. 243
30.7 QA/QC 257
30.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 259
30.9 Parking 260

31 OFFSHORE WORKS ................................................................................. 261

31.7 QA/QC 261
31.8 Acceptance ............................................................................................... 261
32 LIFTS ......................................................................................................... 262
32.7 QA/QC 265
32.8 Inspection, Testing and Acceptance ...................................................... 265
33 HVAC ......................................................................................................... 265

1 GENERAL
The general design and quality criteria given below take preference concerning the civil part over
the requirements stated in the other clauses of the specification.
1.1 Scope of Work, Completeness

This specification covers the scope of all civil works in accordance with Clause 5.1 “General” of
this specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional and complete in
all parts in accordance with this specification.
1.2 Civil Design/Engineering

The design and engineering shall be state of the art in accordance with all relevant codes and
standards, functional and complete as specified in this tender document.
Approval by the Engineer
Before starting of design works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the
project design manual containing the design data and the detailed design criteria for all civil works.
Design works shall commence only after approval of the project design manual by the Engineer.
The concrete design and working drawings of all structures shall be submitted by the Contractor
for review by the Engineer.
All steel structure design drawings /workshop drawings /fabrication drawings, if required also of
secondary structures, shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
All main routings (culverts /tunnels /trenches /duct banks /ducts) shall be submitted by the
Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
Approval by relevant authorities
All civil designs and drawings shall be approved by the relevant authorities of the Kingdom of
Saudi-Arabia before start of construction.
1.3 Codes and Standards

The civil works shall be designed, manufactured and erected according to the codes and
standards indicated below:
The design of all materials, constructions and installations, tests and investigations on site, shall
be as a minimum conform to the latest edition or replacement of the following Codes and
Standards (listed in alphabetical order). These standards, codes and regulations are available in
English language edition and the Contractor should hand out a copy of those standards used to
the Engineer for his information.
All materials and the design shall be conforming to the latest edition or replacement of the
following Codes and Standards (listed in alphabetical order):
a) American Standards:
• American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
• American Concrete Institute (ACI)
• American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
• American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
• American Water Works Association (AWWA)
• Uniform Building Code (UBC)
• International Building Code (IBC)
• American Welding Society (AWS)
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
• National Plumbing Code (NPC)
• American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
• Portland Cement Association (PCA)
• National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA)
• Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)
• American Society for Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc.
(ASHRAE)
• Chlorine Institute
b) European Standards:
• European Norm (EN)
• Eurocodes
• International Organization for Standardisation (ISO)
c) British Standards:
• British Standard (BS)

• British Standard Code of Practice (BS CP)
d) German Standards:
• Deutsches Institut für Normung eV (DIN)
• Verein Deutscher Ingenieure (VDI)
• Recommendations of the Committee for waterfront structures, harbours and waterways

(EAW)
e) Local Standards and Regulations
• Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete. in the Arabian Peninsula (CIRIA)
• Saudi-Arabian Security Directives (SD)
• Other local standards and national regulations, if any
• Building regulations and guide lines by the Kingdom of Saudi-Arabia, if any
• HCISS; High Commission for Industrial Security and Safety
• Coast Guard requirements
f) Other Standards
Other internationally accepted standards which ensure a quality equivalent to or higher than the
standards listed above may be used for specific works, but only if these are submitted in an
English language edition.
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS)
• Swedish Standards for sand blasting of steel parts
• Centre for Civil Engineering Research and Codes (CUR)
• CUR /CIRIA Reports and Manuals
• NACE International
• ICE Institution of Civil Engineers
• WHO
If any standard contains a provision which is inconsistent with a provision in another standard,
the more stringent in respect of quality shall apply.

1.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution

Basic requirements for all civil works
• The design of all structures under this contract will be such that differential and total
settlements or other movements shall not exceed acceptable limits and full provision shall
be made for all expansion and other joints. The design will be to the approval of the
Engineer.
• Structural members subjected to flexure will be designed to have adequate stiffness to
limit deflections or any deformations that affect strength or serviceability of a structure
adversely. The maximum allowable deflections of structural members will be in
accordance with the relevant design standards and/or the limits prescribed by the
machinery manufacturers (whichever is less).
• The superstructures and foundations subjected to vibrations (the primary source of these
vibrations being the unbalanced forces generated by rotating or reciprocating equipment)
will be designed such that vibrations will be neither intolerable nor troublesome to
personnel, and will not cause damage to the machine or structure.
• The natural frequency of the whole of the superstructures and foundations or parts thereof
and all structures adjacent thereto shall not coincide with the operating frequency of the
vibrating plant.
• The differences between frequencies and the dynamic analysis of the superstructures
and foundations will be in accordance with the relevant design standard.
• The dimensions of all the buildings will be such as to provide adequate space for the safe
installation and proper operation, maintenance and repair of all plant and equipment.
• Throughout the works all floor slabs above rooms containing electrical equipment will be
watertight. No drain pipes or water pipes or sanitary pipes are permitted to pass through
these rooms.
• No drain pipes or water pipes or sanitary pipes will be embedded in concrete base slabs,
floor slabs etc. In wet areas these pipes will be laid in fill by depressing or raising the floor
level accordingly. However, these pipes can pass through sleeves embedded in the walls.
• All materials used in the Works will be of the best quality of their respective kinds as
specified herein, obtained from approved sources and suppliers and will comply strictly
with the tests prescribed, with the requirements of the latest issue of the relevant
American, British, German Standards or other approved standards.
• Locations and nature of all existing underground services will be identified and
recorded to take every possible precaution against any damage occurring to them or
interference therewith, during the execution of the works.
• In case of provision of any equipment, components, valves, instruments etc. complete for
operation & maintenance use irrespective of the frequency for operating and maintaining
them suitable access will be by means of stairways. For roofs without any equipment,
components, valves, instruments etc. suitable access to the roofs of the buildings by
means of heavy duty FRP ladder will be provided for maintenance and inspection.
• All rooms with fire hazard will be provided with suitable emergency exits.
• Proper access roads with footpaths will be provided to bring in all the equipment and to
take it out in case of maintenance. These access roads will be suitable for the vehicles
which will be used (cars, forklifts, trucks/trailers etc.) to reach up to the point of unloading
of the equipment.
• Safe, convenient and straight forward accesses and means are to be provided to take
equipment in and out of all rooms, at all levels using suitable stair wells and suitable
electric hoists. The dimensions of rooms, stairwells, doors, etc. will be designed to suit
transportation.

• All civil designs and drawings, inclusive all steel designs and drawings will be approved
by the relevant authorities of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia before start of construction.
• HCISS High Commission for Industrial Security and Safety, Saudi Arabian Security
Directives (SD) and other relevant authorities will be strictly adhered to.
• Design Loads/Load Assumptions
Design loads for the design of buildings and structures shall be determined according to BS EN
1991 specifications.
For equipment rooms design loads are to be assessed by the Contractor considering the intended
use and the equipment which is to be installed. Some indicative values are shown below:
Area Value Unit

Live load for building roofs (A/C equipment and 2.5 kN/m2
foundations to be considered additionally)
Sloping Roof-sheet metal construction 1.5 kN/m2

Operation Floors-Ground Floor 35.0 kN/m2
Operation Floors- Upper Floor 17.5 kN/m2
Switchgear Rooms,etc. 10.0 kN/m2
Battery Rooms 15.0 kN/m2
Stores, Workshop Floors-Ground Floor 25.0 kN/m2
Stores, Workshop Floors- Upper Floor 15.0 kN/m2
Light platforms, Walkways, Stairways : Concrete 5.0 kN/m2
Medium platforms, Walkways, Stairways : 7.5 kN/m2
Concrete steel
Heavy platforms, Walkways, Stairways : Concrete 10.0 kN/m2
Steel
Additional dead load for suspended ceiling, pipes, 1.0 kN/m2
AC system, etc.
Control Rooms, Social Rooms, Offices, etc. 5.0 kN/m2
Traffic Loads SLW60,DIN 1072
Roads and pavements, gutters SLW60,DIN 1072
Water tanks, septic tanks, etc. in road areas SLW60,DIN 1072
Areas designated for different loadings on the same floor will be clearly and permanently marked.
• Dead load
Dead load is defined as the weight of all permanent construction including walls, foundations,
floors, roofs, ceilings, partitions, stairways, and fixed service equipment. For heavy industrial
work, this would include equipment, vessels, including internals, pipes, valves, and accessories,
electrical and lighting conduits, switchgear, instrumentation, fireproofing, insulation; ladders,
platforms, and other similar items.
Equipment and piping will be considered empty of product load when calculating dead load. The
gravity weight of soil overburden shall be considered as dead load.
• Erection dead load
The erection dead load is the weight of the equipment at time of erection plus the weight of the
foundation. The foundation weight is the combined weight of the footing, pedestal, and
overburden soil.
• Live load
Live load is defined as the weight superimposed by the use and occupancy of the building or other
structure, but not permanently attached to it. For industrial design, live load can be defined as the
load produced by personnel, moveable equipment, tools, and other items placed on the structure,
but not permanently attached to it. Crane loads will be considered as live load.
The loads assumptions quoted in Table above are to be regarded as minimum requirements.
• Product load
The load will be defined as the gravity load imposed by liquid, solid, or viscous materials in
vessels, tanks, equipment or piping during operation.
• Test load
The test load will be defined as the gravity load imposed by any method necessary to test vessels,
tanks, equipment or piping.
• Thermal load
Thermal loads are defined as forces caused by changes in temperature. The primary source of
thermal loads in an industrial plant is the expansion or contraction of vessels and piping. Another
source of thermal loads in a redundant structure is the expansion or contraction of the entire
structure or individual structural components.
• Impact load
Any live load that can produce a dynamic effect (such as a moving load) will be increased by an
impact factor.
• Sand load
Sand load may be additive to live loads only when the area under consideration is used as a work
area. The load will be derived as per local regulations and/or experience. The effect of
accumulation of sand due to sand movement in remote area structures will be considered in the
design.
• Truck load

Structures accessible to trucks will be designed to withstand the gravity, lateral and impact effects
of truck loading. Truck loading will be SLW 60 as defined by DIN 1072. However, when actual
expected vehicles produce more severe load conditions they shall govern.
• Soil load
Soil loads will consist of lateral earth pressures. Active and passive coefficients for lateral
pressures will be obtained from the project soils report. The weight of soil shall be considered as
dead load.
• Hydrostatic load and buoyancy
Hydrostatic load is the load due to water pressure. The design of structures shall include
hydrostatic loads when applicable. The buoyancy load is equal to the weight of the volume of
displaced water.
• Wind load
Design wind forces will depend on Facility Site wind conditions and on the shape, size, and
exposure of the various structures comprising the Works and the Facility. Structures shall be
designed to withstand horizontal and uplift pressures based on a basic wind speed of 43 m/sec.
(155 km/hr) at 10 m above grade for 3-second gust, per American Society of Civil Engineers,
ASCE 7-2002. Occupancy Category shall be III with Importance Factor = 1.15.
The prevailing wind direction is North-West.

Exposure Factor, Inland C
Exposure Factor, within 0.5 km of shoreline D
• Earthquake load
The Contractor shall be responsible to investigate the Zone area which applies to o Plant
regarding design of all structures against earthquakes accordingly. The actual earthquake load
will be verified during based on a detailed soil investigation report.
The actual seismic load shall be verified by Contractor based on a detailed soil investigation
report.
An individual seismic assessment shall be carried out according to the Seismic Design Criteria of
the Saudi Building Code (SBC 301 - Loads and Power Requirements Chapter 9) for each
desalination plant.
According to the SBC, some parameters can be established, depending exclusively of the
desalination plant location.
The following values shall be considered as reference:
The mapped acceleration parameters Ss and S1 obtained from Figures 9.4.1(a) to 9.4.1(q) of the
SBC (301) are the following:
Based on the site soil properties defined in a detailed soil investigation report, the site shall be
classified as Site Class A, B, C, D, E or F in accordance with SBC 301 - Chapter 14. Afterwards,
the design response spectrum curve shall be developed as defined in SBC 301 Chapter 9.
All supporting structures will be designed for seismic load.
• Dynamic loads
Each structure will be designed to withstand the effects of vibration and impact to which it may be
subjected. Each structure and foundation supporting a compressor, pump or other machinery
having significant dynamic unbalance will be designed to resist the peak loads specified by the
manufacturer. Vibration amplitudes of the supporting structure or foundation will be kept within
acceptable limits for dynamic forces that occur during normal machine operation. In the case of a
tall and slender structure, there may be a need to investigate the dynamic effects of wind gusts.
The vibration pad for absorption of vibration due to rotating or reciprocating machine will be
suitably designed to reach maximum thickness of material required and its complete spreading
below the entire foundation. In case dynamic analysis is not available, the weight of the foundation
shall not be less than 5 times the weight of the reciprocating equipment and 3 times the weight of
the rotating equipment.
• Surge load
Surge loads may occur in some vessels or equipment. In such cases, the magnitude and direction
of the load will be given by the equipment supplier.
• Bundle pull loads
The force requirements to remove the tube bundle from a shell and tube heat exchanger may
vary from zero for those vessels in which the removal is done by application of hydraulic pressure
resulting in no external reaction to 1 - 1/2 times the weight of the bundle for external pull. The
variation is due to the unpredictable coefficient of friction existing between the shell and the tube
supports after the exchanger has been in operation. The usual practice, if applicable, is to use
one-half the weight of the bundle for exchangers in clean service, but not less than 1,000 kg.
• Future load
Loads from future expansion will be considered wherever required.
• Miscellaneous loads
Miscellaneous loads will be defined as loads that do not fit into the categories listed in this clause.
Typical miscellaneous loads are loads, during erection, maintenance and repair or forces due to
creep, shrinkage, or settlement.
For the design of the individual structural components realistic load combinations in accordance
with the relevant design standards will be considered.
All loadings considered in the design will be justified with supporting details.
All computer calculations will be followed by explanation of the program in detail.
Tolerances

The following tolerances for buildings and structures are binding:
• For setting-out and as-built measurements, the position shall be within the following limits:
Buildings ± 0.5 cm
Pipes, channels and underground lines, ± 2 cm
Offshore structures ± 5 cm
• For elevations the following limits shall be observed: Floors ± 1 cm

Concrete ducts ± 2 cm
Underground lines, cables, offshore structures, etc. ± 5 cm Drainage systems in accordance with
gradient
• For dimensional tolerances of structures DIN 18 201, DIN 18 202, and

DIN 18 203 are binding.
• For settlement measurements:
For each settlement measurement, the levelling instrument shall be checked by levelling from the
centre and adjusting as required. The results shall be recorded in a Surveyor's Field Book.
The so called base measurement shall in all cases be carried out twice completely
independently. The base measurement shall not have any point obtained by an intermediate
sighting. The closing error for all levelling operations shall not exceed 3 mm and the heights of
the individual points obtained from 2 levelling operations shall not differ from each other by more
than 2 mm after distribution of the errors.
In the settlement measurements, one measurement is sufficient provided the following

requirement is satisfied:
• Check of the starting point
from the starting point, levelling out and back to the next settlement bolt, maximum difference 2
mm from the settlement bolt for which the height has been determined, a loop levelling (without
intermediate sighting) back to the starting point, with a closing error of less than 3 mm.
The values stated here are minimum requirements. In the case of structures which are especially
sensitive to settlement or for built-in items of plant, tighter tolerances may be necessary.
Clearances and dimensions
For walkways, footpath access to machinery and plants the minimum clearance shall not be less
than 2.30 m in height and 1.00 m in width.
Fire escape paths shall not be longer than 30 m or less than 1.0 m wide. If not indicated differently,
erection routes shall be dimensioned in all directions 0.3 m greater than the biggest part which
has to be transported, together with its transportation means.
The protection devices shall be in accordance with applicable safety regulations.
All platform, galleries and stairways shall be provided with guard rails and kick plates on all sides.
Wherever possible, the angle of slope for stairways shall be standardised at 38° or 42° to the
horizontal. No flights shall have more than 16 risers with a maximum height of 3.35 m for a slope
of 42° or 3.15 m for a slope of 38°. Where a stairway height exceeds 16 risers, each flight shall
be equally separated by a landing.
Risers should not be more than 170mm and treads should not be less than 250mm:
Minimum clearance height of rooms shall be 2.80 m.
Special requirements for materials to avoid corrosion problems – reinforced concrete
General
Due to very severe climatic conditions in the project area, special measures are necessary to
protect the different materials from corrosion. In this context the following materials need
protection measures:
Reinforced concrete
The most common type of failure of reinforced concrete is that of corrosion of the embedded
reinforcing steel due usually to penetration of chlorides into the concrete. The following design
codes shall be used for the corrosion protection of reinforced concrete structures:
• NACE RP0187-87:
Design Considerations for Corrosion Control of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete Structures
• NACE RP0390-90:
Maintenance and Rehabilitation Considerations for Corrosion Control of Existing Steel

Reinforced Concrete Structures
The CIRIA guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf Region: The following special design
aspects have to be considered by the Contractor:
• concrete surfaces where seawater/seawater spray/chemicals/etc. might accumulate,

shall be provided with an approved slope.
• for the same reason as above, the relevant edges shall be chamfered.
• in order to control the size and mitigate the occurrence of cracks and to ensure concrete
durability, the Contractor shall implement the following design requirements:
• limit the tensile stress in reinforcement.
• use smaller reinforcing bars well distributed over the zone of maximum concrete tension.
• increase minimum cover on all reinforcing steel.
• use Portland cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150,Type I.
• use very dense, low water/cement ratio (i.e. 0.38 ± 0.02) concrete.
• use synthetic fibres to minimise surface shrinkage cracks.
• provide foundation tanking for any structure in contact with ground water and
protective coating for above ground water level.
• provide strict measures for concrete curing to prevent plastic shrinkage and thermal
gradients resulting from early age heat of hydration of fresh concrete
• protect inserts, anchor bolts and all steel items embedded in the concrete from
corrosion.
• prevent the usage of steel profiles in small concrete sections.

• identify clearly the locations of the construction joints and expansion joints as well as their
surface preparation in the drawings.
• incorporate other factors to increase concrete durability in concrete specifications, such
as special measures for concrete protection in the Gulf region, especially for hot weather
concreting etc.
• give special consideration for the protection of concrete surfaces subject to high
temperatures during plant operations.
Depending on the place of use, the special corrosion protection measures for reinforced concrete
shall be as follows:
1) Concrete exposed to underground and groundwater
• minimum concrete cover 75 mm

• minimum concrete cover as stipulated in ACI 350/BS 8006
• black coated rebars
• microsilica additions, consisting of a powder, which added to the concrete has the
property of greatly reduce its permeability. This shall be provided in accordance with the
Norwegian Standard NS 3045 and Canadian National Standard CAN/CSA-A23.5-M86
• outside protection by tanking membranes and protection boards, with membranes
extending 15 cm above grade level, without coating. The top edge of the membrane shall
be protected by suitable means, which is exposed above grade level.
2) Concrete exposed to seawater and seawater spray

• microsilica additions
• corrosion inhibitors
• outside protection of concrete by black coating ( which consists of a primer penetrating
into the concrete and a compatible top coat).
• Cathodic protection of rebars with impressed current from an external current source.
3) Concrete above ground and not exposed to seawater
• minimum concrete cover as stipulated in ACI 350/BS 8006

• outside protection (rendering, epoxy coating)
• black coated rebar
4) Foundations for equipment, pipe racks, situated outside, but without exposure to
chemicals, seawater, and ceilings of utility trenches.

• below ground outside protection by tanking membranes and protection boards, with
membranes extending 15 cm above ground level
• above ground outside protection of concrete by epoxy coating (silane) siloxane type,
which consists of a primer penetrating into the concrete and a compatible top coat)
5) Concrete exposed to chemicals, chemical splash (including neutralization tanks)

• same measures as for item 4) above

• acid/alkali resistant tiles fixed with acid/alkali resistant mortar and grouted with
acid/alkali resisting grout
Special requirements for materials to avoid corrosion problems – steel structures
The steel structures shall be coated with corrosion protection and painting as specified in section
17.6 of this volume.
Particularly, the following steel structures shall be hot dip galvanized:
• Structures with chemical exposure

• Structures with seawater exposure
The Contractor shall provide all technical information and a complete list of all parts to be
galvanized for the Engineer’s approval.
Steel shall be coated by the hot-dip process in molten zinc, producing a continuous coating of
uniform thickness as specified under “Corrosion Protection and Painting”, also reference is made
to this specification.
Embedded Items
To avoid cathodic/anodic corrosion between different types of steel all embedded parts for outside
and inside conditions shall be of a normal steel quality being coated with corrosion protection and
painting as specified in section 17.6 of this volume.
Stainless steel (316Ti /317L or better) shall be used only in areas with chemical attack.
The embedded items (anchor bolts, fixing elements, etc) for inside conditions with a non-corrosive
climate, shall be coated with corrosion protection and painting.
The embedded items for outside conditions with a normal climatic exposure shall be coated with
corrosion protection and painting.
The embedded parts for inside and outside conditions with a corrosive exposure like seawater,
seawater spray, etc. shall be of stainless steel (type Ti or better) and shall be hot-dip galvanized
and adequately coated.
The embedded items for inside and outside structures with chemical attack shall be of stainless
steel (type 316Ti or better) and shall be hot-dip galvanized and adequately coated.
1.5 Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling)

All materials and related works shall be in accordance with this specification.
Only approved material shall be used. Unapproved material shall be rebuilt and disposed on
Contractor’s own charge.

Each column base shall have only one size of anchor bolts and nuts.
New/Virgin Materials
Only new/virgin materials shall be used and no recycled material is allowed. All materials shall be
proofed and tested with design certification. Materials shall be according to the requirements and
functional in any case.
Material without long time proofing
New materials without long time proofing shall be for approval by the Engineer before start of
construction. The Contractor shall inform about their use by writing, stating precisely why and how
those shall be used.
Materials without design certification
If new materials are not yet generally certified by the building authorities but have a specifically
authorisation they shall be for approval by the Engineer before start of construction. The
Contractor shall inform about their use by writing, stating precisely why and how those shall be
used instead of materials state-of-the-art.
Samples
The Contractor shall provide samples of all materials, embedded parts and installations, etc. for
the Engineer’s approval before start of construction.
All samples shall be collected and stored in a “sample room” and all approvals shall be
consecutively recorded.
1.6 Execution (Assembling, Installation)

All civil execution works shall be in accordance with this specification. The specification is drawn
up on the assumption that the scope of the initial equipment and consumption materials is to be
provided complete in every respect; everything required for the use and care of the installations
shall be supplied, even if this is not exclusively specified in the documentation.
1.7 QA/QC
All quality assurance and quality control activities for civil works shall be in accordance with this
specification.
Before starting of design works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the
project design manual containing the design data and the detailed design criteria for all civil works.
Design works shall commence only after approval of the project design manual by the Engineer.

1.8 Acceptance
All acceptance tests for civil works and related activities shall be in accordance with this
specification.

2 LAYOUT
2.1 General
The sites of the Desalination Pant are the east coast of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The
desalination plants with its corresponding facilities will be lined up perpendicular to the Red Sea.
The various buildings and installations of the Desalination Plant shall be arranged to facilitate
operational orientation within the plant and phasing erection and commissioning.
To achieve best efficiency for operation and maintenance the layout of the plants shall be process
optimised, e.g. short connections and short piping, local switchgear buildings, including shortest
distance for the power supply of equipment.
Furthermore, time and cost optimised constructions and sufficient space for erection and overhaul
are basic requirements.
The general layouts of the plants are shown in the drawings “General Layout“ (Volume XI
Annexure .1)

3 SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND SERVICES

The services to be provided within the scope of this specification comprise the planning and
complete supply and execution in every respect including all the necessary calculations and
documentation, prefabrication, delivery, erection, commissioning and acceptance of all civil works
required for faultless operation of the plant in the following fields:
• General installations
• Buildings and structures for RO plants
• Structures for Intake and Outfall
• The extent of the civil works for the above sectors consists basically of, but is not limited
to the following services:
• Surveying works, subsoil investigations and marine investigation, ;
• Dedicated studies, such as transient analysis for the seawater intake and pump station,
hydraulic model for the intake structure including breakwater stability of the off-shore
pipework and the shore protection revetment as well as a recirculation study;
• earth works;
• foundation works;
• concrete and masonry works;
• structural steelwork;
• finishing works;
• All piping inside the buildings (interconnecting pipework between units, drinking,
sewage, rainwater, etc.);
• sanitary installations;
• roads, hardstandings and surfacings;
• fences and gates;
• walls;
• civil works for pipelines and ducts;
• storm water drainage system;
• dredging and off-shore works;
• detailed design of all above mentioned civil works including structural analysis, working
drawings, etc.
• supply of all labour, materials, plant, equipment, temporary work, tools for constructing
the above mentioned civil works.
The technical requirements specified under this clause should apply in all conditions.
Prior to the start of any excavation works the existing underground facilities (pipes, cables,
foundations, etc.) shall be located, (if any)
Afterwards these underground facilities shall be uncovered carefully by hand excavation,

protected against further damages or relocated and subsequently demolished, if required with the
approval of the Engineer.
A safety clearance of 10 (ten) meters (margin of safety) is binding for all structures; no mechanical
excavation is permitted therein.
Where items of mechanical plant are mounted on foundations which are part of the civil
engineering works, the Contractor shall carry out suitable levelling and adjustment of the plant on
the civil foundations before the plant is secured in position by suitable non-shrink grouting. The

Contractor shall check the alignment, levelling or positioning of the mechanical plant in question,
before and after grouting. The Contractor shall make records of the alignment, levelling or
positional measurement and shall maintain such records until his activities at site are concluded.
Where large and complex plant is installed on extensive foundations, a datum shall be established
to check for movement or settlement of the foundations.
The building steelwork shall be designed to carry the loads and forces imposed by pipework,
cables and associated fittings which also form part of the works, and all necessary supports and
fixings shall be shown on the relevant drawings.
Such supports and fixings may be secured to the steelwork by bolting, welding or clamping.
No other supports or fixings shall be subsequently attached to the steelwork nor may any other
drilling, cutting or welding be carried out without the prior permission of the Engineer.
Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that construction will be done in the vicinity of
operational Plants. The Contractor will be responsible for liaising and operating with the SWCC
operational staff and for providing them with free and uninterrupted access at all times to those
areas of the site required for their operations. The Contractor shall submit a quality plan for site
construction and erection work.
The work is to be carried out by the Contractor who will be wholly responsible for ensuring that all
materials used in the work and temporary works comply with the approved standards, and that all
processes of workmanship are carried out with a high degree of efficiency, in accordance with an
approved program and in compliance with the contractually agreed specification.
Only material shall be used which was approved by the Engineer.
While the civil works are in progress the Contractor shall employ suitably qualified competent
English speaking civil engineers to be full time on the site to verify the work, quality and progress
of the civil works. These engineers shall have ten years of experience of construction of
Desalination plants and be responsible for liaison with the Engineer at site. The Contractor should
submit CVs of site personnel to Employer for approval
The Contractor’s engineers shall inspect, check and test the work and assure themselves that it
is wholly satisfactory before submitting any item to the Engineer for his approval.
To ensure proper quality assurance the Contractor shall submit for approval a Civil Works Quality
Plan.
The Engineer will be responsible for ensuring thorough inspections, meetings and discussions,
that the Contractor exercises competent supervision over his workforce and will have the power
to instruct the Contractor to cut out any work which in his opinion, is unsatisfactory and to
reconstruct such work to his satisfaction.
All work is to be carried out in accordance with recognised standards of safety. Engineer will have
the power to instruct the Contractor to comply with any requirements in this direction which he
may deem desirable. This will not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
Contract.
All work shall be constructed to the lines and levels shown on the drawings prepared by the
Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer unless varied by written instruction of the Engineer.
Various buildings comprising the works shall be architecturally compatible and conform to an
overall architectural concept and shall be suitable for the operating and climatic conditions at the
site. Contractors shall submit with their offer detailed proposals for the architectural treatment
which shall be based on best engineering practices.
The Civil Engineering works shall be carried out to a standard of workmanship compatible with
the best practice, and an indication of the minimum acceptable standard of workmanship as given
in this specification. All elements shall require minimum maintenance and be of durable
construction.
The Contractor shall employ competent design engineers to prepare civil design.
All designs shall be prepared in accordance with the best engineering practice and with the
requirements of this Specification and the appropriate National Codes of Practice and Standards
approved by the Engineer in so far as they are applicable and up-to-date. Any departure from the
appropriate Codes and Standards must be fully explained in writing for the Engineer’s approval.
The buildings, structures and roads within the site and their design and detailing shall comply with
and satisfy the fundamental technical and operational requirements of the mechanical and
electrical plant to be accommodated therein and with the requirements of this specification.
Buildings and structures shall be earthed as specified in the Electrical Specification.
All basements and ducts, trenches and/or tunnels inside and outside buildings shall be provided
with suitable permanent pumps and sump pits to enable water spillage and firefighting water to
be easily removed. They shall be provided with suitable permanent pumps with level switch
control contact to DCS and sump pit.
In case any duct access the buildings through basement walls, trenches and tunnels this shall be
protected from water leakage or filtration by using water blug or sealing which is approved
previously by the Consultant.
If a culvert(s), and /or tunnel(s), trench(es) or any other underground services are crossing streets,
the street shall be constructed as a bridge for truck loading without effecting the underground
structures.
All buildings with two (2) and more floors (ground + 1) shall have sufficient passenger lift(s).
Basement(s) shall count also as floor(s); if a permanent roof access is required the roof shall
count also as a floor. The lifts shall have stops at all levels.
All civil designs and drawings, inclusive all steel designs and drawings must be approved by
employer / engineer prior to start of construction. If the Contractor and/or his Subcontractor(s)
starts with the production of any constructive elements, etc. off site and/or on site, before that
approval was given, all changes in Contractor’s work caused by disapproval and/or remarks shall
be fully on Contractor’s risk.
All main routings (pipe racks /culverts /tunnels /trenches /ducts /duct banks) for all lots (piping,
electrical/cabling, etc.) shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Engineer.
All structures, also embankments and shorelines, etc. shall have sufficient roads for safety
purposes and for maintenance.

In some cases, even though the Contractor may not find detailed information/description of some
structures/buildings in the Tender Documents, mostly in case of secondary structures/common
facilities, it is still the Contractor’s responsibility to propose a complete plant with all necessary
structures/buildings accordingly. The Contractor has to show that his offer is complete and
fulfilling all requirements described in the Tender Documents.
The dimensions/measurements given in the Tender Documents is for indication only. The
Contractor is completely responsible for checking the accuracy of this dimensions and proposing
a solution which are sufficient to fulfil all functions of the plant as described in the Tender
Documents.
3.1 Description of Civil Works

The Contractor shall raise finished ground level to the levels shown in the drawings.
The main plant components are arranged perpendicular to the coast starting from the coast to the
inland:
Seawater off-shore intake and intake pipe works

Intake sea water screening and pumping station
Pre-treatment chemicals area (ferric chloride, coagulant aid, sulphuric acid)
Electrochlorination facilities
Dual Media Filters 1st stage - Roughing
Dual Media Filters 2nd stage - Polishing
Filters Backwash Tank with Filter Backwash Pump House
Pass-1 and Pass -2 SWRO Area
Permeate tanks
Limestone filters
CO2 storage and dossing plant
Product Water Break Tank & Product Water Pump House
Surge Vessel foundation work (if required)
Main Chemical room including Sulphuric acid storage area
RO CIP & Neutralisation tanks
Sanitary Sewage collection and lifting station.
Waste water treatment area including dirty backwash tank and sludge collection
Outfall chamber
Interconnecting Pipe works and Channels
Electrical building
Control room
Firefighting station
Road Work
Fencing (temporary)
Surface water drainage works
Drain pipes carrying off-spec water to outfall chamber
Trenches for outfall pipe installation and off-shore outfall pipe works
Other auxiliary buildings for the plant
Architectural requirements

The architectural requirements for this project include the following:
• Provide a functional and aesthetically pleasing Operations Building.

• Provide functional buildings for the treatment process while at the same time keeping with
the theme of the Operations Building architecture.
• Develop an architectural scheme that blends the plant structures into a unified design.
Provide a design which integrates the treatment process with the architectural
requirements.
• The architectural design will serve as a good neighbour to the current adjacent plants.
• The architecture will be attractive, economical, and acceptable to the Saline Water
Conversion Corporation (SWCC).
• Public areas will be separated from private staff areas.
• All materials used in the design will be low maintenance.
Access requirements
The Contractor should provide full unimpeded access to enable the operation and maintenance
of all mechanical, electrical and instrumentation plant items. The requirement shall include, but
are not limited to in accordance with Volume IX B-14 “Cranes and lifting equipment”.
3.2 Landscaping
3.2.1 Scope
a) Landscaping shall be provided around the plant site to screen the visual views and to
provide buffering between the plant site and the adjacent land. Landscaping will consist of
plants and materials native to the area. Suitable landscaping and plantation shall be
designed to reduce the impact of the salt laden atmosphere. Automatic and programmable
irrigation system should be provided. A landscaping program will be developed in
coordination with SWCC.
b) This Part of the Specification covers the design, materials, delivery and installation of all
landscaping work and requirements. The following work shall be provided where shown or
as required:
1) Submittal of landscaping designs and proposed materials to the Engineer for approval.
2) Preparation of the areas to be seeded and planted.
3) Replacement of the existing soil with suitable topsoil capable of growing and supporting
the plants.
4) Fertilizing and seeding areas for grass cover.
5) Fertilizing and planting of turf, flowers, shrubs and trees.
6) Programmable/automatic irrigation system for the landscaping
3.2.2 Design Requirements
a) The contractor’s design shall include appropriate landscaping works to aesthetically

enhance the living and working environment by the application of perennial indigenous
grasses and plants as colour, texture and space dividers, wind and privacy breaks and soil
stabilisation.
b) The landscaping designs and location of all plants, shrubs, and outline of areas to be
seeded shall be approved by the Engineer before any supplies or materials are ordered
and before any work commences.
c) Large plants such as trees shall be planted a minimum of 2 meters distant from any
underground utility lines and buildings.
d) Medium size plants such as shrubs shall be planted a minimum of 0.9 meter distant from
any underground utility lines and buildings.
3.2.3 Materials
a) Topsoil shall be free of deleterious substances such as excessive salts and toxic materials,
large gravel, stones, rocks and boulders and insects and preferably shall be of the a type
normally supplied by landscape specialists, gardeners or nurserymen in the area.
b) Fertilizers shall be uniform in composition, free-flowing and type suitable for the specific
application and shall contain nitrogen, phosphoric acids, potash and other compounds.
c) Lime and other subsoil improvement materials, such as clays, barns, peat, composts and
other earths shall be utilised to optimise the uniformly tilled soil and additive plant and seed
beds.
d) Grasses shall be mixtures approved for the locality which have been demonstrated to be
resistant to temperature and moisture adverse effects, fungi, inherent plant disease, and
light foot traffic.
e) Shrubs and trees shall be selected for their demonstrated resistance to adverse effects of
wind, temperature, moisture, fungi, insects, disease, and local soil condition.
f) Ground cover planning shall include broad and narrow leaf types and shall be adaptable to
local conditions.
g) Inert ground covers shall include bark chips, select stone or gravel, peat moss and other
approved materials selected for their specific application as visual wind resistance, and soil
and moisture retardants, and shall not be malodorous if decomposable.
h) Specific plants acceptable for use in Saudi Arabia include but are not limited to palma,
acacia, eleagnus augustifolius, eleagnus commutate, hippophae rhamnoides, sambucus
nigra, lonicera xylosteum, rosa rugose “max-graf”, rosa multiflora, hibiscus bougainvillea,
juniperus communis, tamarix odessana, jasminum grandiflorum and various grasses.
3.2.4 Delivery

a) All plants and materials shall be delivered to the project and immediately before their
intended use to eliminate damage or loss, they shall be stored until use in the suppliers’
original containers or packages and protected from adverse environmental effects by
shade, enclosure storage, and watering in accordance with suppliers recommendations.
b) The contractor shall replace all materials lost or damaged, with new materials to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.2.5 Installation
a) Acceptable equipment shall be provided for the proper preparation of the ground and for
handling and placing all materials and plants.
b) Existing unsuitable soil shall be excavated from the areas which are to be landscaped and
replaced with properly mixed and tilled soils and fertilizers.
c) Excessively large rocks or boulders discovered during landscaping excavation or on the

site in general may be left in place or relocated for specific landscaping use at the discretion
of the Contractor when approved the the Engineer.
d) The following minimum depths of topsoil shall be provided:

1) 150mm for grasses
2) 200mm for flowers
3) 450mm for shrubs
4) Suitable for burial of burlap wrapped ball encased roots for trees.
e) Lime and/or fertilizer shall be incorporated to a depth of 150mm and uniformly distributed.
f) Grasses shall be sown at a uniform rate of not less than 2.7kgs. per 100sq. m. Broadcast
seeding shall be done under calm wind conditions. Seeds shall be covered with a minimum
of 6mm of well mixed and tilled topsoil. The seeded areas shall be lightly rolled after sowing.
Seeding shall be done during the optimum germination season to assure healthy growth.
Suppliers’ instructions shall be implemented.
g) Shrubs and trees shall be planted during the optimum season.
h) Ground covers shall be used for soil stabilisation. Plants shall be spaced per suppliers’
instructions. Inert materials shall be applied a minimum of 40mm average depth or as
indicated on supplier’s packages.
3.2.6 Maintenance
a) Trees shall be properly supported against winds until firmly rooted.
b) Shrubs and seeded areas shall be protected against traffic or other damage.
c) The Contractor shall implement proper maintenance operations after each plant is planted
and assure healthy growing conditions by watering, fertilizing, spraying for insects or fungi,
pruning, weeding and any other necessary operations such as replacement of dead plants

until final acceptance by the Engineer.
3.3 Detailed Description of Individual Works

Seawater off-shore intake and intake pipework
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the Seawater Offshore
Intake and intake Pipework.
The works shall include, but are not limited to:
Excavation, dewatering and construction of on-shore shaft

Mobilisation of pipe jacking equipment
• Pipe jacking of 2 GRP pipes, (Note: The length and diameter shall be defined by
Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer).
The offshore intake pipework shall run perpendicular to the shore line to the new screening and
pumping station, as shown in the drawings.
With respect to the safety of the navigation, a solar powered electric beacon shall be installed on
the intake end of the seawater intake pipework. The sea lantern shall be mounted in a steel mast
with a total height of 5 m and a minimum range of 4 nautical miles. The electrical signals shall be
in accordance with the requirements of the local marine authorities and the recommendations of
the International Association of Lighthouse Authorities (IALA).
The final dimensions and location of the offshore seawater intake shall be given by the Contractor
and reviewed by the Engineer. No additional costs can be claimed as deviation of the final design
from the specified dimensions which are for tender purposes only.
Intake seawater screening and pumping station
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the Intake screening
and pumping station. All equipment shall be enclosed. The intake and its structures are to be
designed for earthquake resistance and should consider the vibration of equipment in its design.
• Under water excavation including dewatering, if required

• Concrete works
• Reinforcement steel works
• Pump / Equipment Foundation
• Civil works for pipelines and ducts
• Miscellaneous embedded items
• Backfill and survey of the completed area
• Disposal of surplus earth
• All structural steelwork
• All roofing and walls
Electrochlorination building

The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the electrochlorination
building
• Excavation including dewatering, if required

• Concrete Works
• Bund Walls for the storage tanks (110% capacity)
Dual Media Filters
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the dual media filters.

• Concrete Works
• Media Filling
• Underdrainage system (if required)
• Civil works for pipelines and ducts including pipe gallery
• Structural steel work including Truss, columns, beams
• Roof sheeting
Filter Backwash Tank with Filter Backwash Pump House
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the Filter Backwash
Tank with Filter Backwash Pump House.

• Concrete Works
Pass-1 SWRO, Pass-2 SWRO and Cartridge Filters building
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the building including
Pass-1 SWRO, Pass-2 SWRO and Cartridge Filters.

• Concrete Works
• Hollow block masonry
• Structural steel work including Truss, columns, beams
• Roof sheeting
Product Water Break Tank & Product Water Pump House
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the Product Water Tank
& Product Water Pump House. The Product Water Pump House shall be enclosed.

• Concrete Works
• Structural steel work including truss, columns, beams
• Roof sheeting
Post Treatment Area
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the Post Treatment
units.

• Concrete Works
Surge Vessel Foundation Works (if required)

The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the foundation for surge
vessel (if required).

• Concrete Works
Chemical Central Storage area
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the chemical building
including Sulphuric acid storage areas and dosing areas.

• Concrete Works
RO CIP & Neutralisation tanks
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the RO CIP &
Neutralisation tanks.

• Concrete Works
Additional Chemical Storage area:
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of any additional chemical
storage areas.


• Concrete Works
Sanitary Sewage collection
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the sanitary sewage
collection.

• Concrete Works
Interconnecting Pipe works and Channels and Cable Ducts

• Concrete Works
• Structural steel works
Electrical building and control room
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the Electrical building
and control room. The fire barrier walls shall be provided between two adjacent transformers and
also between transformer and any close-by building. The fire barrier wall shall be designed for 2-
hour fire rating.
All the cables within the basement of the electrical building shall be protected against fire
according the Saudi Building Code (SBC) and the requirements of BS 7846 and BS 6387
Category “F1 and F2”.
The fire resistant cables shall be provided for any emergency lighting circuits, power and UPS
supply circuits, battery and charger circuits, fire services installations, smoke extraction system,
and those circuits required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions.
The fire resistant cables shall be XLPE Insulated LSZH cables and shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4066 / BS EN 50268 / IEC 60332: Part 1 for tests on a single cable and Part
3 for tests on bunched cables under fire conditions when tested in accordance with that standard.

• Concrete Works
• Civil works for ducts
• Cable gallery with man access at basement level
Main Transformer Yard
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the transformer yard. One soak oil pit shall
be provided below each transformer which shall be connected to common oil sump. Transformer
oil containment system shall be generally designed as specified in electrical specification.

• Concrete Works
• Transformer Foundation
• Gravelling
• Anti-weed and anti-pest measure
• Structural steel work including truss, columns, beams
• Roof sheeting
Road Work
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for the construction of the road within proposed
area, connecting to existing plant road.
• Preparation of sub base

• Water bound macadam
• Finishing
• Covered parking bays (8 number)
• Re-asphalt all roads connecting, and common with, the existing plant.
Fencing
The Contractor shall perform all civil work required for temporary fencing and gate.

• Concrete Works
• Fencing
• Removing of fencing and gates at the end of the construction works
Surface Water Drainage Works
The Contractor shall design the surface water drainage system for discharge to the outfall.

• Concrete Works
Drain Pipe works carrying off-spec water to Outfall Chamber
The Contractor shall design the pipework carrying off-spec water for discharge to the outfall.

• Concrete Works
Outfall Structure including outfall chamber
The Contractor shall design the outfall with the jacking of 1 DN2500 GRP pipe and a length of
560 m

• Concrete Works

4 LAND TOPOGRAPHY WORKS

The Contractor shall carry out all the necessary surveying works in order to:
• obtain topographic survey maps

• ensure that the position and elevation of all works constructed by him are correct.
Any preliminary Land Topography Report provided or attached as part of the Tender Documents
shall be considered as reference by the Contractor.
The topographic survey map shall show the existing site levels for all areas of the plant on a 10
meter grid and resulting contour lines at 0.5 meter vertical intervals. Special elements of the
morphology as depressions, channels, ridges in elevations, single items or small items, landmarks
or any ostentatious sign shall be grabbed separately.
For setting out the Contractor shall propose and install an adequate number of transferred
benchmarks (TBM). Their level and grid coordinates shall be related to the existing reference
system.
The required number of TBMs and the measuring methods and devices used must be in
accordance to BS 5606 on accuracy. Documentation (location, levels, coordinates, field book
calculations) concerning the data transfer from the existing benchmarks to the new TBMs shall
be prepared by the Contractor.
The TBMs shall be constructed as a concrete block of at least 600 mm in square, with the top 300
mm above final ground elevation and the bottom 1200 mm below ground.
A vertical 20 mm diameter brass bolt approximately 100 mm in length, cast in and protruding
above the top of the concrete block and scribed with crossed lines or a punch mark shall be cast
in the concrete block.
The required accuracy in northing, easting and elevations shall be ±10 mm relative to the existing
benchmarks.
All benchmarks shall be the constant starting point for reference and checking measurements.
Therefore, they must be secured and marked in such a way that they can be found at any time
and may not be destroyed by ongoing construction activities.
The results of the survey shall be reported as follows:
Preliminary site survey report
• An executive summary stating the objectives of the survey and containing a brief
description of the work undertaken as well as the major conclusions
• Description of the survey work, referring to the method applied, equipment used, work
organisation, field operation, data processing, interpretation and presentation of the
results
• A site survey plan on a scale of 1:500, showing the survey results and the location of the
TBMs.
Within 2 weeks after the receipt of Employer’s comments the Contractor shall submit the

Final site survey report having all those comments incorporated into it. For the final report the
Contractor shall also provide all the survey data in a digital format so as to permit reprocessing of
any desired part or aspect of the survey. The Contractor shall propose the most efficient and
convenient form of digital support. The Contractor shall also provide the software necessary to
gain access to the data in digital format as well as the specifications for the computer workstation
to be used.
The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with all the surveying instruments and give the
necessary assistance in checking all the dimensions, levels and locations established by the
Contractor. Notwithstanding any approval, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for his exact
survey and no extra costs due to incorrect measurements or levelling and/or errors shall be
refunded.

5 SUBSOIL INVESTIGATIONS
5.1 Codes and standards

The Contractor shall comply with all local laws, rules and regulations applicable to the works. The
investigation procedure shall be governed by international standards and codes, in the latest
edition thereof (valid in listed order):
BS 1377 Test methods for soil for civil engineering purposes
BS 3882 Recommendations and classifications for topsoil
BS 4019 Core drilling equipment
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations
BS 6031 Code of practice for earthworks
DIN 1054 Subsoil, permissible loading of subsoil
DIN 4017 Subsoil
Part 1: Analysis of bearing capacity for footing with vertical and central loading
Part 2: Bearing capacity calculations of spread foundations in the case of eccentric and inclined
application of the load; recommendations
DIN 4019 Subsoil
Part 1: Analysis of settlement for vertical and central loading
Part 2: Settlement calculations in the case of inclined and eccentric application of the load
DIN 4020 Geotechnical investigations for civil engineering purposes DIN 4021 Subsoil
Part 1: Exploration by trial pits and borings as well as sampling; investigation in soil
Part 2: As above; investigation in rock
Part 3: As above; investigation of ground water
DIN 4022 Part 1: Subsoil and groundwater, designation and description of soil types and rocky
soil; list of soil courses for testing and boring without continuously gaining core samples
Part 2: As above; list of soil courses for investigations and boring in rocky soil
Part 3: Subsoil and groundwater; designation and description of soil types and rock; borehole log
for boring in soil (loose rock) by continuous extraction of cores
DIN 4023 Subsoil and water drilling; graphical representation of results

DIN 4030 Evaluation of liquids, soils and gases aggressive to concrete
DIN 4094 Part 1: Subsoil; equipment for dynamic and static subsoil soundings; dimensions of
apparatus and process
Part 2: Subsoil; dynamic and static penetrometer; application and evaluation of results
DIN 18196 Earthworks, soil classification for civil engineering purposes and method of
identification of soil groups
The use of DIN Standards for subsoil investigations is not mandatory. The equivalent British
Standards may be used instead.
5.2 Fieldworks
Boreholes
Exploratory boreholes shall be sunk at the locations approved by the Engineer. The boreholes
shall be approximately 10 cm in diameter.
The depth of boreholes shall not be less than 20 m. If the drilling encounters rock, the depth can
be reduced if the thickness will be proved to be greater than 3 m. Where weak soils are
encountered, boreholes shall be continued down to a loadbearing stratum with a minimum
thickness of 3 m proved.
The boreholes shall be drilled by local trained drillers under the direct supervision of the
Contractor, according to the established instructions and specifications. Casing shall be used
where necessary to prevent the collapse of the borehole wall.
An appropriate boring method with continuous recovery of soil samples shall be used. The
boreholes should preferably be dry-sunk, so that the sequence and depth of each soil layer can
be easily identified from the soil samples.
Disturbed and undisturbed samples shall be collected for visual examination and laboratory
testing.
The use of bentonite/clay slurry as drilling fluid shall be avoided.
The soil stratifications encountered in the boreholes shall be logged during drilling and the
borehole logs shall include at least the following information:
• the drilling method, coring, casing

• the coordinates
• the ground elevation in SAVD
• the soil stratification in USCS
• the number, depth and type of soil samples
• the corrected penetration resistance
• the groundwater level at end of boring
• the grain size distribution
• the index and engineering properties of representative samples collected from different

strata
• the SPT values
Standard penetration tests (SPT)
Down to the depth of drilling, SPT shall be performed in the boreholes at 1.5m intervals, in both
cohesive and non-cohesive soils.
A standard split spoon sampler (5.08 cm O.D) shall be driven into the bottom of a properly cleaned
hole by a 63.65 kg hammer falling from a height of 76.2 cm, to ensure the desired 450 mm sampler
penetration or a maximum of 50 blows. The penetration resistance (i.e. the number of blows for
the first 150 mm penetration shall be recorded for reference and the subsequent second and third
150 mm penetrations shall be recorded as apparent N-values.
After any necessary correction according to the groundwater table, the corrected N-values (N’)
shall be entered in the borehole log.
Sampling
During SPT at 1.5 m intervals, disturbed samples shall be collected with the standard spoon and
immediately submitted in polyethylene bags with proper identification.
Undisturbed samples shall be collected for cohesive soils at 1.5 m intervals. A thin-walled sample
tube of 63.5 m ID and 610 mm in length shall be pressed into the cohesive soils by means of
hydraulic pressure produced by the drilling rig. The undisturbed samples shall be trimmed and
scaled with non-shrinkage wax at both ends and clearly labelled. If necessary another probing
system may be used to get an undisturbed sample of high quality, which is unchanged in
composition, consistency, density, moisture content, porosity, stiffness and shear strength.
Disturbed and undisturbed soil samples shall be sent for laboratory tests.
Rock coring
When rock encounters, it shall be cored into using a core barrel with a diamond bit and a reamer,
which is to be fitted onto the lower end of the drilling rods. The core diameter shall be 89 mm. The
rock sample shall be examined, classified and kept in clearly labelled core boxes for further
examination, to determine, for example, the core recovery and rock quality designation (RQD)
and fracture index. The rock strength shall be classified by means of unconfined compression
tests. The coring results shall be entered in the borehole logs.
Groundwater level measurement
The water level in each borehole shall be recorded before commencement and after completion
of drilling when the water level has settled. The depth of the borehole and the casing (if any) shall
be also recorded.
Cone penetration tests (CPT)
CPT shall also be carried out as a second method of soil investigation (after borehole sinking) at
the locations approved by the Employer’s Representative. CPT shall be carried out using static
penetrometers (Dutch core apparatus or an Electric Piezocone Penetration Equipment) for

determination of the soil type, density and consistency.
CPT shall measure both, skin fiction and tip resistance. Doing so, a continuous profile of the ratio
of frictional and cone resistance shall be plotted, which is essential for design of any vibro
replacement as cohesive soils can be distinguished from non-cohesive soils.
The results of the CPT shall be presented in CPT logs as specified in Clause “Reporting” here
above.
Test (trial) pits (TP)
Test or trial pits shall be used as a third method of soil investigation in order to visually identify
the top strata and its sequence as well as to proof suitability of dredgers. The Contractor shall
obtain at least one disturbed and one undisturbed sample of each stratum encountered. The
samples shall be sent for laboratory tests as described in Clause “Sampling” here above. Trial
pits shall be excavated down to 1.5 m below ground level or until groundwater level.
The description of the encountered strata and of the strata sequence, accompanied by coloured
photographs, shall be submitted in the soil investigation report.
Plate-bearing test
The plate-bearing or plate-loading test shall be carried out to determine the bearing capacity and
the modulus of vertical subgrade reaction, by obtaining a “load versus deformation” curve from
which a modulus of deformation is computed.
Groundwater pumping test
At least four boreholes shall be completed to groundwater observation wells. The inner diameter
of the pipe shall be 120 mm or 5”. Pumping tests or in situ permeability tests shall be executed.
General soil characteristics
General soil/subsoil descriptions shall be made for all investigation sites, comprising:
• soil conditions at the surface
• expected soil conditions below the surface (slopes, etc.)
• inclination of the ground surface, inclination and orientation of cracks and fissures as well
as their stratification, evaluation of slope stability, in case there is a potential for sliding. This
information shall be provided to the Employer’s Representative through intermediate reports, to
enable him to give instructions for more intensive or additional investigations, if necessary.
Contractor shall be responsible of proposing the minimum number of boreholes /soundings /trial
pits Desalination Plant. Each proposal shall be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer.
Additional soil tests
Furthermore in situ tests shall be discussed, e.g. seismic downhole tests or Electrical Tomography
tests, which can detect lenses of different soil types in the underground.
5.3 Laboratory test

The selected disturbed and undisturbed samples from various boreholes and depths as well as
from trial pits shall be sent for laboratory tests, which are specified below. Test results shall be
classified after the United Soil
Classification system (USCS).
1. Natural moisture content
Tests to determine that natural moisture content (natural water content) and the in-situ wet and
dry densities shall be performed on undisturbed samples.
2. Bulk density tests
All undisturbed samples shall be examined for bulk density and moisture content. The dry
natural density and the void ratio shall be derived here from.
3. Atterberg limit tests
Tests to determine the liquid limit and the plastic limit shall be performed on representative
cohesive soil samples collected from different strata
Additionally, to the standard results the following results shall be presented:
Plasticity Index PI=wl-wp, with wl = moisture content at liquid limit and
wp = moisture content at plastic limit •
Consistency Index CI= (wn-wp)/PI with
wn = natural moisture content and
wp = moisture content at plastic limit
4. Grain size distribution tests
The grain size distribution of representative soil samples collected from different strata shall be
determined with standard sieves and a hydrometer. Hydrometer tests shall be done additionally
if the fine content exceeds 30%. Grain size distribution curves with USCS classification of
representative samples shall be submitted in the soil investigation report.
5. Specific gravity
The specific gravity for some specimen shall be determined to allow further derived soil properties
like void ratio or degree of saturation.
6. Unconfined compression tests

Unconfined compression tests shall be performed with a constant strain rate on representative
undisturbed specimens with a diameter of 3.56 cm. Stress strain diagrams of these shall be
attached to the soil investigation report.
7. Consolidation tests
With a 1:1 load increment ratio and a 24 hour duration for each increment, standard consolidation
tests shall be performed on 2.54 cm thick, representative undisturbed specimens with a diameter
of 5.08 cm.
8. Chemical analyses
The groundwater and the soil shall be analysed and classified with regard to their aggressive
action on concrete. The classification shall comply with DIN 4030 or recognised standards, e.g.
“Building Research Establishment Digest No. 363”. The results and recommendations shall be
part of the soil test report. The chemical analyses shall determine the sulphate and chloride
contents as a minimum as well as the pH value.
9. Groundwater pumping test
At least one borehole shall be completed to be a groundwater observation well for each plant.
The inner diameter of the pipe shall be 120 mm or 5”.
10. Electrical resistivity tests
Shall be made for a minimum of 4 samples.
5.4 Reporting
Intermediate reports
Short intermediate reports shall be submitted to the Engineer in order to:
• show the work progress
• provide quick information about soil characteristics
• describe the constraints encountered, if any
• propose improvements, if any.
Final report
Within eight weeks of completion of the soil investigation field work, the Contractor shall submit
the draft final report to the Engineer for comments and approval. The draft report shall be complete
and shall contain, but not be limited to, the information specified below.
• Description of the scope of the work carried out, showing:
• follow-up work program

• methods and systems (equipment) used
• works carried out (field investigations and laboratory tests)
• conclusions and recommendations.
Conclusions shall be formulated regarding the position of the bearing layers as well as the bearing
capacity and the depth of the groundwater table, especially the maximum groundwater level.
Admissible bearing pressures of different types and dimensions of raft foundations shall be
advised. Type and engineering values of proposed pile foundation shall be given.
Explanation of recommended soil improvement methods shall be made.
Geotechnically restrictions of earth works (cut and fill, slopes, etc.) have to be advised.
Recommendations for foundations shall be derived from the in-situ

investigations and from the laboratory tests.
Layout location plan of soil investigations, showing:
• the area
• the general layout plan
• locations of boreholes, soundings, trial pits and plate tests (if any) carried out
• comprehensive map surrounds.
• Logs, tables
The subsurface conditions, for example the sequence of the strata, the nature and properties of
the individual strata as well as the groundwater conditions shall be determined and described in
the borehole logs. The results of the laboratory tests and the diagrams of the test results shall be
included in the report.
Borehole logs, trial pit logs and surroundings logs shall include:
• actual ground level and SAVD-datum
• description and limits of various soil layers
• samples takes
• SPT results
• water levels
• depth of borehole/pit/sounding.
• Soil profiles (cross-sections)

The results of the subsoil investigations shall (in addition to the borehole logs) also be s own in
the form of cross-sectional drawings with a vertical scale of 1:100 showing, e.g.:
• actual ground level and SAVD-datum at the points of investigations

• results of boreholes including standard penetration test (SPT) graphs
• trial pit profiles
• CPT diagrams
• proposed foundation levels
• limit lines of soil layers (soil strata)
• groundwater level
• legend (key).
• Soil classification
The soils shall be classified according to British standard BS 3882, USCS or to the German DIN
18196 standard.
• Groundwater classification
After the chemical analysis, the groundwater shall be classified according to its aggressive action
on concrete. The classification shall comply with recognised standards, e.g. “Building Research
Establishment Digest No. 363” or DIN 4030.
The Engineer will provide comments after receiving the draft. Within two weeks of receipt of the
Engineer’s comments or approval of the draft, the Contractor shall submit the final report.

6 MARINE BATHYMETRY AND RECIRCULATION STUDY

A preliminary Marine Bathymetry Survey Report and a Wave and currents study will be provided
as an addenda to the Volume XI. The intent of this specification is to cover the basic requirements
for conducting the marine Bathymetry, Wave Propagation to generate requisite information for the
detailed design and field engineering activities, including construction.
The Contractor shall perform detailed marine bathymetry investigations, as far as the attached
Report is not covering and satisfying all necessary data for the construction according to the
Contractor’s design. Contractor shall perform a recirculation study reflecting the flows of his
proposed design.
The Contractor’s responsibilities in connection with performance of detailed survey work shall
include, but not be limited to the following:
a) An international recognised, specialised company in carrying out similar works, shall be

provided
b) The Contractor shall provide all qualified, skilled/unskilled personnel to carry out the entire
work. All survey and other equipment, tools and tackles and all other necessary materials
required to complete works to the entire satisfaction of the Employer, his Engineer and in
accordance with the requirements of agreement shall be provided by the Contractor.
c) The Contractor shall be responsible for locating existing bench marks and reconfirmation
of their levels
d) Carrying out detailed wave propagation site investigation works and the subsequent
recirculation study in accordance with the specification
e) Presentation of the data in the form of studies and documents, etc., as defined below, in
a properly consolidated fashion.
All works shall be carried out as per rules and regulations of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
All information in the above mentioned reports are indicative. No responsibility is accepted by the
Employer for their accuracy or validity and they will not relieve the Contractor from the need to
carry out the surveys described.
All technical information supplied shall be taken as indicative only and no responsibility is
accepted by the Employer for their accuracy and validity.
The Contractor is responsible for carrying out all investigations which are considered necessary
for the verification of the above reports and for the proper design, construction and performance
of the plant.
6.1 Marine Bathymetry Investigation

Scope of work
The intent of this specification is to cover the requirements for conducting the bathymetric survey
to generate required information for the design, engineering and construction of the seawater
intake and return pipelines. This study should provide sufficient information to determine the exact
location of the seawater intake and outfall.

The extent of the work shall be such as to permit the satisfactory determination of the sea bed
profile and to establish the optimum seawater intake and discharge proposals.
Before starting the survey work the Contractor shall submit the bathymetric survey program (i.e.
the extent of the work based on the general layout, methods and procedures, target dates, etc.)
to the Contractor for approval.
The contractor shall perform the bathymetric survey program under observance of all local laws
and marine regulations.
The survey is to be carried out in an area where there are fishing activities. The contractor shall
be responsible for liaison with the fishermen to ensure that the bathymetric surveys are carried
out such that there is no impact on fishing activities in the area.
The Contractor shall perform the bathymetric survey program under observance of all local laws
and marine regulations and ensure that at all times a valid permit to work is in operation for all
activities related to Work. If the validity of the permit expires before the completion of the work,
then no work shall proceed until such permit is revalidated.
All drawings prepared shall be submitted in both hard and soft copy; soft copies shall be .dwg
files compatible with Auto CAD 2010 and .PDF.
Depths less than 1m shall be surveyed by topographical methods as required down to 0.5m.
The contractor shall install a water level recorder during the bathymetric survey and describe the
state of the sea. The depth data collected during the survey shall be reduced to the local vertical
level using the water level variations registered with the installed recorder.
The contractor shall establish the correlation between the measured seawater levels and the
Vertical Reference Datum. Verification with the Tide Prediction Tables and the data from the
closest Port and indication of the results in the report will be required along with the provision of
the Tide Prediction Tables.
Depths will be measured at 20 m intervals from the shore and for each measurement a GPS
reading will be required. The timing of each reading will also be recorded to enable a tidal
correction to be made in the calculation of the actual depth.
The Contractor may be requested to carry out surveys along a number of alignments. If the sea
bed is found to fall rapidly from the shore, the actual length of survey to be carried out may be
substantially reduced.
The works shall be carried out as per the well-established sound practices and standards and by
qualified and competent specialists.
The bathymetry shall be carried out with reference to the permanent marks (TBM) and all levels
related to the Reference Benchmark. Georreference of boat route will be done by means DGPS
obtaining accuracy lower than 1-meter error.
The bathymetric survey shall be performed using a precision echo sounder and microwave
position fixing covering the whole area.
Bathymetric Survey Results

The Contractor shall prepare bathymetric maps with contour lines at 0.50 m intervals and an
appropriate scale (e.g. 1:500) for the further design of seawater intake and outfall systems. The
reference level for the seawater depths shall be clearly stated.
The survey report will include the alignment sheets showing position depths relative to an agreed
datum and corrected for tide levels. Position depths shall be given with GPS coordinates.
Environmental survey
Natural sea bed communities play an important role when checking out the consequences of
possible impacts upon the environment due to the execution of the intake and outfall pipes of a
desalination plant. Specifically, from an environmental point of view, these communities are
environmental indicators of the seawater quality. Therefore, monitoring the evolution of these
communities is a very useful tool to forecast potential effects upon the natural site.
Thus, a survey of seafloor conditions and communities is to be carried out by the contractor
focusing the effort towards the evaluation of the natural communities and the sedimentary material
withstanding them.
The Contractor shall deliver a qualitative inventory of existing species, including fauna and flora,
which live in the area of study. The inventory shall categorize them and detect protected species
that may imply environmental concern. Eventually, the Contractor shall report both a map with the
location of each flora family and a percentage cover estimates of the sea bed by the detected
species. The existence of areas with more or less ecological relevance may aid in the selection
of the final intake and outfall location. With this purpose, the contractor shall prepare a map
reflecting the situation of the main detected species and an overview of their density in the area
of study. This map will include also other relevant information as seabed formations and the
location of existing infrastructures.
Underwater observations of the epifauna on the seafloor are to be made available by the
contractor by using underwater photography and video as recording methods. Photographic
recording of fauna are to aid in species identification and provide a record of the observations.
The contractor shall provide locations of photographs and videos captured. Percentage cover
estimates are to be calculated for dominant fauna. The underwater video and photographic
surveys are to be used in providing a taxonomic list to genus level by the contractor using an
identified reference literature. The underwater video camera will be suspended approximately
300-600mm above the seafloor and at an angle of approximately 30º below the horizontal.
Characteristics of the seafloor are to be surveyed along linear transects conducted approximately
perpendicular to the shore line within defined locations. The course of each transect is to be
plotted using a Global Positioning System (GPS). Images are to be captured, with locations being
noted at initial points, when habitats or particular features are being observed or otherwise at one
minute intervals. Digital transect records are to be included by the contractor as DVD’s attached
to the final report. Underwater observations of the fauna and flora on the sea bed will be carried
out by using underwater photography and video as recording methods.
The Contractor shall provide for a side scan survey and visual survey of notable points to identify
any key seabed formations including coral in the survey area which may present a construction
hazard or raise environmental concern. The Contractor will also provide information about the
existing infrastructures (e.g., other outfall pipes) in the study area.
The report shall include the following elements:

 the inventory of the existing species (flora and fauna)
 a qualitative interpretation of their relevance from an environmental point of view

 a map of the situation of the main detected species and an overview of their density
(e.g, low, medium and high density is enough, it is not necessary to give accurate
numbers of density); including other relevant information as seabed formations and
existing infrastructures.
 Photographs and videos, as well as their location.
Seawater quality vertical profiles
The Contractor shall carry out measurements of certain parameters that can be recorded on site
and that are essential for the sizing of the plant. These measurements should include, at least,
the assessment of the following parameters:
 pH
 Temperature
 Electrical Conductivity
 Turbidity
 Dissolved oxygen
 Salinity
The first five parameters will be directly measured on site, whereas salinity is to be obtained by
means of an analytical expression from the conductivity and the temperature.
Gathering all these information allows characterizing the environmental quality of the sea water
throughout the entire water column, and hence to obtain accurate vertical quality profiles. The
main objectives of these profiles are, among others:
 to see the differences in terms of water quality between different possible intake points.
 to see the variation of water quality in relation to depth.
 to see the annual evolution of the most important seawater quality parameters.
The Contractor shall identify in agreement with the Engineer three points from which to monitor
the six mentioned parameters. In all these three points the measures will be done every 0.50 m
throughout the vertical column.
The procedure to carry out the measurements may be one of the two following:
 with anchored sensors equipment and a data logger: the data is to be recorded in 6 hour
intervals and downloaded by the Contractor with the frequency that he determines
(between 1 and 3 months). All this equipment is to be left in the measure points during
the whole study period.
 with a multi parameter probe thrown from a boat: in this case, the measurements will be
done at least on a monthly frequency.
In both cases, this procedure shall cover at least a period of 11 months, to ensure that the
Contractor collects the information until the month of the year in which seawater is coldest and
hottest.
The contractor shall deliver a report with data recorded up to that moment coinciding with the
submission of the final report of the whole off-shore study. This report will consist of the graphical
presentation of seawater quality profiles (temperature, conductivity, turbidity and dissolved

oxygen) for each of the three positions, as well as the temporary evolution of these parameters
and their vertical profiles.
Seawater sampling and testing
These works will consist of sampling in the exact point where the intake tower windows are to be
located and its subsequent testing in laboratory. The contractor shall be responsible of contacting
the most suited laboratory for conducting lab analysis. The analysis in the laboratory will include
all the information (physical, chemical and biological parameters) that is useful for the plant’s
dimensioning by the bidders. The objective of this testing is to complement the information
provided by the vertical profile measurements.
The following list of parameters will be analysed with the frequency decided by the Contractor
throughout the whole year:
Physical Properties
Dissolved Manganese
pH
(Mn2+)
Conductivity Total Aluminum (Al)
Density Dissolved Aluminum (Al3+)
Turbidity Boron
Colour Copper
Suspended solids (SS) Lead
Total Salinity (TDS) Zinc
CATIONS Total Cyanide
Calcium (Ca2+) Cadmium
Magnesium (Mg2+) Nickel
Sodium (Na+) Mercury
Potassium (K+) Arsenic
Strontium (Sr2+) Cobalt
Barium (Ba2+) Molybdenum
Ammonium (NH4+) Tin
ANIONS Selenium
Bicarbonates (HCO3-) Biological Parameters
Carbonates (CO32-) Total Coliforms
CO2 Fecal Coliforms
Sulfates (SO42-) Fecal Streptococci
Enumeration of micro and
Chlorides (Cl-)
phytoplankton
Nitrates (NO32-)
Nitrites (NO2-) Other Parameters
Fluor (F-) Dissolved Oxygen
Dissolved Silica (SiO2) Organic Matter
Silicates TOC
Phosphates (PO43-) Azote Total NTK
Heavy Metals Oils and grease
Total Iron (Fe) Total Hydrocarbons
Dissolved Iron (Fe2+) Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
Total Manganese (Mn) BOD5
COD

Seabed sampling and testing
An off-shore seabed sampling survey shall be carried out with the aim of having a complete
characterization of the seabed in the study area.
This study aims to provide information about the seabed sediments (depth of 1 m). The Contractor
shall carry out a seabed sampling survey based on seabed grab technologies such as the Van
Veen, Hamon or Day grab.
The contractor shall use samplers designed to collect an accurate representative sample of the
sediment bottom. The bite of the sampler should be deep enough so that all depths are sampled
equally.
10 sediment samples from each of 3 perpendicular profiles to the shoreline (30 samples
altogether) shall be collected from the coast. To collect enough sediment for particle size analysis
one grab may have to be taken in each location. The volume of the samples shall be between
250 and 500 grams.
Once sampled, a sieve analysis shall be performed by the contractor. The classification of the
samples will be meticulous, so each one will be identified with the number of profile, the depth,
coordinates UTM with reference to the used datum, and the date and hour of the sampling.
The following parameters must be determined in laboratory by contractor:
 Texture and organoleptic properties.

 Sieve analysis in millimetres and phi scale using the sieves indicated in the following
table. The retention in sieve (according to ASTM) shall be expressed by percentage in
weight.
 Percentages of gravels, sands and fine fraction.
 Mode classification.
 D50 percentile.
The survey results must be documented, compiled in a report. In addition, the documentation for
the works of seabed sampling survey report will include at least:
 A description of the methodology and technology that has been used for both, sampling
and testing surveys.
 The results of the soil sieve analysis.
 A geological mapping (plan view) with the situation of each seabed sample within the
whole survey area.
Maps prepared by the Contractor based on survey work carried out under this Agreement shall
be the sole property of Employer. Contractor shall have no right to use, reproduce or pass on the
third parties any date, drawings or information without prior written permission of Employer.
All drawings shall be prepared on CAD system and shall be supplied on CD- ROMs for use on
Employer’s Work Stations. Likewise, all documents (other than drawings) shall also be supplied
on CD-ROMs in addition to hard copy in such format as will enable such documents to be edited

on Employer word processing system.
Four copies of check prints of the plotted maps shall be supplied by Contractor to
Employer/Engineer for their approval.
6.2 Recirculation Study

The study shall investigate the impact of the Desalination Plant on the existing and on the
proposed seawater systems and their efficiency and estimate if a direct or indirect recirculation
could occur for the whole area. If any significant negative effects will be determined,
recommendations for minimising these effects with respect to the design and location of the outfall
structure and the shape and location of the entry into the offshore intake shall be given.
However, the cost of the intake and outfall structures shall be fixed in the Tender. Should the
results of the recirculation study carried out by the Contractor show that a length reduction of the
discharge pipes will be appropriate, the savings have to be estimated according to the unit rates
given in the price schedules.
The recirculation study to be carried out by the Contractor shall comply with, but not be limited to
the requirements described below. For the model parameters and the allowed rate of recirculation,
refer to the Recirculation Study attached to the Tender Documents.
Numerical model
For the calculation and simulation, a fully dynamical three-dimensional hydrodynamic and
advection-dispersion numerical model shall be used, which is based on a flexible mesh or nested
grid approach. The modelling system has to be developed for application within oceanographic,
coastal and estuarine environments. The model shall take into account both the near-field and
the far-field behavior of the brine plume.
The model will provide an accurate description of the hydrodynamics, the entrainment generated
by the jet turbulence, and the relationships between temperature, salinity, density and driven flow
for different stages of discharge, i.e. buoyant, neutral, etc.
The main characteristics of the model shall be as described below but will be not limited to:
• Entrainment of ambient water into the jet

• The bending of the plume depending on discharge momentum and cross
flow
• Description of the mixing as governed by constant horizontal and vertical mixing
coefficients as well as the expected area of the mixing zone.
The following model parameters for the numerical model shall be defined by the Contractor and
submitted prior to contract award:
• Model area
• Size (horizontal/vertical) of flexible mesh
• Max. depth
• Time step
• Duration of each simulation

• Methodology to be applied and model description.
The duration of each full tidal (dynamical simulation) shall be at least 15 days.
Special attention shall be paid to the characteristic features at the site:
• The influential parameters are mainly the wind and the tide,
• The hydrodynamic conditions at the site are mainly influenced by winds as
tidal reversal,
• Winds have a clear daily pattern which is of major importance to driven currents,
• Monthly mean sea level variations induce a residual current.
These local hydrodynamic behaviours indicate that the mathematical model has to take into
account at large scale both the wind and the tide behaviour.
The model shall consider all consumers in the area, as far as these could influence the planned
seawater system or vice-versa.
The anticipated simulation cases shall be submitted with the offer.
Reporting
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the preliminary report on recirculation study including
summaries of assumptions, simulation procedures, results and recommendations.
On receipt of the Employer / Engineer’s comments and conditional approval to the preliminary
report on recirculation study, the Contractor shall undertake the necessary amendments and
prepare and submit, within the specified periods the Final Report.

7 SITE INSTALLATION/DEMOBILIZATION

All works shall be in accordance of clause 5.3 of this specification.

All works shall be in accordance of clause 5.3 of this specification.

All works shall be in accordance of clause 5.1.3 of this specification.

All works shall be in accordance of clause 5.1.4 of this specification.

All materials and related works shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.5 of this specification.
The specification is drawn up on the assumption that the scope of the initial equipment and
consumption materials is to be provided complete in every respect; everything required for the
use and care of the installations shall be supplied, even if this is not expressly specified in the
documentation.

All execution work shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.6 of this specification in accordance
with latest Health, Safety and Environmental rules (HSE)
Basic Cleaning
Basic cleaning includes all floors, walls, ceilings, built-in fittings and equipment, including the
furnishings. The basic cleaning operation shall result in a degree of cleanness which permits the
fully equipped buildings and rooms and associated outdoor installations and secured surfaces to
be taken over without complaint.
Advertising boards and stickers, temporary protective coatings and claddings, remains and
splashes of paint shall be removed with water or suitable solvents.

Dust and other dirt shall be completely removed from all wall and floor surfaces, as well as from
all furniture.
Windows and mirrors shall be cleaned so that they are completely clear and without streaks.
Operator gauges, shower heads, odour traps and floor drains of the sanitary installations shall be
cleaned and the fittings and bright pipework shall be spotlessly polished.
Petrol and oil separators shall be emptied, cleaned and refilled if necessary during basic cleaning.
Lamps, including dishes, lighting units and tubes, switches and sockets as well as bases and
skirting boards, doors with frames and glazing, windows, window seats and other furniture and
fittings shall be included in the basic cleaning operation.
7.7 QA/QC
All quality assurance and quality control activities shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.7 of this
specification.
7.8 Acceptance
All acceptance tests and related activities shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.8 of this
specification.

8 SITE SUPERVISION/SURVEY/INVESTIGATIONS

This specification covers the scope of all kind of surveying work in accordance with “General” of

The design and engineering shall be state of the art in accordance with all latest relevant codes
and standards, functional and complete as mentioned above.

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified in clause
5.1.3.
Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution Design and execution shall be in
accordance with all relevant standards as specified in clause 5.1.4


The execution of all works to be done shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.6 of this specification.
Settlement Measurements
Levelling bolts shall be installed by the Contractor immediately after construction of foundation
slabs and shall be protected by a suitable cover from damage. For the levelling bolts the
requirements of DIN 18708 are to be met.
On all installations having foundations smaller than 5m² at least one levelling bolt shall be installed
at 1.00 m above finished ground surface. Buildings and bigger installations shall have a minimum
of 4 levelling bolts. Additional levelling bolts shall be provided on buildings departed by structural
joints or depending upon the importance of the installations.
The position and thus the total number of surveying points shall be decided by the Engineer in
co-operation with the Contractor, on the basis of the settlement report.
The Contractor shall mark the position of all settlement bolts on his shuttering drawings and shall
ensure that these surveying points are not built in as construction proceeds.
In order to keep the number of points which are to be levelled to a minimum, settlement bolts shall
be installed on a specific grid. For all measurements the requirements of DIN 4107 are to be met.
Measurements of all levelling bolts are to be executed:
• Immediately after setting of the bolt

• Immediately after finishing of construction of the building
• Prior to the erection of mechanical equipment
• Several times during the erection period of the mechanical equipment
• After completion of the buildings/structures and erection of all equipment
• Once before the plant is handed over to the Employer.
8.6 QA/QC
All quality assurance and quality control activities shall be in accordance with
5.1.7 of this specification.
8.7 Acceptance
All acceptance tests and related activities shall be in accordance with clause

9 DEWATERING DURING CONSTRUCTION

This section applies to the methods and techniques of ground water control. Prior to the decision
for the method and technique to be applied a comprehensive knowledge of the soil and ground
water conditions have to be obtained from the results of the soil investigation and/or information
given in writing by the Engineer.
All costs for ground water control for keeping the construction pits dry shall be included in the
relevant excavation items of the lump sum except otherwise indicated.
The method and technique shall be based on the BS EN 1997-1 or any approved equivalent.
The scope of supply includes the installation of all equipment, plants, pipes, machinery, etc. and
its removal after completion including operation, documentation and maintenance of the
equipment during the construction period. For excavations below the ground water level, it is
necessary to lower and maintain the groundwater level at least 0.60meters below the bottom of
foundation.
Drainage of cuts, fills, stockpiles, spoil areas, embankments, and borrow areas shall be
maintained at all times to prevent ponding of surface water following rainfall. This shall be done
by providing temporary ditches, swales, culverts, and pumping systems as required in each
respective site area. Temporary drainage facilities shall be removed at the completion of the
project or as directed by the Engineer.
For all high water table conditions a deep well dewatering system is mandatory.
Where necessary, cofferdams, sheet piles, pump sumps, equipment and channels, troughs, inlet
gutters, pipes and any other works required for the water control and discharge shall be part of
the scope of supply. The dewatering system shall be designed and installed in such a way that
alteration and extensions can be made at any time throughout the operating time, if necessary.
Reserve units shall be kept ready for service when failure of any of the installed units occurs.
Pump sumps shall be provided with self- activated sump pumps to be discharged through the
drainage water system.
The Contractor has to consider the possibility of a temporary failure of any pump, diesel engine
and/or the electric power service and shall install emergency power units with sufficient capacity
to feed the necessary power to the installed unit at the moment of failure. The Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer, the detailed method of the envisaged pumping system for dewatering, the
pump capacity and the standby reserve units.
The Contractor shall adjust the system if required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure
that any dewatering works will not cause any interference to his work. Any damage occurring
during the above mentioned period shall then be made good by the Contractor at his own
expense.

This specification covers the scope of dewatering during construction in accordance with clause
5.1 “General” of this specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional
and complete in all parts in accordance with of this specification.

standards, functional and complete as mentioned above.

5.1.3.

The execution all work to be done shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.4 of this specification.

All equipment, instruments, machinery, tools, pipelines, etc. required for execution of the water
control shall be in good repair and shall be kept in good working condition throughout the
operation period.

All execution works shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.6 of this specification.
Pump sumps and channels
Provision of pump sumps and channels of the dimensions required for each particular case shall
include all necessary excavation of any kind of soil above and under water, backfill and
consolidation, sheeting, bracing, stiffening, sealing, scaffolding accesses, as well as the disposal
of water and all auxiliary works.
Routing of channels or pipes for discharge water shall be such as not to impede or obstruct any
of the other works and/or operations. The same shall be applicable for pump sumps. Prior to the
determination of any arrangement of pump sumps the Engineer's approval shall be obtained.
Sumps shall be provided for concrete trenches with self-activated sump pump which shall be
discharged through drainage water system. Routing and location of water discharge lines shall
be submitted to the relevant authorities and to the Engineers approval.
Difficulties during dewatering
The Contractor shall consider all difficulties and additional work due to the presence of

unexpected ground water during subsequent construction work.
Where it is possible to keep off or divert such water without special dewatering arrangements or
where work can be carried out normally under or in water, such a method may only be applied
after approval from Engineer has been obtained.
Ready for service condition
The Contractor shall maintain ready-for-service and regularly clean all dewatering equipment and
accessories and shall keep all access clear so that they can safely be used without risk of
accident. Any recommendations made by the Engineer in this matter shall be carried out
immediately.
Leakage
Block-outs and pipe connections through structures and their closure, proper grouting of joints,
etc. or repairs in the event of leakage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Piezometers
The ground-water lowering effect is to be checked by piezometers in unfavourable positions (e.g.

in the middle of the building pit) before starting the excavation. The piezometers are to be installed
at unfavourable positions or in more permeable layers (in stratified sub-soil) below the bottom of
the excavation. They serve to check whether or not the water pressure (head) has been
sufficiently reduced in those layers below the bottom of the excavation which are more permeable.
Security against hydrostatic uplift is to be demonstrated by calculation.
QA/QC
The Contractor shall keep records of all data of importance occurring during operation of the water
control system. The records shall be submitted to the Engineer for information and checking every
working day. For that purpose, the lowering of the water table shall be controlled by piezometers.
The numbers and position of them shall be submitted to the Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain these piezometers at his own expenses during the
dewatering works or as long as the Engineer requires it. Pump operations shall not be stopped
nor pipes, channels and equipment for dewatering and water control removed or altered in any
way, except with the express permission of the Engineer. The Engineer will stipulate the time of
removal. Until then, the pumps and water drainage facilities shall be kept in proper working order
without extra payment being granted.
Acceptance

10 EARTH WORK

This specification covers the scope of earth works in accordance with clause
and complete in all parts in accordance with this specification.
This part applies to all earth and rockwork required for the construction of buildings, any types of
structure and burying service lines in the ground.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the ground conditions on the site including the nature of
the strata to be excavated, obstructions, possibilities of flooding and such like and shall allow for
all provisions necessary to carry out the work in the most suitable manner when submitting his
tender.
In case of rock, it has to be examined for suitability of the foundation if level permits. It has also
to be examined for sheet rock or outcrop or bolder. Further excavation of rock shall be based on
engineering decision to establish the required foundation over the rocky strata.
Generally, all buildings and structures shall be founded on bearing strata which means that all
excavation work for foundations shall meet the requirements of structural analysis based on the
results obtained from the soil investigation and of the available information and instruction given
in writing by the Engineer.
Furthermore, this division applies to excavation works in connection with pavement, roadwork
and landscaping as far as earth- and rockwork is concerned and deals with the handling and
disposal of the materials to be reused or taken to soil dumps on or off site.
Excavation shall be done to the required dimensions and shall be finished according to the
specified lines and slopes, in a way acceptable to the Engineer. All necessary precautions shall
be taken to cause the minimum possible alteration or disturbance to the material lying under and
adjacent to the excavation final lines.

standards, functional and complete as mentioned above. For the design of the foundation the
same requirements are valid as for shallow foundations.

Codes and Standards to be considered shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as
specified in clause 5.1.

10.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution.

5.1.3

The fill materials used are to be examined and approved. Excavated materials can be used if they
are treated physically to fulfil the requirements.
• Select fill
Select fill shall have the following properties:
Hard rock material, broken or classified and well graded (Coefficient of uniformity Cu not less than
6), non-cohesive and content of fines limited to 7% free of soluble salts (content less than 3%),
soils free of organic matter (limit 2%). Decomposing or compressible materials shall not be used.
All material shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified
densities in a reasonable length of time. It shall be free of highly plastic clays, of all materials
subject to decay, decomposition or dissolution, and of cinders or other materials which will corrode
piping or other metal. The intention is to use select fill below structures, roads, parking areas etc.
• Ordinary fill
Ordinary fill shall have the following properties:
Natural inorganic soils: salt content not greater than 5%, organic matter less than 3%. For other
properties, see under 'Select Fill'. The intention is to use ordinary fill for non-built areas.
• Special fill
Special fill material shall be gravel or crushed rock (for other properties see under 'Select fill').
The intention is to use special fill e.g. as sub-base material for tanks and roads.
• Rip-rap/Rockfill
Rip-rap shall be of a size suitable for the place where it is to be used, as determined by the speed
of the current, wave height and depth of water. Rip- rap shall be of deformable and yielding
construction, using round stones if the intention is to safeguard the underlying ground against
scour. If the rock infill shall be used as a foundation for structural components, the aim shall be to
secure effective bedding of angular stones under water. The stones shall be weather- and water-
proof and shall not suffer any ill effects through the action of seawater. Filter rules are to be
observed.


The works shall be excavated either by hand or by use of excavating plant and tools acceptable
to the Engineer.
Excavation by hand may be required close to existing installations and/or underground services,
but subject to special instruction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall use special instruments/equipment to detect underground live cables of both
high and low voltage cables and telephone cables etc. to prevent accidental damage.
The Contractor shall carry out all kind of earth- and rockwork for the following particular works as
defined hereafter (where applicable)
• clearing and grubbing

• excavation of top soil
• open cut excavation
• backfilling
• safety precaution during earthwork
• mining or underground excavation (if required)
• grading
• replacement of material
• trench excavation for service lines
• embankments
• archaeological findings
Safety precaution
The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary safety measures. Proper strutting, sheeting
and bracing, including re-arrangement of the installations when necessary, stabilisation and
protection of slopes, methods of excavation to reduce risks of slides, etc. shall be to the
Contractor's debit. The additional moving of soil resulting from such damages will not be paid for.
Over excavation
If somewhere, and for any reason, excavation are executed beyond the established lines and
without the Engineer's previous approval, the Contractor shall at his own expenses backfill with
approved material (including its shall be compacted and tested with 96%MDD) or with lean
concrete to Engineers approval, the volume corresponding to over-excavation. He shall not
receive payment for over-excavation not ordered.
Stockpiles and disposal
Excavated material from the Works selected by the Engineer for re-use shall be placed
immediately in its final position, if possible, or otherwise may be stockpiled or deposited on Site
or carted away as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not have the right either to additional payment or to claim because of work
involved in stockpiling materials, re-use or for carting to the waste disposal areas. Soil unfit for re-

use shall be removed to sites approved by the Employer and shall not be permanently deposited
elsewhere. The Contractor shall trim and form the edges of spoil to profiles and levels as directed
by the Engineer.
The placing of materials within the waste disposal areas shall be made in layers not exceeding
0.50 m in thickness in order to obtain an appreciable degree of compaction by means of
transportation equipment and/or if required by appropriate compaction equipment.
All traffic to or from the waste disposal areas shall run over the surface of such areas in order to
achieve compaction.
Preparation of foundations
All rock surfaces on which or against which concrete is to be poured shall be carefully cleaned
and roughened to the Engineer's satisfaction.
The rock surface shall be free of oil, stagnant or running water, mud, loose rock, residue and
impurities or any other improper material. Rock faults, depressions, and fractures shall be cleaned
to a depth equal to their widths and to sound rock at both sides. Immediately before concrete
placing, all rock surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by means of air and water jets, wire brushes,
sand jets or by any other devices necessary to clean the foundation and keep it free of water, but
shall be moistened prior to placing concrete.
All earth surfaces, against which concrete is to be poured, shall be clean and free of any
detrimental impurities, organic matter or unsuitable material. Immediately after excavation, all
such surfaces shall be moistened and treated as directed by the Engineer and then protected by
means of a lean concrete layer, 5 cm in thickness. No concrete is to be poured until formation is
inspected and approved by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be free from water; the subgrade
preparation shall include 75mm lean concrete placed on 200 micron polyethylene sheet.
Backfilling
Foundations and structures shall be backfilled as shown on the drawings with approved material
compacted in layers by suitable equipment until optimum stability has been obtained to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Compacting shall be carried out with special care by means of
pneumatic or mechanical rollers or other compactors of a type previously approved by the
Engineer. Minimum weight of a plate compactor if used for compaction shall be 750 kg.
Density requirements shall be as follows by tests per modified AASHTO T-180 Method D, at
optimum moisture content
• Under buildings and structure foundations and slabs 97%

• Under roadways and parking areas 98%
• Under transformers and other major foundations 97%
• Embankment- 95%
The thickness of fill layers, number of passes and type of equipment to be used shall be proposed
to the Engineer before compaction tests have been made.
Surfaces receiving fill layers shall, if smooth, be previously scarified to obtain a good key between
the new fill layer and the subgrade.

Backfilling of foundation work with approved materials shall be carried out only after foundations
have been inspected by the Engineer.
Soil Replacement
The material to be used for replacement of soil shall not contain soluble or swelling components
such as clays, or organic matters. Sand gravel mixtures of favourable grain size distribution shall
be used in exchange.
Prior to the commencement of work, three samples shall be taken from the anticipated borrow
area and tested in respect of AASHO or Proctor density, optimum moisture content, grain size
distribution and content of soluble matters.
These three samples shall cover the approximate variation of materials to be expected within the
borrow area.
The fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers of no more than 25 cm in uncompacted
thickness. The fill moisture content shall be controlled and adjusted in order to achieve a
maximum of compaction. Fresh water shall be used for watering of soils.
The fill material shall be compacted by vibratory roller (min. weight 10T). The minimum required
degree of compaction shall be as defined. One Modified AASHO or Proctor and three density
tests shall be made at every fill layer prior to continuation of filling work. The testing location will
be indicated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall either provide all required laboratory facilities
and staff to perform the tests or he shall co-operate with an experienced soil testing laboratory,
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The results of the tests shall be made available to the Engineer within 24 hours of the tests. Filling
work may be continued in case all tests performed show satisfactory results.
Groynes existing pipework etc.
If any existing works: groynes, buried pipes, pipe and cable ducts, wattle work, fascines and the
like interfere with the excavation profiles, irrespective of whether or not such structures are
described in this Tender, these works shall be replaced with the approval of the Employer /
Engineer.
Any stored materials, such as pipes, fittings, accessories of assorted sizes or any other material
obstructing the progress of work shall be re-shifted by careful handling, loading, transporting,
stacking and protecting. The Contractor will be held responsible and liable for damage caused by
him. Any such works shall be included in the lump sum.
Pipe bed preparation
Pipe beds shall be constructed to guarantee the uniform transmission of loads. Bedding for pipes
shall be constructed by spreading and compacting granular bedding material over the full width
of the pipe trench. After the pipes have been laid additional material shall, if required be placed
and compacted equally on each side of the pipes and, where practicable, this shall be done in
sequence with the removal of the trench supports.

Where trenches have been excavated and groundwater is likely to flow in any granular bed and
surround to the pipe, suitable impermeable clay stanks at a maximum spacing of 50m along the
length of the trench shall be provided.
SC1 material to be used for pipe bedding and surround up to first top 250 mm above the pipe.
SC1 material shall be placed in layers not exceeding more than 250 mm thick and each layer
shall be compacted with caution without inflicting any damage to the pipe.
Where rock in either ledge or boulder formation is encountered, it shall be removed below grade
and replaced with suitable materials in such a manner as to provide a compacted earth cushion
having a thickness under the pipe of not less than one quarter of outside pipe diameter with a
minimum allowable thickness of 20 cm if not otherwise specified.
Where a firm foundation is not possible at the grade established due to soft, spongy or other
unstable soil, all such unstable soil under the pipe and for a width of at least one diameter on
each side of the pipe shall be removed and replaced with suitable selected materials as approved
by the Engineer, properly compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe.
The pipe bedding should comply with the requirement as specified in BSEB 1295 “ Structural
design of buried pipelines under various conditions of loading
– Part 1: General requirements” and BS 9295:2010 “Guide to the structural design of buried
pipelines”.
Blasting
The Contractor shall not obtain or make use of any explosives without the express permission in
writing by the Ministry of Defense of the Kingdom of Saudi-Arabia.
The Contractor shall comply strictly with the regulation as required by the authorities regarding
purchase, storage, issuance and use of explosives and transport of same to and from site, and
shall be deemed to have included in his Tender all costs arising from the use, storage and
transport of explosives as well as from supervision of blasting by security forces.
Blasting shall furthermore be strictly and in every case subject to the Engineer's permission.
All blasting shall be carried out by approved experts only and the Contractor shall be fully liable
for any claims arising from damage or alleged damage, injury to the public etc. due to blasting.
The Contractor shall be insured with an approved insurance Employer against all claims with
respect to damage and injury arising from blasting.
Fuses, detonators or blasting caps shall not be transported or stored together with dynamite or
other explosives. The location and design of the storage places, the transportation methods and
the precautions that shall be taken to prevent accidents shall be subject to the Engineer’s
approval, but it is understood that this approval does not exempt the Contractor of his
responsibility with regard to the handling of dynamite or other explosives.
Drilling and blasting plans shall be submitted well in advance for the Engineer's approval prior to
commencement of any blasting work. When blasting is carried out, trees, structures etc. in
exposed position shall be adequately protected from damage.

Drilling and blasting shall be arranged and, where necessary, the rock being blasted shall be
protected so as to prevent any scattering of the rock liable to cause injury to the public or damage
to dwellings, buildings and other property and the works.
Blasting shall be carried out carefully to avoid the loosening of rock surfaces that are to remain
intact, particularly in those cases where concrete is to be placed directly against these rock
surfaces.
Protection of existing utilities and services
During construction the Contractor shall provide all protection for existing utilities and services as
may be required by his construction operations. Permanent protection of certain items shall be as
included under other clauses or as instructed by the Engineer.
In addition to the requirements as specified, herein the Contractor shall comply with the following
requirements.
• Use all necessary precautionary and protective measures required to maintain existing
utilities, services and appurtenances that shall be kept in operation. In particular, the
Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent undermining of utilities and services
presently in services.
• Protect existing or new utilities and services where required by the Contractor’s
operations and/or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
bracing and supporting utilities and services to prevent settlement, displacement or
damage.
Deep vibratory techniques
Description
Loose or soft soils in the natural or existing stage unsuitable for foundation purposes can be
improved by deep vibratory techniques. The thickness of such layers may even exceed 35 m and
may be situated below the groundwater table. The improvement is done by cylindrical vibrators
with a steel body of approx. 30 - 50 cm diameter and approx. 4 - 5 m length, equipped with
eccentric discs which rotate on an axial shaft when driven by an electric or hydraulic motor. The
energy input of the vibrators ranges from 35 kW to almost 400 kW. The vibrator is adapted to the
depth to be improved by extension pipes mounted at the top of the vibrator.
This equipment is moved vertically into the ground by a commercial crane with a long boom.
Outlets at the bottom of the vibrator allow exit of water during penetration, which is let down inside
the tube.
Under its own weight - approx. 3 to 8 tons depending on the total length – and with the assistance
of water and vibration, the vibrator sinks into the ground. The length of the extension tubes
together with the vibrator and the lifting heights of the crane correspond with the total depth of
penetration that means that the length of the vibrator and the extension tubes and, therefore, the
lifting height of the crane shall be at least equal to the penetration depth. After reaching the
predetermined depth, the vibrator is then gradually withdrawn from the ground, causing
compaction. The effectiveness of compaction is dependent on two main factors: firstly, the
characteristic of the vibrator, in terms of energy input, amplitude, frequency and shape and
secondly, the characteristics of the soil to be compacted.

Hence two procedures can be differentiated:
Vibro compaction is employed for densification of granular non cohesive soils (up to about 10%
of fines) where sand aside the hole flows into the hole often improved by water adding and
replaces the soil volume "lost" during the compaction procedure, due to the decreasing of the void
ratio of the granular soils.
Vibro replacement (or stone column method) is used to improve mixed and also cohesive soils
with help of the deep vibratory method. The equipment used for this process is the same as that
for vibro compaction. In this case, the vibrator also sinks into the ground under its own weight
until it reaches the predetermined depth, assisted by vibration and water or air as a flushing
medium. Generally, water is used as a flushing medium in fully saturated soils and compressed
air is used in partially saturated soils. When the vibrator is withdrawn, it leaves a cylindrical hole
of slightly greater diameter than itself. This borehole is filled partially with coarse fill, usually well
graded between 1 and 10 cm. The vibrator then re-penetrates and displaces the backfill
horizontally into the native soil, at the same time compacting underneath its tip. Repetition of this
procedure forms a cylindrical stone column between the bottom of penetration and working grade.
The quality of the added material shall comply with special Contractor’s requirements and with
'requirements for concrete aggregates'.
These two methods are combined when e.g. non cohesive materials are encountered in general,
or local silty layers cannot be excluded.
Minimum requirements
All layers between foundation level and bearing soil are to be compacted to a relative density of
at least 80% and prepared for an admissible soil pressure of at least 250 kN/m2. The modulus of
deformation shall be not less than Es= 50°MN/m2 down to 3 m below the foundation level, Es =
70 MN/m2 down to 5 m below the foundation level and Es = 100 MN/m2 beyond 5 m below the
foundation level.
For areas where these requirements and those mentioned below cannot be achieved by vibro
compaction, the vibro replacement method is to be employed, where the structural loads are
transferred by stone columns to the bearing soil. The admissible capacity of every column is at
least 300 kN, where the settlement is limited to 1.5 cm (above criteria also met).
The minimum diameter of the stone columns shall be 0.8 m (to be checked by backfill
measurement).
The final foundation level is to be covered with at least 50 cm crushed stone or gravel fill and
compacted to 80% relative density with a 10 t vibrating roller (at least two layers performing 6
passes); in case vibro replacement was employed because of cohesive layers close to surface,
no vibration shall be applied for compaction.
The soils below foundation level are to be improved by vibro compaction/replacement such that
the requirements of the structure above are covered, i.e. that permissible settlements and
differential settlements are not exceeded and a sufficient bearing capacity/permissible soil
pressure is obtained.
Dust control

The Contractor shall use all means necessary to control dust on roads, construction areas and
borrow pits.
Surfaces shall be regularly watered to prevent dust becoming a nuisance for the public and
interfering with the proper execution of the works.
10.7 QA/QC, Test and properties

General
The Control of working and tests operations shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence
of the Employer or Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare sheets for statistical analysis of the field and laboratory tests, and
shall submit the sheets to the Engineer for approval. Controlling will consist of field and laboratory
tests, such as compaction and density tests, grain-size distribution, and shear tests.
If not otherwise specified under relevant items the following min. tests have to be carried out.
• One (1) test analysing the ingredients of the water used for performance of the work.
• Three (3) tests for specific gravity of soil as per ASTM D 854 latest issue.
• One (1) test for bearing capacity of soil for static load.
• Three (3) tests for grain size analysis of soils, if "Replacement of Material" is required as
per ASTM D 422-63.
• Three (3) tests for density of soil in place of sandcone method for each layer of "Backfilling
and/or replacement of material and/or roadwork" are required as per ASTM D 1556 latest
issue.
Testing of select fill
Select fill, as specified herein shall be provided as follows:
• As fill or backfill within the limits of the structure/building and below basement floors as
shown on the drawings to bring the subgrade up to the required elevation or for filling or
backfilling against foundations walls and around footings
• As fill beneath foundation slabs or basement floors either to bring local low areas to grade
or to replace disturbed or unsuitable soil.
Place select fill in approx. 20 cm layers (compacted thickness) and compact to 97% of maximum
dry density (BS 1377: - Test 13). If Test 13 of BS 1377 gives no clear results then a relative
density of 80% according to ASTM D 4253 'Relative density of cohesion less soils' is to be applied.
Quality control shall establish all of the following values:
• Unit dry weight

• Heavy dynamic sounding, to DIN 4094: 20 blows per 10 cm penetration or
alternatively for dutch cone test, DIN 4094, 20 MN/m² point resistance

• Plate load test:

• EV2 not less than 120 MN/m2
• EV2/EV1 smaller than 2.2
where:
• EV1 being the modules of deformation of the first loading process and
• EV2 being the modules of deformation of the second loading process
(reloading after relieving once).
Testing of ordinary fill
Ordinary fill, as specified herein above, is required for all fill and backfill where special fill or select
fill have not been specified on the drawings. Place ordinary fill and compact to 93 percent of
maximum dry density (60% relative density).
Quality control shall establish all of the following values:
• Unit dry weight

• Heavy dynamic sounding, to DIN 4094: 16 blows per 10 cm penetration or
alternatively for dutch cone test, DIN 4094, 16 MN/m² point resistance.
These values are valid only for non-cohesive soils with silt content lower than 15%.
• Plate load test:
• Ev2 not less than 60 MN/m2 for noncohesive soils (silt content lower than 15%)
• EV2 not less than 45 MN/m2 for cohesive soils.
• EV2/EV1 smaller than 2.2 for non-cohesive soils
• EV2/EV1 smaller than 2.5 for cohesive soils
Tests shall be performed for each 500m3 of fill but not less than once per shift.
Quality assurance for vibro techniques
Before starting the compaction works, the Contractor has to prove by tests whether he is able to
improve the underground to the above requirements. The test program and vibro pattern is to be
proposed by the Contractor and to be approved by the Engineer, and shall contain a trial
compaction, Dutch cone tests (before and after the treatment) and big scale load tests comprising
at least 4 compaction points covered by a concrete footing.
Placing of suitable soil for capping layer after the vibro floatation or vibro compaction method of
soil improvement shall be carried out.
By the vibro compaction, the soil is improved to meet the following dutch cone resistance
requirements below the foundation level (in addition to other requirements):
from 0 to 3 meters: cone resistance increasing linearly to 10 MN/m2
from 3 to 5 meters: 10 MN/m2
from 5 to 7 meters: 15 MN/m2
beyond 7: 20 MN/m2

The resistance for the first 3 m shall be 10 MN/m2, when the tests are done from a level more
than 2 m above the foundation level. The results are judged to be successful if not more than 10%
of the measured values are below the above requirements. The tests will be performed in the
most unfavourable location of a probe group. The number of sounding tests shall be at least one
per 100 m2, at least 5 for one structure.
Big scale plate load tests are performed, for quality control purposes, at least one per 25,000 m2
improved area, at least 3. These tests shall comprise 4 compaction points which shall be loaded
to twice the permissible soil pressure.
All test results shall be compiled in test reports, where values obtained are compared with
requested values (in diagrams as far as possible, Es- values derived via settlement calculation
from test results).
A method statement and quality control program shall be prepared by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer prior to start of vibro works containing at least the above requirements
and information about the following:
• description of large scale load test including load steps/waiting time data recording of probe
number and depth, date and time of execution, installation time for every probe, gravel
consumption (if applicable), power consumption versustime or depth (automatically recorded) etc.
10.8 Acceptance
specification.

11 SPREAD FOUNDATIONS

This specification covers the scope of spread foundations in accordance with clause 5.1 “General”
of this specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional and complete
in all parts in accordance with this specification.
General
Foundation works have to be performed so as to ensure the bearing of all loads without detriment
for and damage to the structures. The Contractor has to choose up to date methods and
equipment to ensure this in accordance with relevant internationally recognised standards.
Replacement
If unsuitable soils are encountered below the foundation level or basement floor, they are to be
replaced by suitable layer wise compacted material down to the bearing soil. The soil replacement
shall exceed the edge of the foundation by an angle of 45°. Materials and compaction method as
well as quality control are described in clause 'Earth and Rockworks' of this part. Select fill is to
be employed below all structures (footings and basement floors).


Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified.

Settlement and expansion joints
Joints are to be arranged in such a way that stresses and strains caused by settlements,
temperature, differential settlement, etc. do not adversely affect the structures. This primarily
applies to differently loaded areas and structures having different foundations or foundations of
different depths. The settlement joints shall run through the complete structure down to foundation
level, the expansion joints however shall stop on the top level of foundations.
The joint width which is to be at least 2 cm is to be planned considering all relevant factors
(settlements, tilting, movements, aspects etc.).
Safety against uplift

For all parts of the structures extending into the ground water, safety against uplift has to be
guaranteed during all execution stages, especially when ground water lowering is terminated.
Related works
See clauses “Earth and Rockworks” and “Dewatering during Construction” of this specification.

All materials and related works shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification.

All execution works shall be in accordance with clause relevant clauses of this specification.
Survey of founding ground
The soil conditions met during the foundation works especially in the foundation level are to be
checked by the Contractor's soil engineer, recorded and compared with previous known or
investigated results. If essential differences occur, which could be detrimental to the structures,
the Contractor has to inform the Engineer and to propose further measures.
Foundation works in such areas are to be continued only after approval of such measures by the
Engineer.
If there is any doubt about the soil quality or if discrepancies appear with regard to the previous
decisions or investigations stated by the Engineer, then additional measures are to be taken after
consulting the Engineer (e.g. additional excavation and lean concrete fill).
Immediately prior to concreting any footing, the Contractor has to verify the specified soil
conditions below the foundation level by a sounding or any other suited method approved by the
Engineer.
If e.g. soil replacement of fill was executed, the sounding shall penetrate that layer completely
and being continued at least up to 1 m into the natural soil. The sounding result is to be shown in
a diagram and to be presented to the Engineer prior to concreting. The aim of such soundings is
to finally check the proper execution of the foundation measures and to detect any disturbance
probably caused by trenching, pits etc. subsequently executed. DIN 4094 Part 1 "Soil; exploration
by penetration tests; aids to application; supplementary information" shall apply.
For soil improvement works i.e. execution of special foundations (except replacement method)
only special contractors (or subcontractors) are acceptable subject to providing proof of
experience in successful execution of such works in the form of a detailed description and
references. Together with the description and the references a detailed execution program
including quality control measures relating to the actual site conditions is to be transferred to the
Engineer for approval.
Dewatering

During the foundation works the excavated areas, foundation levels and pits are to be kept free
of water down to at least 1 m below the foundation level. For more details see clause “Dewatering
during Construction” of this specification.
Waterproofing
The necessary measures are to be taken to protect the structure against water action e.g. in
accordance with
DIN 4095 'Planning, design and installation of drainage systems protecting structures against
water in the ground.
DIN 18195 'Water proofing of buildings and structures', parts 1 to 10.
Pitwall stability
The excavated pit sides, walls or slopes have to be stable and established with respect to safety
regulations. For further details see clauses 'Sheet piling' and 'Earthworks' of this Part and
Foundations at different depths
Foundations at different levels shall be based beyond a load spread angle of 30° (against the
horizontal). Otherwise, the load influence (e.g. earth pressure from above and settlements due to
lateral movements) of the higher level structures on the lower ones shall be taken into
consideration.
Shallow foundations
In this clause shallow foundations are described where the footings rest on the natural bearing
soil. For this kind of foundation especially the following standard is to be applied:
DIN 1054 ‘Subsoil, permissible loading of subsoil’.
The excavation for the foundations can be done by machines, if the underground is not disturbed
by this procedure. In every case the last 20 cm above the foundation level are to be excavated
by hand. If the size of shallow foundation is quite large, hence if excavations are carried out
through machines, foundation subgrade shall be compacted and tested for 96% MDD
Particular care shall be employed for checking of the foundation level, see clause 'General' from
above.
Replacement
If unsuitable soils are encountered below the foundation level or basement floor, they are to be
replaced by suitable layer wise compacted material down to the bearing soil.
Materials and compaction method as well as quality control are described in clause 'Earth and
Rockworks' of this Part. Select fill is to be employed below all structures (footings and basement
floors).

11.7 QA/QC
All quality assurance and quality control activities shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of
this specification.
Settlement observation
For settlement observation see clause “Settlement Measurements” of this Part.
Settlements of all relevant structures shall be measured, recorded and shown in diagrams
according to DIN 4107 "Subsoil; settlement observations during and after construction of
structures".
11.8 Acceptance
All acceptance tests and related activities shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of this
specification.

12 PILING WORKS
12.1 Scope of Work

The piling work includes:
• the preparatory works, the installation of the working-site and all the temporary works
requested for the piling
• the drilling of the piles using a temporary casing or bentonite slurry
• the steel reinforcement
• the concreting
• the grouting at the piles bases (if required)
• the cut-off
• the tests on the materials and the piles and any soil testing that the
Contractor decides to perform for the works
• the inventory of fixtures, its costs and the costs resulting from the eventually damages
caused by the piles execution, the Contractor is fully responsible for all the damages to
any buildings or constructions resulting from the piling
• the cleaning of the working site, including the evacuation of any debris, temporary backfill,
soil produced by the piling.
12.2 Documents to be submitted

The following documents shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer in due time and
are to be approved before starting the piling works
• references concerning pile foundations carried out by the Contractor for similar structures
and soil conditions, list of qualified staff
• detailed descriptions of the plant, equipment, materials and procedures proposed for
every type of piling operations that shall be undertaken; these descriptions shall include
plant and equipment specifications, pile constructions sequence, protective systems,
detailed construction or installation procedures, tests procedures
• a proposal of piles record book and pile record sheets (see item "Piling Record")
• piles drawings and calculations notices of the piles with the following information
• number and location of the piles
• working loads acting on the piles
• bearing pressures, settlements, horizontal displacements of the piles(isolated pile and
groups of piles)
• the "useful" length of the piles with cut-off level and base level
• diameters of the piles
• steel reinforcements of the piles
• a general planning of the piling works
12.3 Applicable standards and recommendations

The piling works and design shall be in accordance with the latest editions of internationally
accepted standards such as:
• BS 8004 which replaces CP 2004 1972 "Code of practice for foundations"

• BS 5573 "Code of practice for safety precautions in the construction of
large diameter boreholes for piling and other purposes"
• BS 5930 "Code of practice for site investigation"
• BS 6031 "Code of practice for earthworks"`
• ASTM D1143 "Piles under static axial compressive load, testing"
• DIN 1054 'Subsoil; permissible loading of subsoil'
• DIN 1626 'Welded circular challoyed steel tubes subject to special
requirements, technical delivery conditions.
• DIN 1629 'Seamless circular challoyed steel tubes subject to special requirements,
technical delivery conditions.
• DIN 4014 part 1 'Bored piles; construction procedure, design and bearing behavior'
• part 2 'Bored piles; large bored piles; construction
• procedure, design and bearing behavior'
• DIN 4026 + suppl. 'Driven piles; construction procedure, design and
bearing behavior'
• DIN 4030 part 1 and 2 'Evaluation of liquids, soils and gases aggressive to concrete'
• DIN 17100 'Steels for general structural purposes, quality standard, quality specification'
• API 650 Tank foundations
• 'Recommendations of the Committee for Waterfront Structures Harbours and Waterways
(EAU 1990)' Sixth English Edition.
• 'Recommendation No. 174' of Building Research Establishment Digest:
Concrete in sulfate-bearing soils and groundwater' Other internationally accepted standards

which ensure a quality equal to or higher than the standards mentioned above, can be submitted
to the approval of the Engineer but only if these are submitted in the English language edition. If
any standard contains a provision which is inconsistent with a provision in another standard, the
more stringent shall apply.

Soils characteristics
The detailed soil and rock characteristics and accurate levels shall be provided by the soil
investigation made by the Contractor at the beginning of the works.
Piles characteristics and design criteria
Two types of piles foundation can be proposed and quoted by the Contractor: cast-in place driven
piles or cast-in-place bored piles.
Grouting of the rock below the piles has to be considered if dictated by soil conditions.
The pile bases have to be embedded in the rock level or the load bearing soil stratum, determined
by the soil investigations made at the beginning of the works by the Contractor.
The net vertical pile capacity computed from the soil investigation report is used to determine the
maximum test load in case of piles testing.

The net compressive stress within concrete shall not exceed 5 MPa. The net tensile stress within
steel reinforcement shall not exceed the allowable values furnished in the standards and norms.
Bored cast-in-place piles
The piles are drilled up to the depth indicated by the pile drawing submitted by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer. For each pile, the Contractor draws up the geotechnical profile of the
drilling with description of the strata and samples taken for each stratum as mentioned in the piling
record item of these specifications. A representative sample from each stratum shall be kept in
tight packing until the end of the works.
A suitable type of drilling equipment shall be provided in order to penetrate obstacles (e.g.
boulders) which may be met during the execution of the piles.
Generally drilling operations shall be carried out in such a way as to avoid any disturbance of the
soil. A temporary casing shall be installed to the full depth of the borehole (except in stable rocks).
The bottom of the casing shall always be kept sufficiently below the excavated borehole bottom,
in order to prevent inflow or loosening of the adjacent soil. Alternatively, bentonite slurry can be
used for the temporary support of pile excavations.
When drilling below the groundwater table inside the casing shall always be maintained above
the natural groundwater level by at least 1.5 m, i.e. water has to be added accordingly. Therefore,
the groundwater level at time of boring shall be known. If necessary, special observation wells
shall be drilled.
Just before reinforcing and start of concreting the pile foot is to be cleaned out so that no
disturbed, loose or weak soil remains below the pile tip.
Anchorage in the rock
When different top levels of the rock are encountered during the pile borings, the anchorage levels
shall be adopted and submitted to the approval of the Engineer but the minimum embedment
shall not be less than 3 times the pile diameter.
When the bedrock is reached, the steel casing has to be pushed as far as possible into it, in order
to avoid penetration of sediments by any possible space between the rock and the bit of the steel
casing
Driven cast-in place piles
The Contractor provides to the Engineer all data proving the suitability, efficiency and energy of
the driving equipment.
The weight of the falling mass shall always be adequate to take down the piles at the depth
defined at the project (see the item on the pile characteristics of these specifications).
As a minimal requirement, a Demag 36 or its equivalent as far as energy/blow, number of blows

per minute and ratio pile weight/hammer weight are concerned shall be used. Noise must be
controlled to minimise the impact to personnel.
The tube and its shoe have to be wholly watertight. The pile is started again if water is found at
the bottom of the tube.

Materials
All materials to be used for the piling works shall meet the requirements as specified under clause
"Concrete Works" hereafter. The origin and quality of steel reinforcement, cement, aggregates,
mix water, grouting, and eventual admixtures, will be approved by the Engineer and have to
conform to all applicable standards.
Steel reinforcement
Concrete-composition
The proportioning of the concrete mixed by the Contractor to obtain the specified characteristics
and an adequate workability has to be submitted to the approval of the Engineer.
The concrete shall be as per clause 5.10, “Concrete Works” specified herein Concrete
composition, production, transport and control testing shall be according to relevant British
Standards. The workability measured by standardised procedures shall be adequate for the
method of placing used.
The water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.42.

Program
The program of piling work is to be submitted to the approval of the Engineer four weeks before
the start of the piling works. Sequence of piling shall be stated. Three working days before the
end of each week, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the detailed piling program for the
next week, including adequate notice of his intention to work outside normal hours and at
weekends.
When a modification occurs in the program, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer.
No modifications of the program shall be made without the Engineer’s approval.
Pile measurements
The lump sum price includes the mobilisation/demobilisation of all equipment, the setting up on
each pile location, and the actual execution of the piles (including boring, temporary steel casing
or bentonite slurry, installation of the steel reinforcement with embedded length in the raft,
anchorage in the rock/soil, supplying and installation of the concrete etc.).
Qualification

The piles installation shall be undertaken using proven techniques and equipment and shall be
implemented by specialist personnel who have extensive experience in carrying out such work.
The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel i.e. a foreman for every piling crew, who shall
always be present during the works, as well as a professional engineer, well experienced in piling
works, for supervision.
Staking out-tolerances
The landmarks to be used for the implementation of the piles shall be effective, solid and well
protected.
The method of location of the piles is a duty of the Contractor. The setting out has to be carried
out from the main grid lines of the proposed structures.
The maximum allowed deviation of the piles centre from the theoretical location shown on the
setting out drawing is 50 mm in any direction. The maximum permitted deviation of the completed
pile from the vertical is 20°mm per meter (2.0%).
Cut-off
The piles are to be concreted up to a minimum of 60 cm above the cut-off level.
The cut-off shall eliminate all polluted or poor characteristics concrete at the top of the pile and
shall be carried 10 cm into sound concrete. When this sound concrete is found below the cut-off
level, the Contractor shall realise, at his own expenses, a new concreting up to the cut-off level
with a full connection to the pile. Any repair will be approved by the Engineer.
The concreting of the raft may start only after the cut-off of the pile and after obtaining a
satisfactory resistance of the pile concrete.
The cut-off shall be carefully performed according to a method approved by the Engineer. The
concrete in the head of the pile shall be carefully broken away from the reinforcement which shall
then be cleaned and bent as shown on the drawings or as directed. The concrete surface at the
cut-off level shall be horizontal, plane and free from all loose aggregate.
Working platform
The areas where piling operations are to be carried out is to be leveled and kept clear of water to
provide a dry stable working platform for the plant and equipment operation. After completion of
the piling works the project site is to be cleaned and all excavated material due to these works is
to be removed by the Contractor.
Rejection
If a pile is rejected by the Engineer, the Contractor has to replace it by others in the vicinity of the
rejected pile on instruction of the Engineer and at no expense for the Engineer.
Driven piles – damages to neighboring piles during driving
In case of damages to the adjacent piles, for example observation of concrete rising in the
neighbouring piles, the Contractor shall alter the driving sequence. Particular dispositions may be
needed and decided with the agreement of the Engineer.
The pile driving is carried out following a sequence in order to avoid, as much as possible, an
increasing of the driving resistance for the last piles.
Driving procedure
Each pile has to be driven continuously until the specified depth has been reached.
The Contractor immediately informs the Engineer in case any unexpected change in driving
characteristics occurs and proposes methods to solve the problem. A detailed record of the driving
resistance over the full length of the nearest available pile will be taken if required by the Engineer.
At the start of work (more or less the first 20 piles), sets of blows recordings are taken at intervals
during the last 3 meters of the driving to establish the behaviour of the piles.
The Contractor gives adequate notice and provides all facilities to enable the Engineer to check
driving resistances; a set of blows recordings is taken only in the presence of the Engineer unless
otherwise approved.
The final set of blows has to be recorded for each pile either as the penetration in millimetres per
10 blows or as the number of blows required to produce a penetration of 25 mm (see item on
piling record of these specifications).
The Contractor shall take the necessary dispositions to avoid any water or ground insertion into
the tube or the concrete.
Concreting
Before starting concreting, the Contractor has to check the implantation of the driven tube and
verify that no water or soil is present within the tube. A special procedure shall permit to execute
this control at any moment.
The poured concrete volume needed by the concreting of each pile has to be measured and noted
in the piling record.
In case of successive pouring of dry concrete with tamping, a minimum thickness of concrete shall
be maintained within the tube to avoid any insertion of soil or water at the base of the tube. In any
case, this thickness shall be larger than the half-diameter of the tube.
In case of continuous pouring of concrete, the concrete has to fill the tube in order that the pile is
continuous up to the top level when the tube is removed. If the tube is not long enough to contain
a sufficient concrete volume, the complement of concrete is added after raising of the tube over
the needed length. The basis of the tube is always 1m below the concrete level except at the cut-
off level.
The concreting curve is usually drawn up by the Contractor for one pile by each 50 piles. If the
concrete consumption is not normal (under-volume or more than 30% of over volume), special
procedures shall be taken by the Contractor in agreement with the Engineer.
In case of successive pourings with tamping, the concreting curve is drawn up by measuring the
quantities of each pouring of concrete (max. 0.5 m3) versus the top level of concrete into the tube.
In case of continuous pouring over the full length of the tube, the concreting curve is drawn up by
measuring the concrete top level every time the tube is raised over 2 m.
The concrete needed by the concreting of a pile has to be supplied regularly. The waiting times
between the concrete trucks shall not exceed half an hour. No concreting interruption will be
tolerated.
Before starting the concreting, the bottom of the hole has to be cleaned. All loose or disturbed soil
shall be removed from the base of the hole. This operation is to be executed immediately before
starting the concreting. It means after the introduction of the steel reinforcement cage and not
only at the end of the drilling.
If the checking at the base of the pile shows a penetration of sediments between the rock and the
end of the steel casing, the Contractor shall submit to the approval of the Engineer any method
in order to ensure the sealing of the casing within the rock.
All concrete is to be placed by tremie pipe; the starting of the concreting by this method has to be
particularly well executed. The good quality of concrete at the base of the pile is of main concern
with this operation.
When the top of concrete is below the level of the working platform, the corresponding hole is
immediately filled by gravely sand after the end of concreting.
After concreting of each pile, the concrete volume shall be checked in relation with the theoretical
borehole volume; for this purpose, a concrete curve is drawn up for each pile, truck by truck. A
complete concrete curve is established from the measurements of concrete consumption every
meter on the length of the pile for 1 pile each 50 piles. The concrete-curves (truck by truck and
meter by meter) have to be daily provided to the Engineer and joined to the piling record.
If the concrete consumption is not normal (under-volumes or more than 30% of over-volumes),
special procedures shall be taken by the Contractor in agreement with the Engineer.
Water level within the hole shall be permanently higher than the groundwater level during
concreting. The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and water-tight (also the joints
between elements). The inner diameter of the tremie pipe is at least equal to 4 diameters of the
concrete aggregates and is never smaller than 15 cm.
The length of the tremie pipe is equal to the length of the pile. Before concreting, the pipe shall
reach the bottom of the hole and is then raised in 15 cm steps. The pipe shall never be located
less than 1.5 meter below the level of workable concrete within the pipe.
At all times, a sufficient quantity of workable concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure
that the pressure from it exceeds that of the water.
During the extraction, the base of temporary casing shall be located at least 1 meter below the
level of fresh concrete.
Concrete control
The compression resistance of 15 cm side concrete cubes has to reach the specified
characteristic strength after 28 days. For each group of 5 piles, 6 representative cube samples
shall at least be taken, 3 shall be tested after 28 days, the others shall be stored for other tests to
be specified by the Engineer.
All costs relative to these control tests are under the scope of the Contractor
12.7 QA/QC
Piling record
For each pile, a piling record book giving the main checked values during execution shall be drawn
up and updated by the Contractor with all the work hazards and incidents. That record book shall
be submitted daily to the approval of the Engineer as the execution proceeds.
This record book shall include for each pile details on:
• location, reference number (corresponding to the number fixed on the drawing), type and
diameter of the pile;
• length of the temporary casing;
• date and hour of start and end of each operation drilling, reinforcement setting,
concreting;
• level from which the pile is bored or driven (platform level);
• level at the pile base;
• top level of the concreted pile before the cut-off operation;
• used materials (driving or drilling tools, concreting equipment);
• cleaning results of the bottom of the hole before putting down the reinforcement cage and
before concreting;
• nature and description of the encountered soils;
• poured concrete volume and theoretical volume (measured concrete
curves);
• behavior, workability, fluidity of concrete, results of the compression tests;
• water level within the hole before concreting;
• for driven piles, the refusals corresponding to the three last sets of blows (10 hammer
blows) shall be noted for each pile; for one pile from each 20
piles, a driving diagram shall be drown up;
• type of boring-chisel, lengths of piles where chisel has been used.
Records shall be submitted in duplicate to the Engineer every following
working day until 9 a.m.
The Contractor shall submit to the approval of the Employer / Engineer a proposal of piling record
sheets including all the details mentioned above.
Test piles. Static loading tests
The Contractor shall execute static loading tests in the following quantity:
• up to 10 working piles 1 tests

• up to 30 working piles 2 tests

• more than 30 working piles 3 tests
The pile(s) to be tested shall be approved by the Engineer. The procedure to be followed is
provided by ASTM D 1143 or by BS 8004 art. 7.5.5. The maximum test load shall be 2.5 times
the working load for preliminary piles (total settlement is not exceeding 7 mm after 24 hours of full
load application) and 1.5 times the working load for work piles (total settlement is not exceeding
5 mm after 24 hours of full load application).
Integrity tests are to be performed on 100% of the piles. The loading materials and equipment,
the measurement devices and procedures have to be submitted to the Engineer's approval by the
Contractor.
All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and qualified supervisor
familiar with the test equipment and test procedure. All personnel operating the test equipment
shall have been trained in that field.
The number of increments of load shall be at least four, with a decreasing of load down to zero
after each increment.
If tests prove unsuccessful, the Contractor shall propose all necessary adaptation to the
foundations. These proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer. All costs requested to perform
the foundation adaptation shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
The ICE rules shall be considered.
12.8 Acceptance
specification.

13 CONCRETE WORK

This specification covers the scope of concrete works in accordance with clause “General” of this
specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional and complete in all
parts in accordance with this specification.
The following works are covered by this clause:
• furnishing and storage of materials,

• equipment and labour for processing of aggregate, mixing, testing, transport, pouring,
vibrating, compacting, finishing and curing of concrete.

In general the specifications for concrete works are based on American standards (ACI and
ASTM) mainly ACI 305R, 318/318R, British Standards (BS) mainly BS 8110 part 1 "Structural use
of concrete", the provisions of German Standards DIN, mainly DIN 1045 and DIN EN 206-1,
"Concrete and reinforced concrete structures, design and construction” and the specification of
the “Ciria Guide to concrete construction in the Arabian Peninsula”. In order to protect the concrete
against high concentrations of chlorides and sulfates, all measures shall be taken to achieve as
dense a concrete as possible. The concrete design and working drawings of main structures, and
if required also of secondary structures, shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the
Engineer
Dimensional tolerances
The permissible tolerances shall comply with the, DIN 18202; DIN 18203 and DIN 18215.
Concrete with special properties
General requirements
The precondition for obtaining concrete with special properties is that it has to be made with the
appropriate composition, that it is placed in such a way that segregation does not occur and further
that it is fully compacted and given appropriate curing.
Waterproof concrete
This concrete shall meet the provisions of DIN 1045. Waterproof concrete shall be sufficiently
dense (impermeable) that the depth of water penetration does not exceed 5 mm (with microsilica
admixtures) and 50 mm (without microsilica admixtures) in the test according to BS 1881 Part 5 -
or DIN 1048 and DIN EN 12350. The water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.40.
Concrete with increased resistance to chemical attack

This concrete shall meet the provisions of DIN 1045. Liquids, soils and vapors aggressive to
concrete shall be judged in accordance with DIN 4030 and be classified according to 'mild',
'severe' and 'very severe' attacks.
The resistance of concrete to chemical attack depends on its imperviousness. The concrete shall
be at least sufficiently dense to ensure that the maximum depth of water penetration tested
according to DIN 1048, does not exceed 5 mm (5 cm) in the case of mild attack nor 3 mm (3 cm)
when exposed to severe attack. The values in brackets are for concrete without microsilica
admixtures.
Water aggressive to concrete shall be kept away from the fresh concrete.
Concrete which is exposed for a prolonged period to "very severe" chemical attack shall be
protected against direct access of the aggressive substances in compliance with the requirements
of CIRIA Guide, DIN 4030, DIN 1045 and S 8110 Part 1.
This protection, which is to be laid as protection to all concrete surfaces in contact with the ground,
shall consist of an approved self-adhesive pressure sensitive waterproofing membrane. The
membrane shall adhere to all concrete surfaces, including undersides of structures and other
surfaces where concrete is cast in contact with the membrane.
Such membranes shall be Preprufe 300 (pre applied to blinding concrete) in conjunction with
Bituthene 8000 HC (post applies to walls) as supplied by Grace Construction Products Limited,
Ajax Avenue, Slough, Berkshire SL1 4BH, United Kingdom, or equal approved.
The waterproof membranes shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.
The membranes shall extend 15 cm above ground level
When setting forms and reinforcing steel, caution shall be exercised to avoid damage to the
impervious membrane. The surface of the impervious membrane extending outside the forms
shall be protected during subsequent operations.
Any puncture or damaged areas shall be cleaned and patched according to manufacturer's
instructions.
All exposed concrete surfaces above ground (foundations, superstructures, etc.) shall be
protected from the effects of atmospheric contamination with epoxy coatings (min. thickness 300
micron). This epoxy coating shall be a silane/siloxane type, which consists of a primer penetrating
into the concrete and a compatible top coat.
Concrete with high wearing resistance
This concrete shall meet the provisions of DIN 1045. Concrete which is exposed to severe
mechanical action, e.g., due to intensive traffic, sliding of bulk materials, frequent impact blows or
movements of heavy objects, or due to fast-flowing water carrying solids, or other causes, shall
possess high wearing resistance and correspond at least to grade 35.
The aggregate up to 4 mm size shall consist predominantly of quartz or materials of at least equal
hardness; the coarser particles shall consist of stone or artificial materials possessing high
abrasion resistance. In the case of particularly severe mechanical action it will be necessary to
use special hard materials. The particles of all types of aggregate shall have a moderately rough
surface and be of compact shape. The combined aggregate shall be as coarsely graded as
possible.
Furthermore, the concrete shall be as stiff as possible, in order that there will be no concentration
of cement slurry or water in the top layer. The concrete shall be kept moist for at least 7 days after
placing.
Finishing of concrete surfaces
The concrete face shall have the finish indicated on the drawings or in the specifications.
All surfaces which may come into contact with oil or oily water shall be adequately protected
(paint, etc.). The finished surface of all concrete work shall be sound and free from defects. No
plastering, cement wash or mortar shall be applied to cover defective concrete faces. The repair
works shall be executed to the approval of the Engineer.
Unless instructed to the contrary, the face of the fairfaced concrete placed against shuttering shall
be rubbed down with a carborundum stone immediately upon removal of the shuttering to remove
fins or other irregularities. All fairfaced concrete shall be protected by epoxy coating as shown
above. The face of the concrete for which shuttering is not provided, other than slabs, shall be
smoothed with a wooden flat to give a finish equal to that of the rubbed down face where
shuttering is provided. The cavities left by formwork fixing devices are to be made good closing
the hole with plastic plugs and epoxy mortar. In watertight concrete structures the formwork fixing
devices are of such a design as not to leave any holes after removing the shuttering.
All exterior corners (angles of 90° or less) of reinforced concrete shall be chamfered (25 mm x 25
mm).
The top or final surface of all concrete works shall be finished by screeding, or floating, or
trowelling or grinding, or tooling as approved by the Engineer. Dry cement or cement and sand
shall not be used to dry excess water on the concrete surface.
Floors and slabs, which are required to be finished smooth, shall be trowelled just before the
setting of the concrete. Screeding: shall be executed by moving a straight edge or template by
hand or by mechanical means immediately after compaction of the concrete.
Floating: shall follow screeding, but shall not be started until some stiffening of the concrete has
taken place.
Trowelling: Where specified as necessary, the floating shall be followed by finishing until a smooth
surface free from defects is obtained.
Grinding and tooling: Where specified, the methods to produce the desired surface shall be
approved by the Engineer. The grinding and/or tooling shall not start until the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodgement of the aggregate.
Chiselling: Wherever possible all chiselling works shall be carried out with mechanical devices.
Bar-bending schedules

The Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules based on the detailed reinforcement
drawings. These shall be presented to the Engineer for approval at an early stage in the contract,
certainly before finalisation of his order for reinforcement for that particular part of the work.
Approval of these schedules by the Engineer in no way absolves the Contractor from full
responsibility for their completeness and correctness in every way nor shall any claim for extra
cost or time be allowed on the grounds of such errors of discrepancies which may arise between
drawings and schedules.

5.1.3.
ASTM C 29* Test method for unit weight and voids in aggregate
ASTM C 88* Test method for soundness of aggregates by use of magnesium sulfate
ASTM C 117* Test method for materials finer than 75 mm sieve in mineral aggregates by washing
ASTM C 131 Test method for resistance to degradation of small size coarse aggregate by
abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles machine.
ASTM C 136* Test method for sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates
ASTM C 142 Test method for clay lumps and friable particles in aggregates
ASTM P 214* Proposed test method for accelerated detection of potentially

deleterious expansion of mortar bars due to alkali silica reaction
ASTM C 289* Test method for potential reactivity of aggregates (chemical method)
ASTM C 127 Test method for specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate
ASTM C 40 Test method for organic impurities in fine aggregates for concrete
ASTM C 87 Test method for effect of organic impurities in fine aggregate on the strength or mortar
ASTM C 128 Test method of specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate
Reinforcing steel used in reinforced concrete shall comply with the following
standards:
British Standards:
BS 4449 "Hot rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete"
BS 4482 "Hard drawn mild steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete" BS 4483 "Steel fabric for
the reinforcement of concrete"
BS 4461 "Cold worked steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete"

BS 812 Part 1 Elongation index BS 812 Flakiness index
BS 1377 Sec 3.2 Total sulfate content of soil (crush sample Test 9* such that all material shall
pass a 2 mm sieve)
BS 812 Part 4 Chloride content of aggregate. Appendix C*

Quality of materials
All materials used for concrete and reinforced concrete structures shall be of the best quality, free
from defects likely to undermine the strength and duration of service of the works. The materials
furnished shall at least comply with the agreed standards, and with all requirements described in
this specification.
Storage of materials
All materials shall be stored and handled in a manner that will prevent contamination and/or
deterioration. Deteriorated and/or contaminated material shall not be used for the concrete and
shall be removed from the site at the expense of the Contractor.
Cement
The cement used for concrete, reinforced concrete, mortar, grout and plaster works shall be a
moderate sulfate resisting Portland Cement in accordance with ASTM C150 type I. If the
aggregate is determined to be potentially reactive, the alkalis as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O) in the
cement shall be 0.6 percent or less.
Sampling and testing of cement
All deliveries of cement to the concrete supplier shall be accompanied by a certified mill test report
and shall include all of the physical and chemical properties as required by tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 of
ASTM C150 for type I cement.
The manufacturer's test certificate will normally be accepted as proof of compliance with the
specification, but the Engineer may order further tests of a character specified in the appropriate
American, European, British or German standards. The confirmatory tests are to be conducted
by a recognised quality control organisation. The Contractor shall bear all expenses required for
the preparation, dispatch, and tests of the samples. In case the results of such tests show any
sample to be inferior to specifications, the whole consignment from which the sample was taken
shall not be used and shall be immediately removed from the site.
Delivery and storage of cement
The following information shall be provided for all cement shipments (either whole or part) which
are intended for delivery to site: date of manufacture, date of original loading, destinations en-
route, date of unloading, intended date of delivery to site.

Cement which has been manufactured for longer than 6 months on the proposed date of delivery
to the site shall be inspected, sampled and tested for approval purposes before delivery to the
site.
The Contractor shall obtain and provide to the Engineer the manufacturer’s Bulk Average Test
Certificate for each consignment of cement to the works. The certificates shall be provided before
the consignments are required for use and shall show the chemical composition and physical
properties determined in accordance with the relevant standard.
Samples shall be taken from each consignment of cement and tested as directed by the Engineer
in an approved independent laboratory.
When bulk cement deliveries are proposed the Contractor shall provide all information required
by the Engineer concerning off-site storage and loading arrangements and shall provide
reasonable facilities for the Engineer to inspect these arrangements for approval purposes.
Consignments shall be used in the order in which they were delivered.
All bagged cement shall be stored in a weatherproof building having dense impervious bituminous
or concrete floors which shall be kept swept clean at all times. The storage arrangements shall
be fully completed and approved by the Engineer before any cement is delivered to site.
Each consignment of cement shall be separately stored for ease of access, identification,
inspection, and sampling. Sufficient stocks shall be maintained on site to ensure the proper
progress of the works and the stock holdings shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
If bagged cement is stored in silos it shall be charged into the silos through a
6.3 mm mesh screen which is welded or bolted to and covers the entire feed area of the silo
charging hopper.
Cement stored in silos shall be adequately protected against rain, humidity and dewfall, and all
silo charging and discharging points shall be properly sealed. Silo aeration equipment shall if
available, incorporate dehumidifiers.
No cement from any consignment shall be used in permanent works without the approval of the
Engineer.
Cement which contains air-set or hardened lumps, re-powdered air-set material, foreign matter
or which has been contaminated or is otherwise unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer will
be rejected and shall be removed from site without delay.
The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying himself that the performance characteristics of
cement are not such as to necessitate excessive cement content or be likely to cause or
accentuate any undesirable properties in the fresh or hardened concrete notwithstanding
apparent compliance with this specification.
Bulk cement shall be used for structures, bagged cement shall be used for masonry, plaster etc.
Water
Water used for mixing and curing shall be potable. Potable water shall be used for the production
of concrete and processing of aggregate provided that the following requirements are satisfied:
• the compressive strength of 50 mm cubes made and tested in accordance with ASTM C
109, using the proposed water shall not be less than 90 percent of similar cubes made
with distilled water.
• the setting time of mortars made and tested in accordance with ASTM C 191 and
containing the proposed water shall not be more than 1 hour earlier nor more than 1-1/2
hours later than mortar made with distilled water.
• the following chemical limits shall not be exceeded:
Chlorides (CL--) < 300 ppm
Sulfates (SO4--) < 750 ppm
Sum of alkali carbonates + bicarbonates(NaCO3 + NaHCO3) < 750 ppm
Dissolved solids excluding the above < 2000 ppm
Suspended solids < 2000 ppm
The concrete supplier shall provide chemical and physical test data for each source of water to
be used prior to use.
When water is transported in tank trucks, each unit shall be accompanied by a chemical test
report indicating compliance with the above requirements.
All water to be analysed by an independent laboratory before any work commences and at
intervals as directed by the Engineer tests and quality of water shall be in accordance with BS3148
or DIN 1045 and 4030.
Aggregates
The aggregates for concrete shall be crushed mountain rock subject to Employer / Engineer’s
approval.
The aggregate to be used in the work shall be supplied from an established pit or quarry. The
aggregate source shall have a minimum five (5) years history of satisfactory performance in
structural concrete and consistency of supply.
The concrete supplier shall obtain from the aggregate producer, or otherwise provide current test,
examination, inspection reports performed and certified by an approved laboratory for submittal
to the Engineer.
As a minimum, this information shall include the following items:
Item 1 A comprehensive description, with current photographs of the pit or quarry, including but
not limited to, identification by name and location, type of deposit, age, potential reserves,
primary products by size including average gradation based on previous six (6) months
production and the range for each sieve size; mining methods, process equipment, quality
control organisation and laboratory; the primary and alternate means of product
transportation; listing of primary and secondary users of the product.
Item 2 Petrographic examination in accordance with ASTM C 255 performed by a qualified

concrete aggregate petrographer. This report shall address all items contained in ASTM C
295, section 15. This report shall be based on material produced and examined within the
previous six (6) months and shall be representative of the current production.
Item 3 Coarse aggregate shall be sampled from current production in accordance with ASTM D
75. Three (20 mm, 10 mm and 5 mm) nominal maximum size (NMS) aggregates shall be
sampled and tested as follows:
Fine Aggregate
Fine Aggregate (Dune Sand) shall be sampled from the intended source and tested as herein
specified. The material shall be subjected to all relevant tests (minimum those marked with an
asterisk in clause “Codes and Standards” of “Concrete Works” above.
Aggregates when subjected to the tests defined in items above, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer shall meet the following requirements.
Table on aggregates types
Test Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate

5mm and Dune Sand
ASTM C 29 Unit Weight No Limit No Limit
ASTM C 88 Soundness
5 cycles MgSO4 12% 15%
ASTM C 117 Clay, Silt, Dust Gravel 1%
Crushed Rock 3% 3%
5%
ASTM C 131 Abrasion 30% 30% (5mm only)
ASTM C 136 Gradation NMS 20mm shall
have not more than 10 percent retained on 20mm sieve and NMS 5mm shall be
well graded such that when blended with Dune sand the

5mmandDuneSand
ASTMC 29 Unit Weight No Limit No Limit
ASTMC 88 Soundness 12% 15%
5cycles MgSO4
ASTMC 117 Clay, Silt, Dust Gravel 1% 3%

CrushedRock3% 5%
ASTMC 131 Abrasion 30% 30% (5mmonly)

ASTMC 136 Gradation NMS20mmshall NMS5mmshall be
Have not more than Well graded such that
10percentretained when blended with Dune
on20mmsieveand sand the


5mmandDuneSand
notmorethan5 fineness modulus
percent passing the shall bebetween2.6
sieve, NMS– 10mmshall and3.0. Dune sand may
not have more than be used achieve an
10percentretained acceptable gradation
on10mmsieveand not
more than 5percent
passing a 2.36mmsieve
ASTMC 142 Clay Lumps (Max)2% (Max)3%

ASTMC 214 Deleterious 0.10%@16days 0.10%@16days
Expansion due to
Alkali-Silica reaction
ASTMC 289 Potential reactivity No limits

Chemical method applicable. Report the
concentration of the
dissolved silica Sc and
reduction in alkaniti Rc
ASTMC 127 Absorption and Specific gravity>

specific gravity coarse 2.5
aggregate (SSD)Absorption< 2.0
ASTMC 128 Absorption and Specific gravity>2.5

specific gravity fine Absorption<2.0
aggregate
ASTM40 Organic impurities Lighter than standard
ASTMC 87 Effect of organic Relativestrength7
Impurities on strength days >95%
of mortar
BS812 Elongation Index <25% <25%
BS812 Flakiness index <25% <25%
Section105.1
Section
105.1
BS1377 Total sulphates <0.4% <0.4%

Section3.2 Test 9
(Crush all material top
ass 2msieve)
BS812 Total chloride as cl <0.03% <0.06%
Testing is to be carried out at the foll owing intervals:
Type Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate

Grading Daily Daily
Specific Gravity 7days 7days
Magn Sulfate 30days -
soundness
Clay Silt and dust daily daily
content
Shape 3.5days -
(Elongation and
flakiness)
Los Angeles Initial stage only Initial stage only
Abrasion
Moisture content 2days 2days
Drying shrinkage Initial only Initial only
Organic impurities 30days 30days
10%fines value for 7days -
concrete
Combined grading also on a daily basis
Storage and handling of aggregates
Cement and densified silica fume shall be stored in separate weather-tight buildings, bins or silos
that shall exclude moisture and contaminants. At least two cement silos are required with enough
storage for a total of 400 metric tons of cements.
Aggregate stockpiles shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid segregation and to prevent
contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Aggregate delivery
trucks shall be covered to prevent wind-blown contamination. Aggregate stockpiles shall be
located relative to prevailing winds to mitigate the accumulation of wind-borne dust.
Adequate storage shall be provided for each aggregate. The aggregate storage area shall be on
concrete pavement sloped to drain excessive moisture. The aggregate storage area shall provide
bulkheads to separate piles and protect against wind-blown contaminants. Provision shall be
made to shade and sprinkle the aggregates with potable water.
Aggregate stockpiles shall be built in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 1 m in thickness,
with each layer being completed before the next is started. No vehicles shall be allowed to operate
on top of the stockpiles.
Rescreening Course Aggregate
Rescreening and washing of coarse aggregates is required, if necessary, to reduce total chloride
and/or sulfate contents to a level less than the maximum allowed by the specifications. If
rescreening is required, the screening and washing shall be just prior to transferring aggregate to
batch plant bins. Aggregates shall be dewatered over a screen to remove excess water before
being stored in the batch plant bins.
Natural or manufactured sand shall be allowed to drain until it has reached somewhat uniform
moisture content before it is used.
Liquid admixtures shall be stored in such a manner to avoid contamination, evaporation and
segregation in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
Fine aggregate
Fine aggregate source shall be manufactured crushed stone or rock sand, excluding fines which
are by products/rejects of coarse aggregate production. The crushed stone sand shall be graded
from fine to coarse with the coarse sizes predominating to give maximum density.
The amount of fine particles as ascertained by the laboratory sedimentation method shall not
exceed 10% for crushed stone nor 4% for natural sand.
The amount of material passing a BS No.200 sieve (75 micron) when tested in accordance with
BS 812 (decantation method), shall not exceed the following limits:
Crushed stone sand
• concrete subject to abrasion 1% by weight

• all other concrete 3% by weight
There shall be no clay or fine silt present.
The amount of hollow shells likely to form voids or remain partially unfilled and present in material
retained on a BS No.7 sieve, determined by direct visual separation, shall not exceed 3% by
weight of the entire sample.
Fine aggregate shall not contain appreciable amounts of flaky and or elongated particles.
The water absorption of fine aggregate, determined in accordance with BS 812 shall not exceed
2.0% by weight.
Fine aggregate subjected to five cycles of the soundness test, specified in ASTM C88, shall not
show a loss exceeding 10% when sodium sulfate solution is used and 15% when magnesium
sulfate solution is used, except where approved otherwise.
Tests are to be executed in accordance with BS 812 or DIN 4226. The grading of fine aggregate
for concrete work shall comply with the requirements of BS 882, or with the DIN 4226 Part 1 table
3.

The grading of the aggregates shall be such as to produce a concrete of the specified proportions
which will work readily into position without segregation and without the use of an excessive water
content. The grading shall be controlled throughout the work so that it conforms closely to that
used for the preliminary tests.
A check on the moisture content of sand shall be made at least once a day before concreting.
The amount of water to be added to the concrete mix shall be adjusted accordingly. Any washing,
screening, classifying and other operations on the fine aggregate required to meet this
specification shall be done by the Contractor. Washing is required if the content of salt adhering
to the aggregate is found to be unacceptably high.
Coarse aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel or crushed mountain rock and shall be
free from decomposed stone, clay, earth or other deleterious substances. The specific gravity of
the coarse aggregate shall not be less than
2.5 t/m3. Aggregate of crushed natural stone is deemed adequate if the stone reveals a crushing
strength of 1000 kg/cm2 when tested. Friable, flaky and laminated pieces, mica and shale shall
only be present in such quantities as not to affect the strength and durability of the concrete.
The grading of coarse aggregate for concrete shall comply with the requirements of table 1 of the
BS 882 or DIN 4226, Part 1, table 3.
Samples of aggregates shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with sieve analysis showing
the proportion by weight passing sieves. When aggregates which are satisfactory to the Engineer
have been selected, the Contractor shall secure his entire supply of each material from the same
source so as to maintain the same quality and grading throughout the work. Should it become
necessary to change the source or characteristics of the material supplied this shall only be done
after additional tests.
Concrete additives
Use of concrete additives
Concrete additives approved by the Engineer shall be used to improve consistency, workability,
quality and strength of the concrete.
Chemical admixtures manufacturer shall provide certified test reports from qualified independent
laboratories showing actual test results indicating material that complies in all respects with the
applicable specification.
Admixtures used in concrete shall conform to the appropriate specification and requirements as
indicated below:
a) Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 260.
b) Water-reducing and retarding admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494.

Accelerating admixtures shall not be used. Type F or Type G high range water reducers shall
conform to ASTM C 1017 and shall be "Rheobuild 561" or Rheobuild 716" as manufactured
by Master Builders (or equal), as approved by the Engineer. High-range water reducers shall
be aphthalene- sulfonated polymer based material. No admixtures containing chlorides shall
be used.
c) Chemical admixture suppliers shall provide certified test reports with each shipment indicating
compliance with the appropriate specification. The test reports shall include the chloride
content of the admixture, specific gravity and solids content.
d) Silica fume may be either a condensed form or other approved products.
Microsilica shall meet the following requirements:
SiO2 (min) % 90
SO3 (max) % 1.0
C (max) % 6.0
In order to avoid any problem, which may occur due to the improper use of microsilica, all the
possible problems related to the use of microsilica shall be coordinated with a specialist of
microsilica supplier.
Mainly the following matters shall be coordinated:
• microsilica content in % by weight (minimum 8% of cement weight)

• mixing of concrete
• curing, etc.
Written evidence of this coordination is to be provided to the Employer / Engineer.
e) Fibres
Polypropylene fibres shall be collated, fibrillated polypropylene fibre as manufactured by

Fibremesh Employer or an approved equal.
f) Corrosion inhibitors
Reinforced concrete subject to contact with seawater and brine, as a result of submergance,
splashing, spry, leakage from piping or plant, or from any other cause, shall have a proprietary
concrete corrosion inhibiting compound incorporated into to concrete mix.
The corrosion inhibitor shall be appropriate to the protection of steel reinforcement against
corrosion throughout the 25 year design life of the structures. The corrosion inhibitor shall be
compatible with the required concrete mix and shall be appropriate to the environmental
exposure. The product shall carry a British Board of Agreement Certificate for the intended usage.
Before incorporating corrosion inhibitor into any concrete mix the Contractor shall submit details
for review and written consent by the Engineer.
The corrosion inhibitor shall be equivalent to DCI-S Corrosion Inhibitor by

W.R. Grace Ltd. the dosage of which shall be 10 liters of inhibitor per cubic meter of concrete.
Admixtures used in production of concrete shall be the same as used in establishing the required
concrete mix and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions.
Accelerating and retarding additives

Such additives shall only be used in case of necessity and after obtaining the written approval of
the Engineer
Plasticisers and air entraining additives
Plasticisers and air entrainers are intended to reduce bleeding of free water at the surface. It shall
only be used after the written approval of the Engineer and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

All execution works shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses of this specification.
13.6 Exposure Classes

The Specification refers to three exposure classes. If there is any doubt about what class to use
for a given structure, the strictest shall always apply, even if for example the levels of chlorides or
sulphates in soil may seem moderate.
Class A, Aggressive, with Chlorides and Sulphates
This includes:
• Any structure in contact with sea water, or discharge water such as cooling water, brine,
etc. Typical examples are intakes, pump-houses, basins, and channels.
• Any structure exposed to occasional spray or splash from seawater or discharge water.
• Any structure in the ground or in contact with the ground up to a level of at least 0.5m
above ground level.
Class B, Aggressive, with Risk of Chlorides, but no Sulphates
This includes for example the following unless they belong to Class A:
• Any out-door structure more than 0.5m above ground, located in a coastal region.
• Any area subject to water spillage or washing.
• Tanks and other structures containing product water.
Class C, Moderate, with no Risk of Chlorides or Sulphates
This includes fore example the following unless they belong to Class A or B:
• In-door structures in dry buildings, if isolated from the ground or more than 2m above
ground, and not exposed to frequent water spillage or washing.
• Out-door structures more than 2m above ground in dry buildings in dry inland locations
(not in a coastal region), and not exposed to frequent water spillage or washing.
A dry building shall mean an administration building, residential building, warehouse or factory
without any wet or aggressive processes which may put the building in a stricter exposure class.
13.7 Minimum Requirements to Concrete Mix

The mix proportions are to be determined by proper mix design based on the requirements for
strength, workability and the particular site in which the concrete is to be placed. The mix design
will be carried out by the competent professional. The design of mixes will be based on the
principles of BS 5328 or DIN 1045.
Concrete aggregates and cement shall be proportioned and batched by weight. Water and liquid
additives shall be proportioned.
Durability and Structural Design Requirements
It is expected that the durability requirements of the concrete mix (mainly the w/c ratio) will give a
higher strength than that required for the structural design.
This expected strength shall be used to monitor the Contractor’s ability to manage and control the
concrete production process. Fluctuations in strength shall be taken as an indication in poor
quality control and corrective action shall be taken. Strength fluctuations must be kept within the
pre-planned limits which shall be defined in the quality control documentation
Structural design considerations shall not be used to relax any requirements of the Specification.
Strength requirements stated on the Drawings shall be complied with. If they are higher than the
strength requirements of the concrete grades in this Specification then a higher strength mix shall
be designed and documentation submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Concrete Grades
The following standard range of grades refers to reinforced structures. Exposure Classes
are defined in Section 5.13.7 (Exposure Classes).
• Grade “A”
To be used for all concrete in Exposure Class A
Minimum characteristic strength (cube concrete specimens) = 50MN/m2
Cement ASTM Type I, see Note 1), 2) :5%<C3A<8%
Minimum cement content = 350kg/m3
Maximum cement content = 390kg/m3
Microsilica content, (See Note2)= 7% of cement weight
Max. free water/cementious material = 0.40
Admixtures, (see Note 3),4), 5).
Chloride permeability measured by ASTM C1202 shall be Very Low (100 - 1,000 coulombs).

Water permeability measured by DIN 1048 Teil 1 cl.4.7 shall be max 6 mm after 3 days with 5
bars.
• Grade “B”
To be used for all concrete in Exposure Class B
Cement ASTM Type I, see Note 1), 2) 7%<C3A
Microsilica content, (See Note2) = 7% of cement weight
Admixtures, (see Notes 3, 4 & 5).
Chloride permeability measured by ASTM C1202 shall be Very Low (100 - 1,000 coulombs).
Water permeability measured by DIN 1048 Teil 1 cl.4.7 shall be max 6 mm after 3 days with 5
bars.
• Grade “C”
To be used for all concrete in Exposure Class C
Cement Type I, see Note 1), 2) :5%<C3A
Admixtures, (see Note 3) and 5).
• Grade “D”
To be used only for blinding layers (mud-mats)
Minimum characteristic strength = 15 MN/m2

Cement ASTM Type V, see Note 2)
NOTE 1) Cement for reinforced structures shall be ASTM Type 1
NOTE 2) Cement for unreinforced structues shall be ASTM Type V (or Type 1 If Type V is
used, there shall be no requirement for the use of microsilica.

NOTE 3) With the specified limits on the water/cementations ratio, plasticisers and/or
superplasticisers will generally be needed to produce a workable mix. Plasticisers
providing an entrained air content of about 1% are generally found to increase the
workability as well as reducing the tendency of segregation. Retarders, e.g. in the
form of retarding superplasticisers may also be needed.
NOTE 4) High-range water-reducing admixtures shall always be used in mixes containing
microsilica.
NOTE 5) Admixtures shall fulfil the requirements specified for constituent materials;
furthermore, the compatibility and the effects of admixtures shall be documented
as part of the pre-testing of the concrete.
Free water/Cementitious Material Ratio, w/c
The free water/cementitious material ratio, referred to as the w/c ratio, shall mean the free water
content divided by the cement content plus the microsilica content multiplied with an activity factor
of 2.0. This calculation is expressed in the following formula
w/c = free water / (1.0 x cement + 2.0 x microsilica)
In order to compensate for the deviations stemming from mixing tolerances, the target value (i.e.
the value on the mix recipe) for the w/c ratio shall be set at least 0.02 lower than the specified
maximum value. Unless another value for mixing tolerances is documented to the satisfaction of
The Engineer (based on documented accuracy of the weighing and batching see 3.3.1), the target
value shall be 0.03 below the specified max value, in no event shall the target value be less than
0.02 below the specified max value.
General description and proportions and mixing
Consistency of concrete
The amount of water used in the concrete shall be adjusted as required to ensure such a
consistency that it can be readily transported placed and compacted without segregation of the
materials or bleeding of free water at the surface. Addition of water to compensate for stiffening
of the concrete before placing shall not be permitted. Consistency of the concrete shall be
checked by slump tests and shall not exceed the values given by BS 1881, Part 2 or DIN 1045,
Part 1.
Mixing of concrete
The cement and aggregate shall be thoroughly mixed in a batch-type pull mill mixer. The capacity
of the mixer shall not be less than 1 (one) cubic meter and the total capacity of the batching mixing
plant shall be such to accommodate the various concrete quantities to be cast in a continuous
way and shall comply with the requirements of BS 1305 or DIN 459.
The water shall not be added until all the aggregate and cement are in the drum. Mixing shall
continue until the concrete is uniform in color and for not less than 1 (one) minute after all the
materials and water are in the drum.
Partly set or excessively wet concrete shall not be used. No concrete shall be mixed by hand.
Transport of concrete
Immediately after mixing, the concrete shall be conveyed to the place of use as rapidly as possible
using methods which will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of materials. The
concrete shall be placed and compacted within 90 minutes of the addition of water to the mix. Any
concrete left unplaced after this time shall be rejected and removed from the site.
The concrete shall be transported using transit mixers. Before using concrete pumps, placer
pipelines, chutes or spouts it is necessary to have the written approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall obtain permission at least 48 hours in advance of any concrete pour.
Concreting operations
Inspection prior to concreting
All concreting methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Concrete placing shall
not be started until the Engineer has approved all preparation of forms, reinforcement, joints and
all mixing, conveying, spreading, curing, finishing and protection equipment.
Placing of concrete
Concrete shall be placed in the forms as close as possible to its final position in a single operation
to the full thickness of slabs and beams and shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding
2.5 m height in a single pour in walls, columns and similar members.
The Contractor shall organize the pouring of concrete in such a manner that once concreting of a
section has started the operation shall be continuous and each operation shall be completed prior
to a stoppage.
The Temperature of concrete shall not exceed 30°C measured at discharge into the works.
Concrete shall not be placed when the ambient temperature is 40°C or above, or is above 37°C
and is rising.
The maximum allowable temperature of any point within any cast element is 60°C. The maximum
allowable temperature differential between any two points in the same element is 15°C. Additional
temperature control measures during construction (such as the use of insulated formwork) will be
required. Contractor to prepare a process control chart and method statement verifying measures
to achieve these requirements. Temperature monitoring of concrete work is required where:
a. the minimum dimension of any casting is 0.8 meters or more, or
b. where otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Where specified on the drawings, construction, expansion or contraction joints shall be provided
and the concrete shall be poured continuously between two adjacent joints. No other joints than
shown on the drawings shall be permitted. Stoppage (cold) joints formed between two concreting
operations separated by more than 6 hours time shall be subject to the same treatment as the
construction joints.
Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 1.5 meters. Trunking and chutes
to Engineer’s approval shall be used for any concrete to be deposited from a height exceeding
1.5 m.
Concrete which has partially hardened shall not be exposed to injurious vibration or shock, except
for controlled re-vibration where specified. When concreting of a certain large structural element
is specified strictly as to be poured continuously, then the concreting operations shall be
organized for day and night working, in long shifts, as necessary.
Compaction and mechanical vibration of concrete
As concrete is being placed it shall be compacted by mechanical vibrators, to obtain a dense

material free from honeycombing, free from water and air holes. For compacting the concrete,
internal vibrators shall be used operating within a range of 5,000 to 10,000 cycles per minute.
The Contractor shall ensure that the vibrators are used in such a manner that the reinforcement
is not displaced, the formwork not damaged and no segregation caused, but complete compaction
of the concrete is achieved.
Mechanical vibrators for coated rebars shall be with plastic cap.
Construction joints
The number of construction joints shall be kept as low as possible consistent with reasonable
precautions against shrinkage. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction
joints.
Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration shall be given to their
exact location, which shall be indicated on the drawings. Alternatively, the location of joints shall
be subject to agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor before any work commences.
Construction joints shall be at right angles to the general direction of the member and shall take
due account of shear and other stresses. Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge
and vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board.
The top surface of a layer of concrete shall be level and reasonably flat unless design
considerations make this undesirable. Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with
features of the finished work.
If a kicker (i.e. a starter stub) is used it shall be at least 70mm high and carefully constructed. The
kicker shall be incorporated with the previous concrete. Where possible, the formwork shall be
designed to facilitate the preparation of the joint surface, as the optimum time for treatment is
usually two to four hours after placing.
The maximum horizontal length of wall to be poured in one operation in any one direction is 7.5
meters. A period of 7 days to be allowed between adjacent pours except where water stops are
provided when this can be reduced with Engineer’s approval. Alternatively, a gap of 600 mm wide
shall be left between adjacent pours and filled after 7 days from the date of formation subject to
Engineers approval.
Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the concrete against
which new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and shall be roughened to the extent
that the largest aggregate is exposed but not disturbed. Care shall be taken that the joint surface
is clean immediately before the fresh concrete is placed against it.

Particular care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the joint. This concrete
shall be particularly well compacted and if possible a vibrator shall be used.
Where the Engineer considers that special preparation is necessary, i.e. for an in situ structural
connection, preparation shall be carried out preferably when the concrete has set but not
hardened, by spraying with a fine spray of water or brushing with a stiff brush, which is sufficient
to remove the outer mortar skin and expose the larger aggregate. Where this treatment is
impracticable, sand blasting or a needle gun shall be used to remove thesurface skin and laitance.
Hacking of hardened surfaces shall be avoided.
A record shall be kept on site of the time and date of placing the concrete in each section of the
work.
Expansion and contraction joints
The expansion joints, contraction joints and other permanent structure joints shall be provided in
positions as shown in the drawings.
Joints shall be straight and vertical, except where other specified and concrete surfaces on both
sides of the joint shall be flush. Where necessary, waterstops of a type approved by the Engineer
shall be embedded in the concrete. All structures in the underground shall have external water
stoppers. The waterstop shall be made of high-quality material which shall obtain its resilience
through the service live of the structure for the double function of movement and sealing. The
surface of waterstops shall be carefully rounded to ensure tightness of the joint even under heavy
water pressure. To ensure a good tightness with or without movement of the joints the waterstop
shall be provided with anchor parts. The cross section of the waterstops shall be determined in
accordance with the presumed maximum water pressure and joint movements. The complete
works of fixed and welded connections shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
All joints between structural steel and concrete parts shall be sealed by a suitable permanent
flexible compound.
Link seal requirement shall be provided for water tightness between the duct / cellar / wall boxes.
Concreting at night
When approval is given to carry out concreting operations (under control of the Engineer) at night
or in places where daylight is excluded, the Contractor has to provide adequate lighting at all
points of mixing, transportation and placing of concrete.
Concreting in high ambient temperature
“ACI standard 305 - concreting in hot weather” shall apply. The temperature of the mixed concrete
shall not exceed 30°C. The Contractor shall take special measures in the mixing, placing and
curing of concrete. These measures shall include the shading of aggregates, spraying of
aggregates with water, cooling of the mix constituents (introduction of ice to the mixing water) and
reduction of transportation time to the minimum. During placing suitable measures shall be
provided to prevent premature setting of concrete placed in contact with hot surfaces. All
concreting areas, formwork and reinforcement shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun
and sprayed with water when necessary.

Protective measures for concrete
In general, the cover of rebars shall be as per ACI 318, BS 8110 or DIN 1045 taking into account
the site conditions (high temperature, humidity), but not less than required in 1.4.4. Special
requirements for materials to avoid corrosion problems.
The minimum concrete cover shall be as follows:
• concrete parts above ground (external surface) 75 mm

• concrete exposed to underground and groundwater 75 mm
• concrete exposed to seawater and seawater spray 100 mm
• slabs (internal) 30 mm
• beams and coils (internal) 40 mm
Immediately after the compaction of the concrete has been finished, the Contractor shall ensure
adequate protection from the weather. Excessive drying can lead to crack formation as a result
of plastic contraction. The concrete surface shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvas, straw
mats or similar absorbent material, special protection sprays kept constantly moist for at least 7
days.
Curing compounds or other methods of preventing evaporation may be used if approved by the
Engineer. Where formwork cannot be removed within 24 hours after placing the concrete, the
formwork shall be kept shaded from the direct rays of the sun and shall be sprayed with water.
Engineer’s approval to the use of a particular curing compound and to the method of application
will only be given after the Contractor has completed satisfactory site trials and a sample panel
has stood for at least 28 days.
Where large sections of concrete are poured, special precautions to the approval of the Engineer
shall be taken to reduce and dissipate the heat generated by the setting and hardening of the
concrete (e.g. built-in cooling water pipe system).
The minimum amount of reinforcement shall be present to prevent shrinking cracks.
No load of any kind, however light, shall be allowed on concrete which has not properly set and
the Contractor shall prevent any load to be imposed on the concrete structures until it has been
declared by the Engineer to be ready to carry loads.
Protective measures for concrete
Repair of damaged or defective concrete
Concrete which has completed its final setting shall be inspected by the Engineer and any cracks,
honeycomb areas, segregations, etc. shall be marked. No repairs shall be carried out until
directed by the Engineer.
Concreting under water
Underwater placing of concrete is allowed only for un-reinforced components, the placing being
effected exclusively with stationary tremies and shall be in accordance with the requirements of
DIN 1045, and Clause "Strength of concrete" above.
Underwater concrete shall comply with the following characteristics:

• the quantity of cement shall be not less than 400 kg/m³ when using aggregate mixes with
a maximum particle size of 20 mm,
• the water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.40,
• preferred aggregates are those with continuous grading curves lying approximately in the
middle of the favorable range,
Underwater concrete is to be placed continuously without interruption. For water depths up to 1m

the concrete may be placed without tremie. In the case of water depths exceeding 1 m the
concrete is to be placed in such a way that it does not fall freely through the water. The tremies
shall at all times dip sufficiently far into the freshly placed concrete to ensure that the concrete
emerging from the tremie does not come into contact with the water.
All work connected with the placing of concrete under water shall be designed, directed and
inspected with due regard to local circumstances and purposes. Work shall not proceed until all
phases and methods to be used in the placing operations have been approved by the Engineer.
Reinforcing steel
General
The types to be used are shown on the construction drawings and shall be:
• Deformed bars - Grade 460

• Mesh reinforcement - Grade 460
Reinforcement supports
Reinforcement supports shall include all spacers, chairs, ties, slab bolster, clips, chair bars, and
other devices for properly assembling, placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening the
reinforcement.
Spacers shall be cast from concrete of the same quality as that in which they will be embedded.
Concrete block spacers shall be cast in metal molds with an approved means of separating blocks
and of ensuring that the blocks are of the proper size.
Coated binding wire shall be incorporated into the blocks to enable them to be securely attached
to vertical or horizontal bars and the Contractor shall demonstrate both that the blocks are of the
requisite strength and that the means of attachment to the reinforcement are adequate.
Stock of reinforcing steel
In order to ensure due progress of the works, the Contractor shall at all times maintain on the site
a stock of reinforcing steel sufficient for the following month's work. No reinforcing steel shall be
used upon the works until it has been accepted as satisfactory by the Engineer.
Rejection
The Engineer will reject any reinforcement steel as the result of any failed test therefore not
withstanding the manufacturers or coating applicator's certificates.

The Contractor shall remove all rejected reinforcing steel from the site without delay at his own
expense.
Production handling
Bars shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent damage to the coating. Bars or coating
damaged in handling or other operations shall be satisfactorily repaired at no additional cost to
the Employer. All systems for handling the coated bars shall have padded contact areas wherever
possible.
All bundling bands shall be padded and all bundles shall be lifted with a strong-back or spreader
bar with a minimum of three supports to the bundle. The bars or bundles shall not be dropped or
dragged. Extra care in handling of these bars will be beneficial to the Contractor in reducing or
eliminating in- place coating repairs.
Storage
All bars for reinforcement and steel fabric reinforcement shall be stored on the site under cover
on timber or concrete supports suitably spaced and of sufficient height to keep the steel not less
than 150 mm clear of the ground.
Bending reinforcement
Steel reinforcement required to bent shall be bent cold and in such a manner and using plastic or
rubber coated formers that there is no direct steel/rebar contact and that neither bar nor coating
is in any way damaged, all in accordance with the recommendations of the coating factory and to
the approval of the Engineer. Standard radii shall be according to BS 4466 unless ordered
otherwise by the Engineer.
Potential gradient reinforcement
Potential gradient reinforcement shall be provided for the earthing of the base slabs, whenever
electro-mechanical equipment is installed.
The system shall comprise:
• copper tapes 40 mm x 3 mm as a closed ring into the outer foundations, plus a grid of
approximately 10/20 cm welded below the top reinforcement layer of the base slab.
• copper cables min. 70 mm2 connecting with the earthing network and leadouts at 0.70 m
above graded surface.
13.8 QA/QC
Trial mixes
Before concreting commences, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make trial mixes to
determine the mix proportions required to produce the strengths specified for each class of
concrete and for each degree of workability required to allow placing, transporting and compacting

of the concrete with the equipment he proposes to use in any particular situation. Only materials
which the Contractor intends to use for concreting (including all admixtures) shall be used in the
trial mixes. The trial mix shall be carried out under the actual site conditions and with actual
production equipment.
Test cubes from trial mixes shall be made and tested in accordance with BS 1881, Part 3 or DIN
1048, Part 2.
As per BS 5328, three separate batches of concrete shall be made workability of each batch
determined and three test cubes shall be made from each batch for each age (e.g. for 7 and 28
days) at which tests are required. The strength shall conform to target mean strength as per BS
5328,
- Requirements for designed mixes.
The appropriate strength requirements may be considered to be satisfied if none of the strengths
of the cubes is below the required characteristic strength and if the average strength of the nine
cubes is not less than recommended by BS 5328, trial mixes.
Quality and testing
No more than 5% of the test results my fall below the 28 day specified strength. Making and
curing of test specimens shall be in accordance with BS 1881 Parts 108, 109, 110 and 111.
All mixes can only be placed following approval by the Engineer. The mean strength shall exceed
the characteristic strength by a margin of 1.64 times the standards deviation expected from the
batching plant. However no standard deviation less than 3.5 Nmm2 shall be used as a basis for
designing a mix.
Production Trial
Production trials shall be made for The Engineer’s acceptance before any permanent works are
cast. They shall comprise a minimum of three separate castings, and they shall include at least
one trial with each relevant mix of grade A, B, and C. Each casting shall comprise at least 3 m3
concrete placed in a form with dimensions and reinforcement similar to the dimensions and
reinforcement in the structure to be built.
The production trials shall be done under site conditions with the actual planned production
equipment, including mixing and transport equipment and they shall mimic representative
structures for the most difficult placing and compaction. The time for placing, compaction, etc.
shall represent the expected longest concreting operation, including time between casting of
subsequent layers. If the Contractor intends to add plasticiser on site, this procedure shall be
included in the production trial.
The following shall be recorded:
• Complete batching and mixing record (weights, time, temperature of materials and
mix);
• Transport time to point of placement;
• Ambient temperature and fresh concrete temperature at point of placement;
• Complete placing and compaction record (equipment, time, fresh concrete temperature
at completion of finished surface)
After removal of form, the surface shall be inspected for honeycombs; three horizontal cores D =
150 mm shall be taken to a depth of minimum 300 mm at bottom, middle, and top of each
production trial.
The cores shall be inspected for pores and cavities, and shall be found to have no excess voidage
(BS 1881: part120: 1983).
The cores shall be prepared with a length/diameter ratio of 1.0 and crushed at 28 days. The
average core strength in the three samples shall not be less than the specified standard cube
strength x 0.7.
Trial mixes and field tests
Sufficient laboratory trial mixes shall be effected to show that concrete complies fully with
the specified performance criteria.
The following test are to be included:
• Bleeding (Non vibrated concrete) as per ASTM C232 < 0.5%

• Drying shrinkage (BRE Digest 357)
• Air content < 1%
• Slump : Piles 170 ± 25 mm, regular work 80 ± 20 mm.
• Fresh and hardened concrete densities.
• Absorption BS 1881 Part 122 (< 2%)
• Initial surface Absorption BS 1881 Part 5.
• Absorption (I.S.A.T.) 10 mins: 0.05 ml/m2/sec
30 mins: 0.02 ml/m2/sec
• Water Penetration DIN 1048 : < 5 mm (with microsilica)
< 50 mm (without microsilica)
• AASHTO T277 Rapid Chloride : <800 coulombs

• Field trial mixes are to be carried out under full-scale site conditions as per
BS 1881 (for structural concrete only).
• Where directed by the engineer, concrete incorporating re-enforcement details shall be
cored to assess stratification of mixes. Cores of 150 x 200 mm (Dia and length) are to be
used.
• Each trial mix shall have 9 x (150 x 150 mm) cubes taken to measure 24 hours/7 days
and 28 day compressive strengths. These trials shall be run for three consecutive days
(for structural concrete only).
• At least 3 x sets of field trials shall be tested according to the provisions laid down in
laboratory testing
• The average 28 day characteristic strength for trial mixes shall be higher by 10 N/mm2
than that for cubes taken in the field. Failure to comply shall result in the mix having to be
re-designed.
• All test results will have to comply before approval can be given.
Laboratory
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a field laboratory on the site and this laboratory shall
be available at all time to the Engineer.
The laboratory shall have qualified technicians to carry out all tests and shall be adequately
equipped to ensure that all necessary testing work can be carried out in compliance with the
standards.
Strength of concrete
Testing of fresh concrete by means of test cubes
All test cubes shall be made and tested for compressive strength in accordance with BS 1881 -
Method of testing concrete or DIN 1048, Part 1 - Test methods for concrete, fresh concrete,
hardened concrete as separately prepared test specimens.
The minimum required strength for different classes of concrete is as shown in clause "General
description and proportions and mixing" above.
The grade of concrete required will depend partly on the particular use and the characteristic
strength needed to provide the structure with adequate ultimate strength and partly on the
exposure conditions and the cover provided to any reinforcement.
A minimum of seven test cubes shall be made on each concreting day (from the same mix) and
for at least each 40 m3 of concrete mixed.
In addition, a minimum of 3 cubes for water permeability and 1 cube for chloride permeability shall
be made on each concreting day (from the same mix) and for at least each 40 m3 of concrete
mixed.
For columns, beams and cantilevers seven (7) cubes for every 15 m3 of concrete poured shall be
taken. The concrete for test samples shall be taken directly from the concrete mixer and shall be
handled (vibrated etc.) under similar conditions to those prevailing during the construction. The
molds for the test cubes shall be made of steel. Tests shall be carried out in an approved
laboratory.
The strength level of each type and strength of concrete will be evaluated separately and the
concrete strength will be considered satisfactory if:
• any individual strength test result as defined above is greater than 85% of the specific
minimum cube strength (characteristic strength)
• and the average strength of any group of three consecutive test cubes exceeds the
specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.5 times the current margin as per BS
5328.
If the results are less than those specified, the Engineer will suspend all concreting work and
order further tests. Any concrete found not to comply with the specification shall be broken out
and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in making, curing, delivering and testing of concrete
cubes.
Testing of concrete in structures
The types of tests described hereinafter are applicable to the finished parts of the structure. They
may be used in routine inspection and for quality control.
Type of tests:
• Cutting cores. The procedure used shall comply with the requirements of DIN 1048, Part
2 or an approved equivalent standard.
• Gamma radiography. The testing shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
of Part 3 of BS 4408 or equivalent.
• Ultrasonic test. Such tests may be used to obtain approximate indications of the strength
of the concrete in the structure (BS 4408, Part 5).
• Electromagnetic cover measuring devices. Such tests may be used to verify the position
of the reinforcement and shall be in accordance with the requirements of design (BS
4408, Part 1).
• Rebound hammer test. Such tests may be used to obtain approximate indications of the
strength of the concrete.
• Load tests of structures or parts of structures. If the results of the above mentioned check
tests show that the quality of the materials is inadequate or if other defects are revealed,
the Engineer may require a loading test to be made.
For the purpose of testing floors, roofs and similar structures and their supports, the test load shall
be equivalent to the sum of the characteristic dead load and one-and-a quarter times the
characteristic imposed load for which the works or part thereof to be tested have been designed.
Wherever certain procedures for testing of parts in structures (e.g. piles) are required by standards
or codes of practice, these are to be followed. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the
Engineer.
For a test on a floor, roof or similar construction the result shall be deemed to be satisfactory if
upon removal of the load the residual deflection does not exceed one-quarter of the maximum
deflection after maintaining the load in position for twenty-four hours. If the residual deflection
exceeds this amount, the test shall be repeated, and the result shall be deemed to be satisfactory
if the residual deflection after removal of the load for the second time does not exceed one-quarter
of the maximum deflection occurring during the second test.
If the result of the test is not satisfactory, the Engineer shall instruct that the part of the works
concerned be taken down or cut and reconstructed to comply with this specification. The
Contractor shall at his own cost take down or cut out and reconstruct the defective work.
The Engineer may require other tests to be made. Number of samples, tests and types will be as
per Engineer requirements.
All the costs for the above mentioned tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
Reinforcement – certificates
Each consignment of steel reinforcement shall be accompanied by a test certificate from the
manufacturer showing that the steel has been tested and analysed and the date of such tests and
analyses and that such tests and analyses comply in all respects with the standards.
The following tests shall be carried out on reinforcement
• Cast analysis BS 4449/4461

• Carbon equivalent value BS 4449/4461
• Tensile strength, yield stress, elongation BS 18
• Bend test BS 4449/4461
• Bond classification BS 4449/4461
• Chemical Analysis
At the same time the Contractor shall furnish written certification from the coating applicator that
the coated reinforcement bars were cleaned, coated and tested in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.
13.9 Acceptance
All acceptance tests and related activities shall be in accordance with relevant clause of this
specification

14 PRECAST CONCRETE
14.1 General
Precast panels and structural members shall be manufactured in an approved plant, under
controlled conditions of temperature and humidity. Manufacturing facilities, materials and
procedure shall be subject to inspection, approval or rejection by the Engineer prior to the
beginning of or during production. Structural design of precast members and anchorage shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
The design and manufacture of precast concrete components shall be in accordance with the
recommendations contained in BS 8110 or approved equivalent. Included in the lump sum are
the costs of molds, reinforcement, transportation, storing, replacement of damaged pieces and all
necessary fittings and embedded parts necessary for anchoring of units as well as erection.
Embedded parts for anchoring shall be of stainless steel.


Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified in 5.1.3.

Structural precast concrete
The possibility is allowed to the Contractor to use precast concrete elements, provided the
following requirements are met • concrete strength equivalent or superior to structural reinforced
concrete
• materials shall comply with BS and specifications of British Standard code of practice CP
116 and otherwise with the requirements of Clause "Concrete Works" above.
• all elements shall come from the same plant.
The Contractor shall mention in his bid the origin of the precast elements he will use during the
construction and references in similar works. The choice of the supplier shall be submitted to the
Engineer's approval.
Prestressed concrete shall not be used.
Exposed concrete panels
Concrete shall be composed of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate, water reducing

admixture and air-entraining admixture.
The design of concrete mixtures will be based on the watercement ratio necessary to secure
• a plastic workable mixture suitable for the specific conditions of placement

• when properly cured, a product having durability, impermeability and
strength, in accordance with the requirements of the structures covered by
these specifications.
Materials shall comply with the requirements of Clause “Concrete Works” above.

All materials and related works shall be in accordance with relevant clause of this specification.
14.6 Shop drawings

The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval, shop drawings showing in
detail, profiles, sections, jointing, cast-in items, reinforcing, anchorage and fastenings to be
employed in this work. The manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design of any
supplementary steel reinforcement required to withstand handling and erection stresses.
This reinforcement shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawings. Approval of shop drawings
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or liability for structural failures of fastening
devices supplied by him or for damage of any kind during handling and erection.

Samples
Three samples each showing texture and colour of proposed finish shall be submitted to the
Engineer. Samples submitted for approval shall be 12 cm thick by 60 cm square and shall be
labelled to indicate the name of the project, the Employer and the Manufacturer.

Fabrication
Casting forms shall be of rigid steel construction, designed to produce the shapes as detailed on
the drawings and approved on shop drawings.
Dimensional tolerances of fully cured panels shall not exceed the following
• Overall height or width plus or minus 3 mm

• Thickness plus or minus 3 mm

• Bow or warp 3 mm in 3.00m
with a maximum of 5 mm
in any plane
• Insert location plus or minus 3 mm .
Provide chamfered edges at all vertical joints as shown on the drawings. Also provide splays,
drips, reglets, pipe sleeves and other special shapes where necessary.
The Contractor shall place and secure in the forms all anchors, clips, inserts, reglets, lifting
devices, stud bolts, shear ties and other devices and accessories required for handling and
installing the units. All anchoring, fastening and lifting devices shall be securely welded to the
steel reinforcement in the precast units.
Provide all reglets to receive flashings, etc., dowels and splines, sill slots, goose-neck anchors,
anchor clips and anchor straps, sill clips, vertical slots at joints, and all accessories for a complete
installation. Complete panels shall be protected from drying and shall remain in the forms until
concrete has attained sufficient strength to permit handling of panels without damage.
Before placing concrete, care shall be taken to determine that all embedded items are firmly and
securely fastened in place as indicated on the drawings or required by the Engineer.
All embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign matter such as
loose coatings or rust, paint, and scale. The embedding of wood in concrete shall be avoided
unless specifically directed or authorised by the Engineer.
Repair and patching
Any concrete which is not formed as shown on the drawings, or for any reason, is out of alignment
or level, or shows a defective surface, shall be considered as not conforming with the intent of
these specifications and shall be removed from the job by the Contractor, at his expense, unless
the Engineer grants permission to patch the defective area, which shall be done in accordance
with the following procedure.
Permission to patch any such area shall not be considered a waiver of the Engineer’s right to
require complete removal of the defective work if the patching does not, in his opinion,
satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface.
After removing forms, all concrete surfaces shall be inspected and any voids, stone pockets or
other defective areas permitted by the Engineer to be patched shall be patched.
Where necessary defective areas shall be chipped away to a depth of not less than 2.5 cm, with
the edges perpendicular to the surface. The area to be patched and the surrounding area shall
be wetted to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar.
A grout of equal parts cement and sand, with sufficient water to produce a brushing consistency,
shall then be well brushed onto the surface followed immediately by the patching mortar.
Mortar shall only be used for smaller blow holes and not for major patch. For major patches
materials for repair shall be for approval by the engineer.

The patch shall be made of the same material and of approximately the same proportions as used
for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted. The mortar shall not be richer
than one part cement to 3 parts sand.
The amount of mixing water shall be as little as consistent with the requirements of handling and
placing.
The mortar shall be retempered without the addition of water by allowing it to stand for a period
of one hour during which time it shall be mixed occasionally with a trowel to prevent setting.
The mortar shall be thoroughly compacted into place and screeded off as to leave the patch
slightly higher than the surrounding surface. It shall then be left undisturbed for a period of one to
two hours to permit initial shrinkage before being finally finished.
The patch shall be finished in such a manner as to match the adjoining surface.
Concrete finish
The aspect of the architectural prefabricated elements shall conform to the sample of finish
selected and agreed upon by the Contractor and the Engineer.
All precast concrete faces shall be protected by epoxy coating (silane/siloxane type, which
consists of primer penetrating into the concrete and a compatible top coat).
After erection of these elements, the appearance of the whole shall be uniform as to shade and
colour. Elements shall have neither chips, cracks nor other defects. Elements not conforming to
these requirements will be removed and replaced without cost to the Employer.
Interior face of panels shall be left as cast, except that fins or ridges shall be removed and any
void or defects touched up to provide a smooth uniform surface.
Erection
Erection of precast panels shall be performed under the direct supervision of the manufacturer of
the panels.
Panels shall be handled, transported and stored in a vertical position. Setting and levelling devices
shall be as shown and approved on shop drawings and shall be completely concealed in the
finished installation.
Panels shall be set plumb along vertical edges and exterior faces with uniform horizontal and
vertical joints. Anchor shall be placed by bolting to inserts. All panels shall be carefully hoisted
into position by means of hoist bars to the anchor bolts. The panels shall be plumb and in true
alignment.
Levelling wedges shall be placed between the panels and grade beam.
Other precast concrete elements
The work consists of furnishing all design, materials and labour necessary for placing precast
concrete, mainly the precast concrete items specified in the particular requirements or evidently
required for the completion of all civil works.
Materials, labour and in any other respects the concrete itself will conform to clause “Concrete
works” above.
On removal of the molds the precast concrete units shall be examined and all surfaces that will
be permanently visible shall be fan faced, having a smooth and dense finish of uniform texture
free from holes, fins and shutter staining.
Storage and delivery
Precast units shall be handled, transported and stored in a manner to avoid undue strains, hair
cracking, staining or other damage. Damaged or defective units shall be repaired or replaced by
manufacturer at no additional cost to the Employer.
Units shall be delivered from plant to project site in accordance with schedule and proper setting
sequence.
Precast units shall be stored on clean blocking, off the ground and protected from dust, dirt and
other staining materials.
Precast duct covers
The covers shall be precast concrete slabs of appropriate length adapted to the culvert or duct
sizes. Their width shall be standardised to 40 cm.
Handling of covers hall be made with the "slot solution", i.e. without lifting eyes of reinforcing steel.
Two types are foreseen:
• reinforced concrete slabs in areas not accessible by trucks. The superior edges shall be
chamfered;
• reinforced concrete slabs for road crossings. In this case, the superior edges shall be
reinforced by angle irons. The slabs shall be able withstand an axle load (SWL 60) in
accordance with DIN 1072.

15 CONCRETE PIPES
15.1 General
The work to be performed under this heading consists of furnishing and installing precast
reinforced concrete pipes with all fittings and connections. Pipes shall be supplied from
manufacturers. The manufacturer shall furnish a certificate confirming that the pipes and all fittings
supplied comply with the requirements of the standards.


BS EN 1916 Concrete pipes and fittings, unreinforced, steel fibre and
reinforced
BS 5911 Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products
ASTM C 76 Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe
ASTM C 443 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and
Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets
15.5 Materials
The pipes shall be reinforced concrete pipes.
• Cement
shall comply with all requirements of CP 116.
• Aggregates
The coarse and fine aggregates shall comply with all the requirements of BS EN 12620.
• Reinforcement shall consist of rolled steel bars conforming to the requirement of BS 4449
and as specified under specification "Concrete Works”.
• Concrete strength shall not be less than 40 N/mm2.


Mixing
Concrete mixing and casting shall be as specified for the reinforced concrete. Concrete cubes
shall be taken, tested as specified before and according to the BS 1881 and BS 556 for water
absorption.
Molds and manufacture
The molds and method of manufacture shall be such that the form and dimensions of the finished
works are accurate. The surface and edges shall be clean and true, the ends are square with the
longitudinal axis and the concrete shall be dense and homogeneous.
Joints
The joints shall be of such design and the ends of the concrete pipe sections formed such that
when the sections are laid together, they will make a continuous line with a smooth interior free
from appreciable irregularities in the flow line. Joints shall be of bell and spigot type. Joints shall
be as per ASTM C 443 with flexible gasket.
Installation
Excavations, backfilling and protection shall be as specified. After the completion of work, the
Contractor shall backfill the excavated area and compact the fill to the original ground level.
• All pipes shall be examined for damage immediately before laying. All defective pipes
shall be immediately removed from the site, at the Contractor's expense. The pipes used
in the works shall be free from cracks and neatly finished at the ends.
• Unless otherwise specified, all pipes shall be laid on straight lines and at a uniform
gradient between the pits. Trenches shall be of such width as to enable the proper jointing
of the pipes and if necessary the excavation shall be enlarged at the sockets. For pipes
laid without concrete bedding, the trench bottom shall be excavated to a uniform gradient
30 cm below
the invert level and proper bedding material to be provided. The pipes shall be laid only in
dry trenches and shall be clean before laying.
• As far as applicable and directed by the Engineer, pressure test of drains shall be carried
out to ensure water- tightness before any protection is placed. The manholes shall be
tested separately as directed by the Engineer. Drainage and connections shall not leak
under normal operation.
15.7 QA/QC
Inspection
The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and finished pipe shall be subject to
inspection and approval by the Engineer before laying and the pipe shall be subject to rejection
on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements.
The pipes will be rejected if

• Cracks are passing through the wall

• Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding
• Surface defects indicating honey-combed or open texture
• Damaged or cracked ends where such damage would prevent making
satisfactory joints.
Marking
The date of casting shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe.
15.8 Acceptance

16 MASONRY, MORTAR, PLASTER

This specification covers the scope masonry, mortar and plaster works in accordance with clause
The scope of work covered by this division shall be deemed to comprise the supply and installation
of all brickwork and concrete blocks, solid partition walls shown on plans and as specified inclusive
mortar and plasterworks. It shall also include the supply of the appertaining materials and
structural parts, scaffolding, offloading on site and all operations in connection with masonry
works.
These specifications apply to all parts of the work in which plaster will be used. The work shall
include all necessary labour, materials, equipment and auxiliary works as required. Plaster shall
be applied in accordance with the finish schedule given on the drawings or specified elsewhere,
or as directed by the Engineer.


5.1.3.

Cement mortars
The sand used for mortars shall be clean and shall satisfy the requirements of clause "Materials
for concrete" above. Cement shall be Portland Cement and shall comply with clause "Cement" of
clause "Concrete works" above. Water shall comply with clause "Water" of clause "Concrete
works" above.
Mortar shall be composed of cement and sand, in accordance with "Property Specifications" of
ASTM C270 or with DIN 1996 and DIN 998. Volume of sand shall not be less than 2 1/4 times nor
more than three (3) times the volumes of cement when measured in a damp, loose condition. The
Contractor may be directed to establish exact proportions by laboratory tests.
Materials shall be thoroughly mixed, in such quantities only as can be used within 2 1/2 hours.
Use sufficient water as required for proper workability. Do not over wet. Mix with machine,
minimum mixing time 2 1/2 minutes. Small quantities may be mixed by hand.

Other mortars
The use of other mortars than cement mortars shall not be allowed unless prior approval of the
Engineer.
Mortar admixtures
Any admixture shall be proposed to the Engineer's approval. Admixtures shall comply with the
foregoing Standards. If no standard is applicable to the proposed admixture, the Engineer may
order trial mixes to verify the suitability of the admixture. The cost of these tests shall be borne by
the Contractor.
The use of chlorine based admixture is forbidden.
Masonry
Materials and structural parts which the Contractor shall supply and install shall be new and
unused. They shall comply with the regulations regarding quality and dimensions. Materials and
structural parts that are not standardised shall be used only with the approval of the Engineer.
The materials shall be protected from rain and extreme weather.
Unless otherwise ordered, concrete hollow blocks shall be used; in any case all closures, end
blocks such as at door jambs, window openings etc., and blocks of special length or size shall be
solid.
Blocks shall comply generally with BS 5628 (parts 1 to 3) ’Code of practice for use of masonry'
and shall be cast in an approved machine with concrete consisting of Portland cement and
suitably graded fine aggregate having a 5 mm maximum size. The water/cement ratio shall be
such as to allow the blocks to maintain their true size and shape on withdrawal from the machine.
The compressive strength of the blocks shall be that specified in Table 2 of BS 5628 – Part 1.
No block shall be set in place within 28 days of mixing. Blocks cast on any one day shall be stored
together in a group marked with the date of casting by a suitable notice.
Concrete hollow blocks shall be machine-made with concrete strength of as per Table 2 of the
BS 5628 – Part 1 to be used in partition or other non-load bearing walls. The blocks shall be
manufactured in an approved manner and shall be cured for a minimum period of 15 days and
left to dry for a minimum period of 30 days before being laid in position.
For fair faces block wall, both horizontal and vertical joints shall have struck pointed, finishes.
Curing of concrete block masonry walls shall be done for a minimum period of five (5) calendar
days.
No concrete block with defective or broken edges shall be laid in exposed work.
The size of concrete blocks shall be standard size as follows:

• length 40 cm ± 1%, height 20 cm ± 1% & width 10; 15, 20 or 30 cm ± 1% as required
External block walls of air conditioned rooms shall be double walls with insulation (20 cm - 5 cm
- 10 cm) and plaster and painting.
Anchors and ties
All anchors and ties to be used in masonry works shall be of heavily galvanized metal. Wire ties
shall be of not less than 3.2 mm thickness, looped on both ends, wire mesh ties of not less than
1.6 mm thickness and mesh 15 mm wide.
One tie shall be provided with each third course.
Wall ties shall be galvanized mild steel butterfly type conforming to BS EN 1243 Specification
Metal Tiesfor Cavity Wall Construction' and shall be of size 150 mm x 75 mm Wall ties shall be
used in all external cavity walls at centres not exceeding 450 mm in the vertical and 450 mm on
the horizontal and shall be staggered.
Wall lugs shall be provided at all junctions between blockwork walls and reinforced concrete
columns. Wall lugs shall be galvanized mild steel butterfly type lugs cast into reinforced concrete
columns and built into ends of exterior wall panels; they shall be spaced vertically at centres not
exceeding 450 mm.
Insulating and filling material
Where and whenever insulating and filling material shall be used, it shall not disintegrate, change
their structure or decay. These materials shall be capable of resisting insects and fungi and shall
not be easily inflammable or combustible.
Plaster
Binders of mortar shall be from factories which guarantee adequate quality control. The materials
shall be stored on Site, protected from rain and inclement weather and shall be shored off ground
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cost of covering materials shall be included in the lump
sum. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the Site.
Uniformity of the material shall be guaranteed.
Aggregates
The sand to be used shall be clean, well washed and free from deleterious matters.
The sand shall be guaranteed to produce a faultless plaster and shall comply with the relevant
standards as mentioned under Clause "Concrete Works” above.
The quality shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Water for plaster
Water shall be clean, free from harmful amounts of deleterious matter and dissolved salts.
Water shall comply with clause “Water” of Clause “Concrete works” here above.
Admixtures and colouring agents for plaster
If admixtures, sealing coats and the like are used or special processes or materials applied, the
maker's or supplier's instructions shall be strictly observed. Such instructions for application shall
become part of the contract upon approval of the Engineer.
Plaster lathwork
Wire netting, expanded metal and building steel lathwork shall be of commercial quality and of a
thickness suitable to the purpose. They shall be of non-corroding material and be suitable to meet
all stresses being imposed on them and excluding any undesirable movements.
16.5 Plaster Materials

Delivery and Storage - All plaster materials shall be delivered in the original sealed packages or
containers, bearing the names of the Manufacturer and the brand.
Lime putty shall be prepared from hydrated lime, lump quick-lime or pulverised quicklime
imported.
Hydrated lime shall be 92% hydrated, conforming to ASTM specifications C206, latest edition,
prepared in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed directions to form a putty, used
immediately after preparation of following a soaking period as recommended by the Manufacturer.
Pulverized quicklime ASTM specifications C5 slaked by sifting it into the amount of water called
for in the printed directions of the Manufacturer and allowing it to become cold before using.
Lump quicklime ASTM specifications C5 shall be slaked enough water to make a cream, run
through a No.8 (2,380 micron) sieve made of n° 16 gauge wire and stored with reasonable care
to prevent evaporation for not more than two weeks before using.
Finishing plaster shall be un-fibred mill prepared gypsum plaster.

Masonry
Masonry of any kind built of natural or artificial stones (also faced brickwork, sills, moldings,
copings and the like) shall be carried out in a workmanlike manner. It includes all anchors, damp-
proofing against rising moisture, ties, metal door frame-anchoring etc.
Masonry of all types shall be plumb, true to line and with courses level. All metal work required
shall be built in as the work progresses. Blocks shall be anchored to abutting concrete work with
dovetail metal straps for concrete. Blocks shall be wetted prior to being set into mortar.
Loadbearing and stiffening walls shall be built up simultaneously in bond. For other walls, hole
keys and projecting keys may be used only subject to the Engineer's consent. The masonry shall
be set in cement mortar as specified hereinafter.
All brick walls exposed to rising moisture from the ground shall be protected with a damp-proof
course at ground level. Properties of bricks below the damp-proof course shall be of a quality to
resist the particular requirements.
Inner walls exceeding 3 m of height shall receive flush coping by concrete beams, height min. 20
cm, width to be adapted to the wall. The coping shall be reinforced by use of four (4) steel bars
dia 12 mm and stirrups dia 6 mm every 25 cm.
If door or window openings need to be constructed in hollow block work, they have to be traced
by concrete columns and lintels properly sized and reinforced. No extra payment will be made for
this work.
Cavities shall be kept clear of mortar droppings by lifting boards. The Contractor shall make
provision for pockets and chases, etc., required in connection with plumbing, electrical and other
similar installations.
Fair faced blockwork shall be kept perfectly clean as the work proceeds and no rubbing down of
wall surfaces will be allowed.
The walls to be fair faced shall have the vertical joints and the horizontal joints struck pointed,
finished properly.
Horizontal damp-proof courses shall be provided beneath all blockwork walls and shall be bedded
on mortar. Vertical damp-proof courses shall be provided at all doors and window reveals.
The damp-proof course shall consist of aluminium cored bituminised hessian covered sheet
complying with the requirements of BS 743 'Materials for Damp- Proof Courses', BS 6398 and BS
8215.
All external masonry walls for air conditioned rooms shall be insulated sandwiched type masonry
wall.
Pointing
If masonry is to be pointed, the masonry mortar shall be raked out about 1 cm deep while it is still
fresh. Immediately before pointing, the faces shall be thoroughly wetted and cleaned with brush
and water. Except for natural stones, up to 2% hydrochloric acid may be added to the cleaning
water. The faces washed with water/acid mixture shall be rinsed thoroughly. The masonry shall
then be pointed with the specified mortar in the manner and colour stipulated.
Lintels
Openings in masonry walls shall be bridged by reinforced concrete lintels. Penetrations shall be
minimum 30 cm inside the walls.
Plastering

The composition of the plaster shall be suited to the purpose of the plastering, the suction
capacity, and the surface roughness of the plaster background and in the case of exterior plaster,
to the climate.
Prior to the start of his operations under this Article, the Contractor shall verify that all conditions
are suitable for the timely and effective carrying out of his work. In particular, the Contractor shall
verify that such conditions as the following do not exist
• Extensive unevenness
• Efflorescence
• Stress and settlement cracks over smooth surfaces
• Oily surfaces (e.g. through form oil).
The Contractor shall perform touching-up work after other trades have finished their works on
plastered surfaces or rooms. He shall repair cracks, marks and defects, irrespective of the cause
and leave all metal furring, lathing and plastering in first class conditions.
Preparation of surface for plaster
Masonry surfaces shall be prepared and cleaned by removing loose particles, dust adhering to
mortar, grease, oil, efflorescence and other foreign matters, and shall be wetted down before
plaster is applied.
Concrete surfaces shall be carefully roughened and cleaned with water under pressure.
A spatter dash treatment of one part of cement and two parts of coarse sand, mixed with sufficient
water to give a consistency of a thick slurry shall be dashed on to the dampened background with
either a trowel or a scoop to give a thin coating with a roughcast uneven appearance. To prevent
rapid loss of moisture the spatter dash shall be dampened periodically and then be permitted to
dry out slowly and harden before the application of the rendering.
Lathwork
Where a rendering or plaster is to be continuous across backgrounds of different types, a strip of

metal lath minimum 300 mm wide with an isolating membrane of polythene sheet or building paper
behind shall be fixed across the junction. Where small widths of one material less than 300 mm
wide are involved e.g. a concrete column, beam or slab dividing block panels, the width shall be
bridged completely and for a distance of 150 mm on both sides.
The metal lath shall be stretched taut and fixed along each edge at 100 mm centres using washers
and shot fired pins, nails or screws. The screws fixed into plugs in predrilled holes.
All cut edges of the metal lath and the fastenings shall receive a coating of bitumen solution.
Cement plaster
Surfaces of the walls shall be rendered prior to the floating coats. Surfaces to receive rendering
shall be thoroughly cleaned and dampened immediately before applying rendering in one coat.
The undercoat shall be left rough and open from the edge of the trowel, and after it has been left
long enough to set firm, it shall be combed with evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines. The lines
shall be approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep (less in the case of a first coat on metal
lathing).
The floating coat shall provide a true surface to receive the finish. The plaster shall be trowelled
on and all superfluous material stuck off with a long straight- edge.
The floating coat then receives a setting coat just before the plaster sets. It is polished to an even
surface with the trowel. The material for rendering and floating coat shall consist of the same
elements in the same proportion as mortar, exterior walls refer. For the setting coat the proportion
shall be 1:3.
The material shall be screened before mixing. Sand used shall comply with BS 1199 and 1200.
Mortar shall be mixed only in quantities for the work immediately in hand. Exposed edges shall
receive galvanized edge protection strip. Where suspended ceiling is required wall plaster shall
be carried out up to 10 cm above suspended ceiling level.
The minimum thickness of finished plaster shall be
• With exterior plastering 20 mm

• with interior plastering 15 mm
Mechanically applied plaster
Where plaster will be applied mechanically the first coat shall be 0.7 - 1 cm thick. Immediately
after setting, a finishing coat of approximately 1 cm thickness shall be applied by hand, smoothing
any irregularities and finally treated.
If wire mesh is required, it shall be adequately fixed to avoid movement when the pressure mortar
of the first coat is applied.
Plaster finish
Corners and edges including those at doors and windows shall be made sharp-edged, chamfered
or rounded according to requirements. Plaster stops shall be provided where necessary and all
exposed edges shall be protected by approved corner fillets up to 1.50 m above floor level.
Expansion joints of the structure shall be continued through the plaster in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions.
No working joints shall be visible in plaster surfaces.
Openings
Plaster around pipes and other structural parts which are installed prior to application of plaster
shall be neatly finished. Installed erection parts shall be carefully protected by suitable covers.
Pipe openings, recesses, ducts and the
like shall be suitably closed in order to avoid penetration by plaster mortar. Any soiled parts shall
be cleaned before the mortar has set.
Co-ordination of plaster work
Plaster work shall, after consultation with the Engineer and any erection Contractors involved, be
started and executed to ensure that construction and erection schedules will be met and mutual
obstructions avoided. The Engineer's instructions shall be carried out at all times.
16.7 QA/QC
Tests and properties
All materials shall comply with the relevant standards regarding quality, dimensions, strength, etc.
Selection of samples for testing material will be made by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
produce if requested by the Engineer test certificates from an independent authority or institute
testifying the quality of the materials.
The Contractor shall provide a specimen panel of fair faced blockwork for approval by the
Engineer. Thereafter all fair faced blockwork shall conform to this approved standard. Should any
fair faced blockwork fail to conform to the approved standard the Contractor shall render the
blockwork to the approval of the Engineer if so instructed by the Engineer.
Separate samples of each type of block taken at random from loads delivered, or at the block
yard, shall be deposited for approval by the Engineer. The Engineer will reject any load or part
load should there be found a block or blocks to be below the required strengths, uncured, under
or over the required size, damaged or to have any other defect which he may consider detrimental
to the work concerned.
16.8 Acceptance

17 STEEL WORK

This specification covers the scope of steel works in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this
specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional and complete in all
parts in accordance with this specification.

All work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements on the drawings, the relevant
British Standards or German Standards or approved equivalents and with the Engineer's
instructions. In the case of structural steelwork, care shall be taken that all parts in the assembly
fit accurately together and corresponding parts shall preferably be interchangeable.
Forcible correction to fit the members together will not be allowed.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the country of origin and manufacturer
of the steel he proposes to supply.
The Contractor has to design, prepare and submit the complete shop drawings to the Engineer
to get the approval before start of the fabrication.

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified in this
specification.
Structural steelwork and testing shall comply with the relevant clauses of the following Standards
(further standards are applicable as appropriate) unless otherwise specified:
American Standards:
A.I.S.C. Specification for the design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings
A.I.S.I. American Iron and Steel Institute
ASTM A36, A529 Structural carbon steel
ASTM A441, A572 High-strength low alloy steel
ASTM A242, A588 Corrosion resistant high-strength low alloy steel
ASTM A307 Common bolts and nuts

ASTM A325 High-strength bolts and nuts
A.W.S. D1.1 Structural welding code. Steel.
European Standards:
Eurocode 3 “Design of Steel Structures
Eurocode 4 “Design of Composite Steel and Concrete Structures”
British Standards:
BS 4 Structural steel sections
BS 5400 Steel girder bridges
BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building
BS 449 Part 2, the use of structural steel in building.
Add. No.1. the use of cold formed steel sections in building
C.P. 117 Composite construction in structural steel and concrete
BS 6399 Chapter V Loading
BS 3692 ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 419O ISO metric black hexagon bolts screws and nuts
BS 4395 High strength friction grip bolts
BS 4604 The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steelwork
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
BS 639 Covered electrodes for the manual metal arc welding of mild steel and medium tensile
steel
BS 709 Methods of testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel
BS 4479 Design of metal articles that are to be coated.
BS 4165 Electric wires and fluxes for the submerged arc welding of mild steel and medium carbon
steel.
BS 4570 Fusion welding of steel castings
BS 4360 Weldable structural steel
BS 5135 Metal-arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels.

BS 6323 Steel tubes for mechanical, structural and general engineering purposes
BS 5135 General requirements for metal-arc welding
German Standards:
DIN EN 10025 Steels for general structural purposes quality specifications
DIN 18800 Part 1 to 7 Steel structures, design and construction
DIN 18801 Structural steel in building; design and construction
DIN 18 335 Part C, Steel structural works; General technical specifications
DIN 4132 Craneways, steel support structures, principles of calculation,

structural design and execution
DIN 1910 Part 2, Welding of metals, processes
DIN 1912 Fusion welding and the relevant section standards regarding the clauses used.
17.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution.

General
The design and construction of steel structures shall be based on
• Eurocode 3, “Design of Steel Structures”

• Eurocode 4, “Design of Composite Steel and Concrete Structures” (DIN V ENV 1993-1-
1, DIN V ENV 1993-1-2, DIN V ENV 1994-1-1 and DIN V ENV 1994-1-2)
• or British Standards conform to these EUROCODES. Basis for the execution of all works
shall be DIN 18 800, “Structural Steel Work”
• Part 1: “Design and Construction”
• Part 2: “Analysis of Safety Against Buckling of Linear Members and Frames”
• Part 3: “Analysis of Safety Against Buckling of Plates”
• Part 4: “Analysis of Safety Against Buckling of Shells”
• Part 5: “Composite Structures”
• and Part 7: “Execution and Contractor’s Qualification”
Steel and steel properties shall comply with requirements of DIN EN 10 025, and DIN EN 10 027,
“Designation System for Steels” and the standards of the DIN 18 800 series. Reference Standards
indicated shall also be observed.
All steel shall be carefully stored and handled so that pieces are not subjected to excessive
stresses or damage.
The Contractor shall include for the preparation of all shop details by competent persons.
Every drawing shall show the number and sizes of all bolts, complete details of welds, type of
electrodes, welding procedure, and any other relevant information.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of his shop details and site connections.
The steelwork shall be manufactured by a specialist firm prior approved by the Engineer. As much
of the work of manufacturing of the steelwork as is reasonably and technically practicable shall
be executed in the manufacturer's works, and facilities for inspection by the Engineer shall be
provided.
All steelwork before and after manufacturing shall be smooth, undeformed, straight and free from
cracks, twist and burrs.
All steelwork shall be cut and fabricated to a tolerance of +1.5 mm in its length. Each plate shall
be truly at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the section. No work shall be painted, packed or
dispatched from the manufacturer's works until it has been tested, and complies with, or has been
certified to comply with, all the tests and requirements of the standard applicable to the material
specified and until it has been inspected and passed by the Engineer.
Pre-engineered steel structures – design loads
Pre-engineered steel structures shall be approved by the Employer’s Engineer. All pre-
engineered constructions shall be in accordance with the specification of steel works, especially
the description of material, etc.
17.5 Materials
General
As far as possible, standard profiles shall be used according to the static calculations.
If steel members like columns and beams should be oversized and coated with a corrosion
protection system instead of the galvanizing, the Contractor shall do a corrosion protection study
and calculation to work out the necessary over-sizing of the profiles.
The steel members shall be of hot rolled and not built-up sections for the main structures.
Minimum plate thickness for steel structures shall be 6 mm for webs and 8 mm for flanges
respectively.
FRP gratings and FRP chequered plates shall be used for slip resistance both in platforms and
stairs.
The following standards may further apply to Structural Steel Works:
DIN 4114 Steel structures,stability

15018 Cranes
4132 Cranerunways
BS 449 Structural steel inbuildings
5950 Structuraluseofsteel work inbuildings
4 Structural steel sections

WeldingshallbeinaccordancewithStructuralWeldingCodeofAmerican
WeldingSociety(AWSD1.1)ASTMA-325forhighstrengthfrictionboltsand
ASTMA-307forotherboltsmaybeconsidered.
For FRP grating DIN 24357-3 – Gratings used for Coverings – Parts 3 : Plastic gratings to be
used.
Steel Specifications
All miscellaneous steel shall conform to grade DIN EN 10 027 S 235 or equivalent standards as
BS, ASTM, JIS, etc. The following listing summarises material standards and specifications, as
well as minimum material requirements for design, manufacture and erection:
MEMBER STANDARD MATERIAL

Build-up DIN EN 10027-1 All steel brandsS235andS355
Members
FormerlyDIN FormerlySt, Ust &RSt37-2,St37-3,
17100andEN St52-3or Fe360B, BFU, BFN, C &DI,
10025 andFe510
Hot Rolled DIN 1024Series All steel brandsS235andS355
Members
DIN 1025Series
DIN 1026Series FormerlySt, Ust &RSt37-2,St37-3,
DIN 1027Series St52-3or Fe360B, BFU, BFN, C &DI,
andFe510
DIN 1028Series
DIN 1029Series
Tubes DIN EN 10210-1,2 S235andS355
Bolts and DIN ISO 898, DIN 4.6(fy ≥240N/mm²)5.6(fy≥300
Anchor Bolts 18800-1 N/mm²)
High DIN 32500,Part1 4.8(fy ≥320N/mm²)

Strength Bolts &DIN 18800-1
DIN 32500,Part3 St 37-3per DIN 17100, (fy≥350

&DIN 18800-1 N/mm²)
Corrosion protection and painting
Generally, the steel structures shall be coated with corrosion protection and painting as specified
in section 17.6 of this volume.
Galvanizing
Particularly, the following steel structures shall be hot dip galvanized and painted according to
relevant clauses in this specification.
• Structures with chemical exposure

• Structures with seawater exposure
The Contractor shall provide all technical information and a complete list of all parts to be
galvanized for the Engineer’s approval.
Steel shall be coated by the hot-dip process in molten zinc, producing a continuous coating of
uniform thickness as specified under specification “Corrosion Protection and Painting”.
Coating shall be of best commercial quality free from injurious; flux and uncoated spots, and such
quality as will endure, without penetration of the coating, not less than 4 immersions in copper
sulfate, conforming to ASTM A 239.
17.6 Execution/Workmanship
Tolerances
Care shall be taken to ensure that the tolerances specified on the drawings or the relevant
standards BS 449 Part 2 or DIN 18800 are worked to. The erection tolerance for cleated ends of
members connecting steel shall not be greater than 2 mm at each end.
Connections
Field connections shall be friction-type connections with ASTM A-325 or equivalent- bolting with
heavy hexagonal head bolts. Connections at building expansion joints shall be slotted with
shoulder bolts with locknuts. The slots shall be of sufficient length to permit movement of sliding,
member in both directions from the neutral position, of 25 mm.
Where no reactions or moments are called the connections for indicated sections shall be
designed with maximum number of fasteners of 7/8" (M22) minimum diameter. Beam
Connections of AISC Manual
Beam Connections of AISC Manual of Steel Construction or equivalent, unless governed by

material thickness or otherwise detailed on the drawings. No connections shall have less than two
bolts.
Diagonal bracing shall be properly drawn by shortening the member 1/16" every 10 ft. of member
length. The connections at end bracings shall develop the force due to the design load, but not
less than 50 percent of the effective strength of the member. If no load is indicated, the latter
condition shall govern.
In accordance with the structural design, the steel structure may be either a frame structure and/or
a braced structure. Following notes shall be considered during execution and erection of structural
steel works: 1. Co-ordination of the design of the structural steel members with the design of
related concrete structures
Checking of anchor bolts and their setting prior to casting pedestals/foundations
Complete erection of the steel structure in accordance with the approved erection drawings

The steel structures shall be fabricated in a workshop according to the approved shop drawings.
The size of construction members shall be of the maximum admissible size for the transport to
and handling at site. Fabricated steel structures shall be pre- assembled in the workshop to such
an extent to ensure proper field erection, and shall be dismantled (non welded/bolted members
only) for transportation, during which the Contractor shall reasonably protect the steel structure
from damages. The steel structure shall be suitable packed, covered or coated, and any damage
and corrosion during transportation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be
rectified to the satisfaction of Engineer.
Where possible, torque wrenches shall be used for tightening of bolt connections. Structural steel
members delivered to the site shall be evenly supported and stacked on timber to avoid
deformation.
Bolts, nuts, washers, rivets and other identical items of structural steel required to be incorporated
into concrete shall be delivered to the Site well in advance.
Bolts, pins, packings, tools, insulation material, electrical parts, motors, parts with electrical
devices, attached instruments, welding equipment and material, etc. shall be stored inside closed
stores.
All metal parts shall be interconnected to the Station earthing by an approved method in electrical
specifications.
Tolerances shall be kept in accordance with the relevant stipulation of DIN 18800 or BS 449 and
within the specified limits on the drawings.
Cutting
Cutting may be by shearing, cropping, sawing or machine flame cutting. Hand flame cutting is
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Cut edges on rolled products shall be given a finishing operation by a metal cutting method (e.g.
by planing, milling, grinding or filing). Notches and cracks are to be eliminated in the same way.
Small surface defects such as grooves and other types of unevenness may be removed by
grinding. The use of welding to fill in defects is generally not permitted.
Bolt holes
All holes are to be drilled and not punched after the members are assembled and tightly clamped
or bolted together. Punching may be permitted before assembly, provided the holes are punched
2 mm less in diameter that the required size and reamed after assembly to the full diameter. The
thickness of material punched shall not exceed 10 mm.
For tolerances the requirements of BS 449 Part 2 shall be observed.
Bolting
The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut at least three thread. Approved
high strength friction grip bolts, preferably the type with indicated load are to be used where
specified and are to be tightened strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
the pertaining regulations. The surfaces in contact shall not be painted and shall be free from oil,
dirt, loose rust, burrs and other defects which would prevent solid seating of the parts or interfere
with the development of friction between them.
When connections are made using high strength friction grip bolts the "provisional directions for
the calculation, execution and structural design of friction grip bolted fastenings (high strength
friction grip fastenings)" prepared by the German Committee for Steel Construction are to be
observed.
Bolts with nipped ends shall be used for RO structures and pipe rack structures to ensure
accuracy of torque.
Welding
The execution and testing of welding shall be in accordance with the following standards:
British Standards BS 5135 or German Standards DIN 18800 and DIN EN 10025. All welds, unless
otherwise stated are to be continuous minimum 6 mm fillet weld and shall be dressed smooth,
free from porosity, cracks, holes and finished to match adjacent surfaces. When welding
operations are completed, all welding flux shall be removed without delay. After welding, the
components shall possess the shape planned for them preferably without any subsequent
dressing. The cooling of welds shall not be accelerated by any special measures.
Site welding is to be restricted to the absolute minimum. The examination of welded work and the
inspection of welds during and after manufacture is to be carried out by responsible specialist
welding engineers. Welding shall be carried out by expert tradesmen and in strict accordance with
the current code of practice.
For the further processing of weatherproof structural steels, such as hot shaping, and for welding
and flame-cutting, the "Directions for the supply, working and application of weatherproof
structural steels - DA ST-Ri-007" shall be taken into account.
Welding on site will be allowed in exceptional circumstances with the permission of the Engineer.
Normally metal arc welding shall be carried out, and only if and where specifically permitted by
the Engineer, processes other than the metal arc process may be used for welding of structural
steel.
For site welding, all welders shall be obliged to pass qualification tests to determine their ability
to perform such type of work. They shall provide necessary certificate from specialised agencies.
For welding of any particular type of joint, welder shall be tested by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out X-ray tests for at least of 10% of all welds in general in presence
of the Engineer or by experienced representatives of a firm licensed for welding testing and
approved by the Engineer.
Painting
Surface treatment and painting before and after delivery to site shall be in accordance with the
clause “Corrosion Protection and Painting” of Clause "General" above.
Parts to be encased in concrete shall not be painted or oiled. Surfaces inaccessible after shop
assembly shall receive the full specified protective treatment before assembly.
Surface preparation and corrosion protection of all structural steel shall be carried out according
to as per the following “Corrosion Protection and Painting” specifications:
a) Surface preparation
In general, surfaces shall be cleaned prior to coating in accordance with SSPC -SP10/ ISO 8501-
1:1998 grade Sa 21/2. The surface profile shall not conflict with the paint manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Surfaces to be coated must be dry and free of all dirt, mildew, chalk, spent abrasive and any other
contaminant of foreign material that could inhibit adhesion.
b) Work process
- General
o Application Conditions:
The primer shall be applied to properly prepared surfaces only. The specifications of the coating
material manufacturers shall be observed. The accepted temperature shall be comprehended
between +5°C and +50°C and the relative humidity shall not exceed 85 %. The temperature of
the work piece shall be at least 3°C above dew point.
- Application Procedure
The primer shall be applied by means of brush or by spray. The top coats may be applied by
means of brush, roller or by spray. Please note that for roller or brush application of intermediate
and topcoats, the natural tendency to a more uneven paint film obtained by these methods shall
be encountered by more coats applied until the final DFT and hiding power is reached. Rollers for
roller applications shall be cleaned thoroughly and carefully so that the rollers do not slip or glide
due to too high internal friction. At points where coating application is interrupted, the individual
layers shall be adequately stepped to insure proper layer sequence when coating operations are
resumed.
- Touching Up
Before each layer is applied, previous coating shall be touched up where necessary by way of
rust removal and cleaning, according coating manufactures specifications. The final top coat shall
be reapplied completely if required.
- Bond Strength
The pull-off stress determined using the pull-off test method for adhesion shall be not less than
1,5 N/mm2, according ISO 4624.
c) Surface conditions of coating surfaces
The coating surface shall have a uniform film thickness, shade and gloss and shall be free from
inclusions, sags and wrinkles. The colors should be determined according to project specification.
d) Coating systems
- General Requirements for Coating Systems
Coating materials according ISO 12944 or SSPC shall be used. The materials shall be matched
with each other so that they are compatible. Coating systems deviating from this specification
shall be acceptable subject to approval.
Nominated Coating Suppliers products shall be used for large components, pipes, structural steel
and tanks, except standard coating products at works e.g.: components from PG factories and
serial standard coatings for valves, pumps, motors and electrical parts.
The color and gloss of top coats shall be in accordance with project color appearance list.
- Design
Specified coating systems are based to ISO 12944-5:2018 and SSPC Volume 2.
Environmental Zones, using following corrosive categories:
ISO 12944-5:2018:
o C3 "medium" for interior environment (i.e. production rooms with high humidity
and some air pollution; only fully enclosed facilities with no UV radiation)
o C4 "high" for exterior environment (i.e. industrial areas and coastal areas with
moderate salinity)
o C5-M/I "very high" for exterior environment (i.e. coastal and offshore areas with
high salinity / industrial areas with high humidity and aggressive atmosphere;
also only partial closed buildings where no full UV protection is provided)
o Im2 "sea or brackish water" (i.e. harbor areas with structures like sluice gates,
locks, jetties; offshore structures)
o Im3 "soil" (i.e. buried tanks, steel piles, steel pipes)
SSPC Volume 2 Environmental Zones
Environmental Zone Zone Conditions
Frequently wet by fresh water. Involves

2A
condensation, splash, spray or frequent immersion

Frequently wet by salt water. Involves

2B
condensation, splash, spray or frequent immersion
3A Chemical exposure, acidic (pH 2.0 to 5.0)
3B Chemical exposure, neutral (pH 5.0 to 10.0)
3C Chemical exposure, alkaline (pH 10.0 to 12.0)
The expected durability is high (i.e. >15 years) according ISO 12944-5:2018, whereas durability
is a technical consideration that can help the owner to set up a maintenance program.
For zinc rich primers, the minimum zinc dust pigment content of the non-volatile portion of the
paint shall be 80% by mass (m/m) according ISO 12944-5:2018.
e) Requirements on coated surfaces
- Resistances
Complete corrosion resistance under construction and service loadings in power plants shall be
ensured.
- Layer Thickness
The nominal dry film layer thicknesses required for the coating systems are specified in the
coating system data sheets.
Exception:
For aluminum/silicone systems, the layer thicknesses shall be to the manufacturer’s

specifications.
- Bond Strength
The pull-off stress determined using the pull-off test method for adhesion shall be not less than
1,5 N/mm2.
- Surface Condition
The surface shall exhibit uniform layer thickness, shade and gloss and shall be free from
inclusions, sags and wrinkles.
Coating System Data Sheets
Equipment/Environment Data Sheet No.

Structural Steel, Pipes, Supports and Components (Interior Places) INT_C3

– C3
Structural Steel, Pipes, Supports and Components (Exterior EXT/C4

Places) – C4
Structural Steel, Pipes, Supports and Components (Exterior EXT/C5-M(I)

Places) – C5-M(I)
Steel Tanks for Water Immersion IM-W
Steel Tanks for Caustic Immersion IM-C
Serial Components (Exterior Places) SER-EXT/C5-M(I)
Serial Components (Interior Places) SER-INT/C3
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, not insulated, Temperatures up to 200°C T1
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, not insulated, Temperatures between T2

200°C and 400°C
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, insulated, Temperatures up to 400°C T3
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, Temperatures between 400°C and 540°C T4
Coating of Hot Dip Galvanized Steel, Sheet Metal and Piping GALV-EXT/C5-M(I)
(Exterior Places)
Touch Up of Hot Dip Galvanized Surfaces GALV/REPAIR
Chemical Exposed Surfaces IM-CHEM
Insulated Parts, exposed to Condensing Water IM-COND
Water Exposure – Surfaces permanently or predominantly in IM-W/Im2

Contact with Water and Surfaces in Seawater Splash Zone Areas
Buried Steel Pipework (External Surfaces) IM-BUR/Im3
Components partly embedded in Concrete CONCRETE/C3
Cooling Water Pipes of Steel (Internal Surface) IM-PAB/Im2
Fuel Oil Storage Tanks OIL
Plastic Pipes (PVC-U, PP) PP/PVC
Rubber Lining RUBBER

Coating of Stainless Steel STAIN
Coating System Data Sheet No.: INT/C3
Structural Steel, Pipes, Supports and Components (Interior Places)
Environment:
Corrosion category: C3 ”medium” interior (i.e. production rooms with high humidity and some
air pollution)
Environmental zones: 1A (interior, normally dry),
2A (frequently wet by fresh water),
2B (frequently wet by salt water) and 3B (chemical neutral)
Durability:
The expected durability is high (i.e. >15 years).
Surface Preparation:
Blasting grade Sa 2½ / SSPC-SP10 with a surface profile equivalent to comparator Medium (G,S).
Surface Preparation for Touch Up:

Mechanical derusting (power tool cleaning) grade St3 / SSPC-SP3 for damaged surfaces and
weld seams.
Coating System (for Structural Steel, Pipes and Supports):

Coating Dry film thickness Paint type
Prime Coat 80 μm 3,2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer (a) or
two pack zinc rich epoxy primer (b)
Touch Up 80 μm 3,2 mils two pack epoxy primer
Top Coat 80 μm 3,2 mils two pack epoxy polyamid glossy according color
specification
(apply by mist coat-full coat technique)
Total System 160 μm 6,4 mils
Coating System Data Sheet No.: EXT/C4

Structural Steel, Pipes, Supports and Components (Exterior Places) – C4
Environment:
Corrosion category: C4 ”high” exterior (i.e. industrial areas and coastal areas with moderate
salinity)
Environmental zones: 1B (exterior,normally dry),2A(frequently wet by fresh water)
2B (frequently wet by salt water) and
3B (chemical neutral)
Durability:
The expected durability is high (i.e. >15 years).

weld seams.

Prime Coat 80 μm 3,2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer (a) or
two pack zinc rich epoxy primer (b)
(Sealer/Tie (25 μm) (1 mil) (if transportation and erection is done with the zinc
Coat) silicate prime coating)
Intermediate 110 μm 4,4 mils two pack epoxy polyamid

Coat
Top Coat 50 μm 2 mils two pack aliphatic polyurethane glossy according

color specification
Total System 240 μm 9,6 mils
Stripe coats shall be applied to all welds, edges, corners and all other areas where spray
application may be difficult. Prior to application refer technical and system data sheets.
Coating System Data Sheet No.: EXT/C5-M(I)

Structural Steel, Pipes, Supports and Components (Exterior Places) – C5-M(I)
Environment:
Corrosion category: C5-M ”very high” exterior (i.e. coastal and offshore areas with high salinity)
C5-I ”very high” exterior (i.e. industrial areas with high humidity and
aggressive atmosphere)
Environmental zones: 2A (frequently wet by fresh water),

2B (frequently wet by salt water)
3A, 3B and 3C (chemical, acidic, neutral alkaline)
Durability:
The expected durability is high (i.e. >15 years.

weld seams.

Prime Coat 80 μm 3,2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer
(Sealer/Tie Coat) (25 μm) (1 mil) (if transportation and erection is done with the
zinc silicate prime coating)
Intermediate Coat 190 μm 7.6 mils two pack epoxy polyamid
Top Coat 50 μm 2 mils two pack aliphatic polyurethane glossy according

color specification
Total System 320 μm 12.8 mils
Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-W

Steel Tanks for Water Immersion
Environment:
Corrosion category: Water immersion (Demi-, Firefighting-, Potable- and Raw-Water),
Temperatures up to 60°C, pH range 7 ± 2,5
Durability:
The expected durability is >15 years.
Coating System:
Holding Prime Coat 40 μm 1.6 mils if required for logistical reasons during
blasting
Top Coat 2 x 150 μm 2 x 6 mils
Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-C
Steel Tanks for Caustic Immersion
Environment:
Corrosion category: Caustic immersion (50% NaOH) up to 60°C
Durability:
Coating System:
Holding Prime Coat 40 μm 1.6 mils if required for logistical reasons

during blasting

Top Coat 2 x 150 μm 2 x 6 mils
Coating System Data Sheet No.: SER-EXT/C5-M(I)
Serial Components (Exterior Places)
Serial components such as motors, gearings, cubicles, etc. located indoors in C3 environment
will be left coated as manufactured in series.
Serial components located in C4 environment may be left coated as manufactured in series, if

reaching a total dryfilm thickness of 80-100 μm.
In particular cases components will have to be additionally coated at site with two component
systems as listed below (therefore the series coating systems have to be capable of being
additionally coated with two component systems).
Serial components located in C5-M(I) environment (acc. ISO 12944-2) must be additionally
coated at site with two component systems as listed below to reach a total dryfilmthickness of 320
μm (therefore the series coating systems have to be capable of being additionally coated with two
component systems).
If serial components are finish coated at works with powder coating systems as described below,
no additional coating at site is required.
Environment:
Corrosion category: C5-I ”very high” exterior (i.e. industrial areas with high humidity and
C5-M ”very high” exterior (i.e. coastal and offshore areas with high salinity
Durability:

weld seams.
Coating System for Serial Components finish coated at site:

Coating Dry film thickness Paint type application

Manufacturer’s 100 μm 4 mils Series coating shop
Standard
Touch Up 100 μm 4 mils two pack epoxy site
Prime Coat 80 μm 3,2 mils Barrier Coat site
Intermediate Coat 90 μm 3.6 mils two pack epoxy polyamid site
Top Coat 50 μm 2 mils two pack aliphatic polyurethane site

glossy according color specification
Coating System Data Sheet No.: SER-INT/C3
Serial Components (Interior Places)
Serial components such as motors, gearings, cubicles, etc. may be left coated as manufactured
in series, if reaching a total dryfilm thickness of 80-100 μm and being capable of being additionally
coated with two component systems.
Environment:
Corrosion category: C3 ”medium” interior (i.e. production rooms with high humidity and some air
pollution)
1A (interior, normally dry), 2A (frequently wet by fresh water),
2B (frequently wet by salt water
Durability:
Coating System:
Manufacturer’s See Product Identification

100 μm 4 mils shop
Standard

Coating System Data Sheet No.: T1
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, not insulated, Temperatures between 120°C and 200°C
Environment:
Corrosion category: continuous exposure to temperatures 120°C to 200°C
Durability:
Durability depends on additional environments.

weld seams
Coating System:
Prime Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer Shop
Touch Up 80 μm 3.2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer Site
Top Coat 2 x 20 μm 2 x 0,8 mils two layers of one pack silicone acrylic Site
according colour specification
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, not insulated, Temperatures between 200°C and 400°C
Environment:
Corrosion category: continuous exposure to temperatures 200°C to 400°C
Durability:
Durability depends on additional environments.


weld seams
Coating System:
Prime Coat 60 μm 2.4 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer Shop
Touch Up 60 μm 2.4 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer Site
Top Coat 2 x 20 μm 2 x 0,8 mils two layers of one pack silicone Site
aluminium
Total System 100 μm 4 mils
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, insulated, Temperatures up to 400°C
Environment:
Corrosion category: insulated, surface temperature up to 400°C
Durability:
(corrosion protection during transport and erection).
Coating System:
Prime Coat 25 μm 1 mils Weldable zinc ethyl silicate primer Shop
Ferrous Metal Surfaces, Temperatures between 400°C and 540°C
Insulated: High Pressure Pipes, Headers, insulated Boiler Parts, etc.

Not insulated: Finned Tubes, Heating Surfaces, Superheaters, not insulated Boiler Parts, etc.
Note: For heat exchanger surfaces a temporary coating for corrosion protection during
manufacturing, storage, transportation and erection has to be applied instead of below specified
primer.
Environment:
Corrosion category: surface temperature between 400°C and 590°C (corrosion protection
during transport and erection)
Durability:
The expected durability: for transport and erection.
Coating System:
Prime Coat 20 - 30 μm 1.2 mils Modified alkyd resins, red oxide Shop
pigmented with low condensate value
and based to health and safety
regulations
Coating System Data Sheet No.: GALV-EXT/C5-M/(I)
Coating of Hot Dip Galvanized Steel, Sheet Metal and Piping (Exterior Places)
For very high industrial and marine environments an additional coating system shall be applied.
Galvanized and Cr-Ni alloyed steels shall only be coated if especially agreed.
Galvanized cable trays and gratings will not be coated!
Environment:
C5-M ”very high” exterior (i.e. coastal and offshore areas with high salinity)
Environmental zones: 3A, 3B and 3C (chemical, acidic, neutral alkaline)
Durability:
Surface Preparation of Galvanized Surfaces:

Solvent cleaning and brush-off blast cleaning - reference Sa1 / SSPC-SP7.

weld seams.

Galvanized 80 μm 3.2 mils shop
Touch Up 80 μm 3.2 mils Zinc rich, repair of mechanical site

damages of the galvanized surface
Prime Coat 80 μm 3,2 mils two pack epoxy primer site
Intermediate Coat 110 μm 4.4 mils two pack epoxy site
Top Coat 50 μm 2 mils two pack aliphatic polyurethane site

glossy according colour specification
Coating System Data Sheet No.: GALV/REPAIR
Touch Up for Hot Dip Galvanized Surfaces
Touch up for damaged galvanized surfaces, not to be finish painted.
Environment:
Corrosion category: C4 ”high” interior (i.e. chemical plants, swimming pools, coastal ship and
boatyards)
C4 ”high” exterior (i.e. industrial areas and coastal areas with moderate
salinity)
Environmental zones: 1A (interior, normally dry), 2A (frequently wet by fresh water),

2B (frequently wet by salt water) and 3B (chemical neutral)
Durability:

Solvent cleaning according Standard reference SSPC-SP1 power tool cleaning according ISO
8501-1:1988 grade St3 / SSPC-SP3. Remove oil and loose rust.

Galvanized 80 μm 3.2 mils shop

Touch Up 80 μm 3.2 mils Zinc rich, repair of site

mechanical damages of
the galvanized surface
Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-CHEM
External Chemical Exposed Surfaces
For parts that are exposed to chemical environment during processing.
Environment:
Corrosion category: Chemical exposure 3A/3B, SSPC Volume 2
Durability:
Shopprimer:
A weldable zinc ethyl silicate shopprimer may be used as a temporary corrosion protection to
protect the steel during production/fabrication if required by logistical reasons. Dryfilmthickness
15-25 microns.

Prime Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer or two shop
pack zinc rich epoxy primer
Touch Up 80 μm 3.2 mils two pack epoxy primer Site/Shop
Intermediate Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils two pack epoxy-Polyamid Site/Shop
Top Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils two pack epoxy-glossy Site/Shop

Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-COND
Insulated Part, exposed to Condensing Water
For parts that are provided with insulation on site.
Environment:
Corrosion category: Condensation
Durability:
Shopprimer:
15-25 microns.

Prime Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer or two shop
pack epoxy primer
Touch Up
Top Coat 2 x 125 μm 2 x 5 mils two layers of two pack high

solids modified epoxy:
Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-W/Im2
Water Exposure - Surfaces permanently or predominantly in contact with water and surfaces
in seawater splash zone areas
Environment:
Corrosion category: Im2 ”sea or brackish water” (i.e. harbour areas with structures like sluice
gates, locks, jetties; offshore structures)
Environmental zones: 2C, 2D
Durability:


Top Coat 1 x 500 μm 1 x 20 mils two pack coal tar epoxy (alternatives to
coal tar are available => two pack high
solids modified epoxy)
Touch Up:
Touch Up after erection as required.
Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-BUR/Im3
Buried Steel Pipework (External Surface)
According to manufacturers standard with double wrap proprietary tape, or shrunk on

polyethylene or sleeve type wrapping or epoxy coating, additional fiber glass material according
manufacturers recommendation. The coatings are subject to prior approval.
Environment:
Corrosion category: Im3 ”soil” (i.e. buried tanks, steel piles, steel pipes)
Durability:
Shopprimer:
15-25 microns. Please Note: Shopprimer has to be removed before start of application of final
coating.

Coating Dry film thickness Paint type Application
Top Coat 1x800 μm 1 x 32 mils two pack high solids modified epoxy Site

Touch Up:
Touch Up after erection as required.
Coating System Data Sheet No.: CONCRETE/C3
Components partly embedded in Concrete, such as Anchorplates, Wallpipes, Frames etc.
Coating of areas which are not covered with concrete, including the zone of crossing (the prime
coat reaches at least 30 mm in the concrete).
Environment:
Corrosion category: C3 ”medium” interior (i.e. production rooms with high humidity and some
air pollution)
Environmental zones: 1A (interior, normally dry), 2A (frequently wet by fresh water),

2B (frequently wet by salt water
Durability:

Mechanical derusting (power tool cleaning) according ISO 8501-1:1988 grade St3 / SSPC-SP3
for damaged surfaces and weld seams.
Shopprimer:
15-25 microns.

Prime Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer shop
Touch Up 80 μm 3.2 mils two pack epoxy primer Site
two pack epoxy polyamid

glossy according colour
Top Coat 80 μm 3.2 mils Site
specification (apply by mist
coat-full coat technique)

Coating System Data Sheet No.: IM-PAB/Im2
Cooling Water Pipes of Steel (Internal Surface), PA-,PC-,PG-Systems
Environment:
Corrosion category: Im2 ”sea or brackish water” (i.e. harbour areas with structures like sluice
gates, locks, jetties; offshore structures)
Durability:
Touch up/Repair and Coating of weldseams at works/in the field:

According to manufacturers Methode Statement

Top Coat 1 x 500 μm 1 x 20 mils two pack high solids shop

modified epoxy
Coating System Data Sheet No.: OIL
Fuel Oil Storage Tanks – welded at site
Environment:
Corrosion category : fuel oil
Durability:
Surface Preparation :
Surface Preparation of Shopprimer surfaces at site:

Impurity Removal

Dust Blow off with dry clean compressed air or vacuum clean
Oils, Grease, Dirt Washing with a non-alkaline detergent, followed by

fresh water rinsing
Damages, Burns, Welding Seams, Blasting to Psa 2½ , or where this is not practical power
Markings, Corroded areas + tool cleaning to St 3
complete internal tank bottom
White rust (zinc salts) Entire areas sweep blasting
Coating System:
Shopprimer 25 μm for internal 1 mils weldable zinc ethyl silicate primer shop
plate surface
80 μm for external
plate surface 3 mils
Tank bottom:
for tank bottom and extending 2000 mm above from the tank bottom
Top Coat 2 x 150 μm 2 x 6 two pack epoxy mastic Site

mils
Total 300 μm 12 mils

System
Floating roof:
for floating-roof underside and 1000 mm below top most plates
Top Coat 2 x 150 μm 2 x 6 two pack epoxy mastic Site

mils
Total 300 μm 12 mils

System
Fixed roof:
for entire vapor space of fixed-roof tanks and extending 4000 mm down below tank top.
Top Coat 75 μm 3 mils zinc ethyl silicate primer Site

Underside of floor plates:

Primecoated plates (zinc ethyl silicate primer; DFT: 80μm) will be layed on bitumious sand.
Weldseams will not be painted.
Coating System Data Sheet No.: PP/PVC
Plastic Pipes (PVC-U, PP)
Environment:
Corrosion category: UV-Radiation
Durability:
Surfaces to be coated must be dry and free of all dirt, mildew, chalk, spent abrasive and any other
contaminant of foreign material that could inhibit adhesion. Physical abrasion of the surface is
required to guarantee a mechanical "key" for good adhesion of the prime coat (e.g. sandpaper –
120granulation).

Primer Coat 40μm 1,6 mils Two pack epoxy primer Site
Top Coat 50 μm 2 mils two pack aliphatic polyurethane Site

glossy
Remark: Not valid for plastic pipes made of Polyethylene (PE)!
Coating System Data Sheet No.: STAIN
Coating of Stainless Steel (Exterior Places)
For very high industrial and marine environments an additional coating system shall be applied.
Environment:
C5-M ”very high” exterior (i.e. coastal and offshore areas with high salinity
Environmental zones: 3A, 3B and 3C (chemical, acidic, neutral alkaline)
Durability:
Surface Preparation of Stainless Steel Surfaces:

Solvent cleaning acc. standard reference SSPC-SP1 and brush-off blast cleaning acc. ISO 8501-
1:1988 standard reference Sa1 / SSPC-SP7.
Mechanical derusting acc. ISO 8501-1:1988 grade St3 / SSPC-SP3 for damaged surfaces and
weld seams.

Primer Coat 40μm 1,6 mils Suitable adhesion primer Site
Top Coat 60 μm 2.4 mils Suitable top coat Site
Erection
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval a delivery and erection
schedule of all structural steel work on site. This schedule shall show the supply fabrication,
delivery, assembly, erection and painting of the steelwork.
The Contractor shall supply all suitable plant, hoisting gears and tackles for the erection of the
steelwork and shall provide all temporary tie ropes, struts, shores etc.
The suitability and capacity of all plant and major equipment used for erection shall be approved
by the Engineer.
Approval by the Engineer of any of the construction and erection methods or plant shall not in any
way relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities under the contract.
The positioning and levelling of all steelwork and the accurate placing of every part of the structure
shall be in accordance with the approved drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
During erection, the work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and if necessary
temporarily braced, so as to make adequate provision for all erection stresses and conditions.
Neither permanent bolting nor welding shall be done until proper alignment has been obtained.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary falsework and staging, tools, temporary connections,
erection plant, service bolts, nuts, washers, anchorage cables, bracing and all other materials
necessary to carry out the work and shall remove the same as the progress of the erection
permits.
Steelwork damaged due to inadequate precautions being taken during the storage, transport and
erection of the steelwork shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s
expense.
All shop connections shall be made by electric welding. All site connections shall be bolted unless
otherwise specified in drawings or by the Engineer.
Encased steelwork and steel in foundations shall be solidly encased in concrete, with a minimum
cover of 100 mm.
Footings
Foundation bolts and plates or steel stubs shall be provided for all columns and shall be firmly
keyed and grouted into concrete foundation blocks.
Erection shall include the setting of all columns and bases, and erection of all structural steel as
called for under the Contract for furnishing and delivery of structural steel.
The Contractor shall set column bases and beam plates on steel wedges or angle screeds, to
accurate elevations approximately 4 cm clear of masonry or concrete. Wooden wedges shall not
be used.
Anchor bolts and other identical items of structural steel required to be built into concrete with
instructions and/or templates for their installation shall be delivered to the respective trades in
proper time to avoid delay in the work. The structural steel erector shall verify the position of
anchor bolts before concrete is poured.
All anchor bolts shall be placed to be clear from encroachment of rebars provided in the pedestal
in both directions.
Levelling of base plates shall be by means of levelling screws. Setting procedures shall be as
Shims for columns base plates, equipment base and at any other locations shall only be of
noncorrosive material, in case of dissimilar metal to galvanized base plate, suitable protection
shall be provided. No carbon steel or other corrosive metal embodiments are permitted.
Grouting shall be in accordance with Clause “Concrete Work” of this Specification.
Aligning and Plumbing
The Contractor shall provide all necessary guys and braces to insure the alignment and stability
of the structural steel members until all are properly connected and riveted. All temporary guys
and bracings shall take care of all dead load, wind load, seismic load and erection stresses, and
shall remain in place until, in the opinion of the Engineer they can be removed without danger to
the stability of the structure.
After erection, no column shall have a deviation from the vertical exceeding 1 to 1000 of the total
height of the column.
Approved steel gauges of the stud type shall be provided to enable the Engineer to carry out such
checking of members as he may consider necessary.
Correction of Errors
Correction of minor misfits and a reasonable amount of reaming and cuttingof excess stock from
rivets will be considered as a legitimate part of erection. Any error that may occur in shop work
which prevent the proper assembling and fitting of parts by moderate use of drift pins, or a
moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping or cutting shall immediately be called to the
attention of the Engineer and approval of the method or procedure of correction shall be obtained
or such method or procedure shall not be employed. The use of cutting torches to enlarge or
alter bolt or rivet holes shall be prohibited.
Rejection
Any steelwork which in the opinion of the Engineer is not in accordance with the requirements of
the Standards or with the Specification, shall be mandatorily rejected and removed from the site
at the Contractor’s expense.
17.7 Tests
The manufacturer’s test certificate for all steelwork shall be supplied to the Employer / Engineer.
The certificates shall state the manufacturing process and shall include a test sheet giving the
results of the mechanical tests and the chemical composition. The Contractor shall provide free
of charge any supplementary tests reasonably required by the Employer / Engineer. The samples
shall be tested at an independent testing station in accordance with BS 5400 - BS 4872 or DIN
EN 10025, DIN 18800 and DIN 18801. If the results
of the tests are unsatisfactory the whole quantity of steel which the sample represents shall be
rejected at the expense of the Contractor. No steelwork shall be delivered from the manufacturer’s
works until it has been tested and the results comply with the requirements of the relevant BS or
DIN. The Engineer shall at all reasonable time have free access to the manufacturer’s works for
inspection during all phases of the execution works. The Contractor shall supply free of charge
all labour and tools required in connection with the inspection and testing of the steelwork.
Apparatus, equipment and tools required for testing (e.g. for X-rays) shall be part of the scope of
supply, with following tests at least required for welds:
• X-ray tests for each heavy load bearing structure member: min. for 20% of all welds
• Also refer to other clauses of this specification for welding and in general for testing, the
most stringent of which shall apply.
17.8 Acceptance
All acceptance tests and related activities shall be in accordance with relevant clauses in this
specification.
17.9 SMALL NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL PARTS

17.9.1 General
This sub-clause refers to the specification covering the provision of all materials and labour in
relation to the supply, manufacture, on site of articles made of steel or cast iron. All steel structures
and parts specified under this sub-clause shall be hot dip galvanized and painted or stainless
steel according to clause “Corrosion protection and painting" of Clause "General" above.
The list of small items to be furnished shall contain but not be limited to the following:
• Steel sections, bent plate sections and square bars for construction of:
• structural steel stairs, platforms and walkways,
• railing for stairs, platforms, walkways and protection around floor
openings,
• corner and edge protection for concrete steps and concrete,
• support of any equipment foundation,
• joint covers,
• anchors, ties, hangers, inserts, slots, embedded steel parts, etc.
• steel pipes and plain round bars for making guard rails and ladders
• Steel plates, chequered and/or flat, for fabrication of removable covers which are not
subjected to heavy loading.
• Open grating for steps, platforms, walkways should be steel.
17.9.2 Design/Engineering
All works shall be in accordance of 5.1.2 of this specification.
Special requirements
The dimensions of steel parts, etc., shall be as shown in the drawings or as specified by the
Engineer.
17.9.3 Codes and Standards
All works shall be in accordance of with “Steel Works” of this specification.
17.9.4 Design Criteria
All works shall be in accordance of “Steel Works” of this specification.
Steel sections and plates
Epoxy Coated Steel sections may be required in various standard profiles and shall comply with
the relevant standards specified herein. In general, these sections shall be straight, with exact
measurements and made of mild steel as described under clause "Structural Steel" above.

Where required, mild steel plates shall be bent to special profile forms. These bent plates shall
be used particularly on stairs, and also on doors and window frames.
It shall be possible to bend a strip of the plate, when cold, to an angle of 180° around a bar the
diameter of which is equal to the thickness of the plate, without causing any fracture.
All necessary care and precautions shall be taken in shipping, transporting and erection of all
metalwork to avoid damage to the priming and finishing paintwork. Surface treatment and painting
before and after delivery to site shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under
clause 1.1.25 “Corrosion Protection and Painting” of Clause "General" above.
Codes and standards
BS EN ISO 14122-3 – Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery Part 3 :

Stairways, stepladders and guard-rails
EN 14122-4 – Safety of Machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery Part 4 : Fixed

ladders
BS 5395-3 – Stairs, ladders and walkways
BS 6180 – Barriers in and about buildings – code of practice – Plastic materials and laminates
sheets
BS 4592-4 – Specification for glass reinforced plastics open bar gratings
BS 4592-5 – Specification for solid plates in steel, aluminium and glass

reinforced plastics
Duct covers
Where duct runs are required in concrete, properly designed duct covers are to be used. Duct
covers shall have securely fixed kerbs with lugs for building into the concrete. The covers shall
have a minimum load-carrying capacity of 500 kg/m2 and shall be capable of supporting the loads
of adjoining machinery or traffic. The covers shall have properly shaped and formed keyholes for
lifting and shall be divided into convenient lengths for handling without damage. The top of the
covers shall be flush with the finished surface of the floor.
Rails for track
All steel sections for rails and tracks shall be of an approved type, obtained from an approved
manufacturer to meet the performance requirements stipulated in this specification clause.
When rails for track of the travelling cranes are to be provided with a normal or special steel
profile, the requirements of DIN 15 049, DIN 15 050, DIN 15 070,
DIN 5902 sheet 1, DIN 5901 sheet 1 and 5 - 36 shall be observed.
Metal parts embedded in concrete
The embedded items (anchor bolts, fixing elements, etc.) for outside conditions and for inside
conditions with seawater wetting, chemicals, etc. shall be of stainless steel (material No. 316 Ti
conforming to AiSi). The embedded items for inside conditions (without corrosive limate) shall be
epoxy painted in addition.
All anchor bolts shall have a concrete cover of at least 10 cm.
Heavy Duty GRP Grating
All grating indicated as removable shall be bolted or clipped to supports. Sizes of grating shall be
such as to afford easy handling. The Contractor shall cut, as shown on all certified drawings, neat,
circular or square openings for the passage of pipes, ducts, etc., through gratings. The Contractor
shall provide toe plates at all unprotected open sides at ends of grating and where shown on
drawings and the Contractor shall weld bands made of steel plate matching the toe plate height
at all openings.
Ladders
Ladders shall be all epoxy coated steel with epoxy coating and with SS316L fasteners. A small
landing shall be introduced where height of the ladder is more than 5.0 meter. For height more
than 10.0 meter vertical ladders shall be avoided. Instead epoxy coated steel frame stairs with
epoxy coated steel gratings shall be provided.
Ladders shall be provided by the Contractor all to heights and accesses as required in the design,
e.g. to reach roofs, basements, emergency exits, etc.
Ladders shall be securely fastened at top and bottom into the wall and shall have intermediate
clips or flats and fastenings spaced not more than 2.0 m apart. Clips or flats shall be riveted or
welded to the side.
Ladders shall be constructed staggered with landings at every 10m in height. Ladders exceeding
2.5 m length shall be equipped with safety cages starting
2.50 m above ground or floor, and extending over the full height of the stringers with an
unobstructed inside diameter of at least 0.7 m.
The safety cage shall be constructed.
Epoxy Coated Steel Stairs
Epoxy coated steel stairs shall have an inclination not exceeding 45° to the horizontal.
Epoxy Coated Steel pipe railing
Steel pipe railing shall always be installed on both sides of all walkways, stairs and platforms, and
shall be made of epoxy coated steel pipes of suitable internal diameter and suitable thickness.
The top rail shall be at a height of not less than 1100 mm from the walkway or platform level. Rails
over stairs shall have the top level at a height of 900 mm above the nose of the tread. Two
intermediate rails shall be installed between the top rail and the toe plate or channel. A pattern of
symmetry shall be accomplished when locating pipe posts and the distance between pipe posts
shall not exceed 1200 mm.
Exposed bottom ends of pipe posts shall be closed where required.
Wall pipe and handrail shall be returned to a wall and be provided with necessary secure anchors.
The Contractor shall provide necessary handrail brackets of malleable iron and anchors. All
accessories such as floor flanges, etc., required for pipe railing shall be furnished.
All handrailings shall be continued to the end vertical posts with smooth curvature to prevent
accidents.
All components of the railing system shall be epoxy coated steel.
17.9.5 Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling)
The requirements for materials specified herein are applicable to all epoxy coated steel sections,
bars, plates, pipes and any sections as far as their quality, source, dimensions, mechanical
characteristics and their delivery, handling, storage and tests on site are concerned.
17.9.6 Execution (Assembling, Installation)
The execution of all works to be done shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of this
specification.
17.9.7 QA/QC
this specification.
17.9.8 Acceptance
specification.

18 WATER PROOFING
18.1 General
This specification covers the scope of water proofing systems in accordance with clause 5.1
“General” of this specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional and
complete in all parts in accordance with this specification.
The scope of work covered by this specification comprises damp-proofing against non-
pressurised water, damp-proofing against lateral and rising moisture, damp-proofing against
seepage water, surface water and the like in the open air and indoors.
Furthermore, it comprises damp-proofing against pressurised water by means of bituminous

damp-proofing and unbacked felts against water under hydrostatic pressure (e.g. ground water,
pocketed water etc.)


5.1.3.
All materials to be supplied and installed shall be in accordance with the applicable Standard
acceptable for the Engineer.

5.1.4.

Materials
The Contractor shall furnish an approved manufacturer’s surety bond on all water proofing
material covering a period of ten (10) years.
All bituminous materials shall conform at minimum in its quality to one of the following Standards

BS EN 13707
ASTM, D 1079, D 1327
DIN 18195, 52123, EN 13707, 52129, latest editions or approved equivalent.
Undercoating materials
Bituminous solution: Bitumen content 30 to 45% by weight; softening point of the solid not less
than 115°C.
Bituminous emulsion: Bitumen content not less than 30% by weight; softening point of the solid
not less than 45°C.
Top-coating materials to be worked cold
Bituminous solution without filler Bitumen content not less than 50% by weight; softening point of
the solid not less than 60°C.
Bituminous solution with filler Bitumen content not less than 30% by weight; softening point of the
solid not less than 60°C.
Bituminous emulsion without filler Bitumen content not less than 45% by weight; softening point
of the solid not less than 45°C.
Bituminous emulsion with filler Bitumen content not less than 30% by weight; softening point of
the solid not less than 50°C.
Top-coating materials to be worked hot
Bitumen without filler: Softening point of the bitumen without filler not less than 115°C.
Bitumen with filler: Bitumen content not less than 54% by weight, softening point of the bitumen
with filler not less than 115°C.
Bituminous felts, factory-finished
Bitumen felts, factory-finished, shall consist of an inlay and outer layers which are applied to both
sides of the inlay; the outer layers shall be sprinkled with fine sand. Softening point of the outer
layers 55 to 90°C.
The inlay and the outer layers shall be closely bonded to each other. The sanding of the outer
layers shall adhere well.
Impregnated inlays shall not have visibly unimpregnated places; woven glass inlays in building
paper are accepted.
The bituminous felts shall be waterproof. It shall lie flat on an even bed and shall not have any
unevenness (e.g. bulges, depressions). It shall have a regular surface and thickness and be free
from faults such as cracks, folds, etc.
Bituminous felts with an inlay of impregnated 500 g/m² crude felt, with bitumen outer layers on
both sides, shall have a thickness not less than 3.5 mm. Longitudinal and transverse breaking
strength (breaking load), not less than 300N. Longitudinal and transverse ductility, not less than
2%.
Bituminous felts with an inlay of impregnated 300 g/m² jute fabric, with bitumen outer layers on
both sides shall have a thickness not less than 3 mm. Longitudinal and transverse breaking
strength (breaking load), not less than 600 N. Longitudinal and transverse ductility, not less than
5%.
Bituminous felts with an inlay of impregnated 300 g/m² woven fibre glass shall have bitumen outer
layers on both sides.
Bituminous felts with an inlay of 0.1 mm thick copper foil with bitumen outer layers on both sides
shall have a thickness not less than 3 mm. Longitudinal and transverse breaking strength
(breaking load), not less than 500 N. Longitudinal and transverse ductility, not less than 5%.

General
Before commencement of carrying out the work specified under this specification, the Contractor
shall verify that all conditions are suitable for a timely and effective performance of his work. In
particular, the Contractor shall verify that such conditions as the following do not exist
• Extensive unevenness of the bed

• Too rough, too porous, too smooth surfaces
• Sharp edges of boarding and ridges
• Incorrect level of the surface of the bed
• Unrounded corners, edges and channelling
• Stress and settlement cracks, holes
• Too moist surfaces
• Oily surfaces, paint residue
• Unsuitable type or position of penetrating structural members.
Horizontal and slightly inclined damp-proofing (with the exception of horizontal damp-proofing in
walls and damp-proofing with water-repellent mortar) shall be given a protective covering at once
e.g. a thick covering of concrete. Sharply inclined and vertical damp-proofing shall also be given
a protective covering immediately if the damp-proofing has to be secured or there is a risk of
damage.
Water-proofing of walls against moisture
Water-proofing with felt shall be carried out with two layers of 500 g/m² bituminized roofing felt.
The felt layers shall not be bonded either to the bed or to one another. Each layer shall overlap
by not less than 10 cm.
Water-proofing with thermoplastic sheeting shall be carried out with one layer of plastic sheeting,
unless stated to the contrary in the specifications. The lengths shall overlap 5 cm at the joints.

They shall be sealed together by solution welding, unless otherwise specified.
Water-proofing against moisture
Damp-proofing with bituminized coatings shall be carried out with an undercoat and top coat.
An undercoating substance which has to be worked cold shall be used. The undercoat shall be
applied as a single coat. It shall be completely dry throughout before carrying out further damp-
proofing operations.
Three top coatings with a bituminous solution without filler to be worked cold shall be applied as
cold flow top coats.
Special water-proof lining
The lining shall be used in all premises subject to water percolation. It shall be applied on a flat
finished screed or on cement plastered walls. The horizontal and vertical faces may be tiled or
painted as otherwise specified. The lining shall resist aggressive water, shall be waterproof,
resistant to impact and abrasion.
Materials
Two component product:
• Synthetic resin in emulsion

• Cement
The materials shall be ready mixed and delivered to the site in Manufacturer's sealed containers.
These containers shall be labelled by the Manufacturer, showing the manufacturer's name, mixing
directions, basic formulation and type.
Application
The substrata shall first be adequately finished and the defects corrected. Dust shall be removed.
The execution shall be carried out in strict conformity with the manufacturer's instructions. All
angles shall be chamfered (5 cm) during application. Water tightness at the pipe crossing shall
be achieved by special sleeves to be connected to the lining. The lining shall be perfectly surfaced,
smooth without edges or fins.
Water-proofing against seepage water and surface water
Water-proofing with felt shall be carried out with a prime coat and two courses of unbacked felt.
Unbacked 500 g/m² bituminized felt shall be employed if no other quality is specified.
Not less than 1.0 kg of adhesive per square meter shall be applied for the adhesive coatings and
the top coating.
Water-proofing against water with pressure effects
General
On completion of any layer of water-proofing, the Contractor shall carefully inspect it for defects;
any defects found shall be immediately rectified. If the next layer (protective layer, concrete or
brickwork) is not applied directly after the damp-proofing. The Contractor shall repeat his
investigation of the water- proofing immediately before application of the next layer and shall
eliminate any defects.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in due time of inspections to be carried out in order to
give him the opportunity of participating at such examinations.
The Contractor shall protect the water-proofing courses against sun and against harmful
overheating and any other type of damage until such time as the next layer (protective layer,
concrete or brickwork) is applied.
Connection of the water-proofing to penetrations
The connections shall be made with the use of fixed flanges (build-in steel flanges) and loose
flanges.
The connecting elements (fixed flanges and loose flanges) shall be cleaned and removed of rust
and dirt. The points which are in contact with the water- proofing shall have a prime coat applied
to them immediately after cleaning.
Bonding shall not be carried out on top of fixed flanges, and loose flanges shall not be tightened
until the undercoat has dried thoroughly and contains no more solvent. The undercoat on fixed
flanges shall be free from moisture before bonding on top of it; if necessary, special precautions
shall be taken to dry it immediately beforehand.
In the region of fixed flanges the water-proofing shall be reinforced by way of applying an
additional layer of unbacked felt extending at least 30 cm beyond the flanges in all directions. In
the region of the fixed flanges, the individual layers shall meet with butt joints; the joints in the
individual layers shall be staggered relative to each other.
The water-proofing shall be clamped between the fixed flanges and the loose flanges.
Water-proofing over construction joints
Water-proofing over structural joints shall be reinforced unless otherwise specified.
Water proofing over structural joints intended to allow for the contraction the expansion of
structural members shall be reinforced by putting in the cup- fluted copper strip 0.2 mm thick. The
copper strip shall be bonded.
Water-proofing over structural joints intended to allow for differential vertical movements of
adjoining structural members up to a differential settlement of 1 cm shall be carried out as above.
If settling differentials of more than 1 cm are to be allowed for the water-proofing shall be carried
out in such a manner that the more stringent conditions involved shall be satisfied.
Water-proofing over structural joints intended to allow for movements resulting from temperature
changes, vibration, torsion etc. shall be carried out in such a way that both type and extent of the
expected movements will be satisfied without damaging effects to the water-proofing.
Sealing joints in the protective layers

Joints in the protective layers applied onto water-proofing of floors and slabs shall be raked out
without damaging the damp-proofing and completely filled with hot-flow bitumen sealing
compound.
18.7 QA/QC
Selection of samples for testing material will be made by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prior to use of any type of sealing materials, submit samples to the Engineer
for approval with certificates from an independent authority or institute testifying the conformance
of the materials with the Standards and specified qualities of this technical specifications.
18.8 Acceptance
specification.

19 ROOFING

This specification covers the scope of roofing systems in accordance with relevant clause of
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labour, materials and carry out all operations in connection
with the installation of all rigid insulation, built-up roofing and plastic flashings as shown on
drawings and as specified.
Rigid insulation and asphalt built-up roofing shall be applied to the roof surfaces indicated. Roofing
operations shall be coordinated with sheet metalwork so that flashings are installed to permit
continuous roof surfacing operations. The roofing or flashing shall be applied to a smooth and
firm surface free from moisture, dirt, projections, and foreign materials. Vents and other items
penetrating the roof shall be secured in position and properly prepared for flashing. Surfaces shall
be inspected and approved immediately prior to application of roofing and flashings. Roofing
materials shall be stored in an approved manner and shall be protected from contact with soil and
exposure to the elements.
Rain water shall be discharged via gutters and downpipes into the storm water drain pipes into
the drain pit connected to the storm water drain system


5.1.3.
Roofing felts shall comply with DIN 18 190, 52 117, 52 118, 52 123, 52 128
and 52 129.
Roof sheeting and plastics sheeting shall comply with DIN 16 935, 16 937 and 16 938.
Insulating materials
Fibre insulating materials and expanded plastics shall conform to DIN 18 165.

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified in this

specification

Materials shall be protected from damage and from exposure to sun, weather and dampness
during transit and after delivery to the site. Damaged or damp material shall not be installed in the
work.

All execution works shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification.
Application of roofing
The entire roofing system, including cement tile surfacing, shall be finished in one operation up to
the line of termination and of day's work. Phased construction will not be permitted. Temperature
of bitumen at the time it is applied shall be in accordance with the roofing felt manufacturers’
recommendations. Layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles or buckles at right angles to the
slope of the deck. To insure a waterproof membrane, care shall be taken to preclude bare spots
between plies. To prevent slippage, care shall be taken to preclude use of an excessive amount
of bitumen. Bitumen shall uniformly cover all roof areas to be mapped to provide an effective
bond. Each course of roofing felts shall be lapped as specified in Table I. The surface of the felts
shall be carefully broomed-in with 45 or 50 cm wide, soft- fibre-type floor broom to obtain complete
adhesion between plies and to eliminate air pockets.
LayerofPlies Laps incm Startingwidths incm

91cmwidth 91cmonwards
1 10cm 91cm
2 48cm 45and91cm
Each layer of roofing felt shall be carried up abutting vertical surfaces.
Table 1 - Laps for roofing felts
End laps of roofing felts shall be not less than 15 cm and shall be staggered a minimum of 30 cm.
Water cut-offs
At end of day’s work, and whenever precipitation is imminent, exposed insulation shall be
protected with two full width strips of felt set in plastic bituminous cement. Extend half-width of
strips up and over the finished roofing and extend the other half-width out and onto the bare roof
deck surface. Water cut-offs shall be removed before continuing installation of roof system.
Nails and fasteners

Nails and fasteners for security roofing shall be flush-driven through flat metal disks of not less
than 25 cm diameter. Metal disks may be omitted where heads of fasteners are equivalent in size
to the 2.5 cm diameter disks.
Mechanical application
Mechanical application devices shall be mounted on pneumatic tired wheels, and shall be
designed and maintained to operate without damaging the insulation or the roofing membrane.
Application of insulation
Rigid roof insulation
Rigid roof insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and the following
• Preparation of deck
Roof deck shall be firm, dry, clean and properly graded to all outlets.
• First
Apply the insulation by mopping into bitumen using 1.2 kg per square meter. Asphalt shall be
applied between a temperature of 175°C and 218°C.
Edges of the felt shall be turned up on, but not cemented to all vertical surfaces to height of 20
cm.
• Second
Apply the units of insulation with long joints continuous and short joints broken. Mop the full width
under each unit of insulation with asphalt using 1.6 kg per square meter, or per layer of insulation,
when more than one layer is used. Before application of the roofing, the projected 15 cm of felt at
vertical surfaces and at all edges shall be turned over the insulation and mopped solidly with
asphalt. The insulation shall not be left exposed to weather. No more insulation shall be applied
than can be completely covered with the roofing felt on the same day.
Flashing
Shall be provided in the angles formed at walls and other vertical surfaces and where required to
make the work watertight. Bituminous-plastic-typeflashings described below shall be used where
metal flashings are indicated.
Flashings shall be provided and installed immediately after the top ply of roofing is placed and
shall be returned and sealed or capped and sealed to waterproof edges and ends. Flashings shall
be stepped where vertical surfaces abut sloped-roof surfaces.
Base flashing
Base flashings shall consist of one layer of the roofing felt manufacturers recommend reinforced
base flashing over one ply of roof felt. Masonry and concrete over which flashing is to be installed
shall be primed with asphalt primer. After asphalt primer has thoroughly dried, the roofing felt and
base flashing shall be evenly embedded in successive layers of bituminous cement, troweled on
at 2.5 kg per square meter. The flashing shall extend not less than 10 cm onto the roofing felts,
and not less than 20 cm or more than 40 cm up the vertical surface, secured at the top on 20 cm
centres with nails or fasteners. Base flashing and felt sheet shall not be greater than 3.5 m in
length lapped not less than 15 cm with laps staggered in each layer. The roof edge of the base
flashing shall be covered with a 10 cm wide strip of roofing felt, embedded in and coated with
bituminous cement. The entire surface of base flashing shall be given a 3 mm thick troweled
coating of bituminous cement. Final coat of bituminous cement shall cover fasteners and shall
extend at least 2.5 cm above top of flashing on vertical surface.
Instead of bituminous cement, flashings may be applied with Type III asphalt in accordance with
manufacturer's printed recommendations followed by the final coat of bituminous cement as
described above.
Strip flashing
Roof flanges of lead and sheet-metal flashings, such as plumbing flashings, provided under other
clauses of the specifications shall be stripped with 2 layers or roofing felt set in plastic cement.
After installation of flanges or flashings over the top of roofing, the strip flashings, consisting of
two layers of roofing felt 23 and 30 cm wide shall be successively plastic cement, to form a
waterproof joint between roofing and flashings.
Roof cut-out samples
Samples shall be taken as directed by the Engineer when there is reason to believe that
deficiencies exist in the roofing membrane. When samples indicate deficiencies in the roofing
membrane, corrective action shall be taken as directed.
Surfacing
After roofing felts have been laid and flashings installed, the entire roof surface shall be uniformly
covered with soft building sand, slightly damp and evenly laid as to no exceed 1.5 cm in depth
and consolidated by tamping. After the sand has been laid building paper shall be laid over the
sand, lapped so that the sand is completely covered. Concrete pavers shall be set in a 1 cm thick
mortar bed composed of 1:3 cement mortar laid over the building paper. The joints between
pavers shall be the same cement mortar of thickness as directed by the engineer.
19.7 QA/QC
this specification. The Contractor shall submit adequate samples and manufacturer’s catalogues
of rigid insulation material, felt and bitumen to the Engineer for approval prior to delivery of
materials to the job site.
19.8 Acceptance
specification.

20 METAL WORKS–ROOF AND WALL CLADDING SYSTEMS

This specification covers the scope of roof and wall cladding systems in accordance with relevant
clauses “General” of this specification. The design and execution shall be state of the art,
functional and complete in all parts in accordance with this specification.
The RO building, Intake Pump house, low pressure pumphouse, filters backwash pumphouse
and product water pumphouse shall have insulated sandwich cladding for roofs and walls. Single
sheet non-insulated cladding shall be used for other structures. The sheeting for sandwich panels
and shelters should be FRP/non-corrosive material.
To avoid damages due to condensate double sheeting shall be used in principal. A single sheeting
shall be allowed only with Engineer’s approval.


Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified in relevant
clauses of this specification. In addition to the standards already listed under clause “Structural
Steel”, following standards shall apply to the works covered by this clause:
DIN 4102 Fire ratings

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures.
Methods for determination of the fire resistance of non-load
bearing elements of construction
1161 Aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes

1245 Metal doorframes (steel)
1494 Specification for Fixing Accessories for Building
purposes; Fixing for sheet, roof and wall coverings
6105 Corrosion resistant stainless steel 316Lfasteners

Wall and roof cladding system
The cladding system (material and colour) shall match and be in harmony with the existing
buildings.

The roof and wall cladding shall meet the following performance criteria:
Classification Test Procedure Minimum test

performance
Physical Humidity Test samples No effect
and Resistance ASTM exposedto100% relative
Environmental D-2247-68 humidity at
38degfor1000hrs
Abrasion The test 375litres of sand

resistance(falling Determines the number
sand method) of litres of sand (under
ASTMD -968 controlled conditions)
required to abrade
through the sample’s
coating system exposing
bare metal
Chemical and -Kesternich Samples exposed No blistering Edge

environmental Pollution Resistance to30Samples delamination1– 2mm
Test DIN 50018 exposedto30test cycles:
each cycle
consists of 8hours
at 40degc in controlled
sulphur dioxide(SO2)
atmosphere at 100%
relative humidity,
followed by16hrs of
drying at ambient
temperature

Coating system Test samples No effect

Integrity salt fog continuously
ASTMB-117 exposedto5%salt fog at
35degcfor 1000hours. All
samples scribed to
expose the underlying
metal before testing. All
panels were inspected in
accordance with ASTMD
–714to
evaluate results
Aesthetic Colour change Test samples 1.89 NBS units

And fade resistance Exposed for minimum of
800,000Langleys of solar
radiation on equatorial
mount (following the
sun)with reflecting
mirrors for concentration
of sunlight Eight minutes
of spray each sunny
hour. An exposure of
800,000Langleys is equal
to approx.
6years exposure
45 deg angle in Florida
Fire-Roof External fire Ext SAA

Exposure roof test
BS476 Part 3

Walls BS476 Pts 5, 6 & 7 Class ‘0’ as

Defined by the UK
Building Regulations
1976
The above performance criteria shall be substantiated by test results certified by recognised
independent testing authority.
The sheeting unit shall be a multi-layer, protected metal system consisting of a trapezoidal
galvanized steel substrate having a thickness of min. 0.75 mm, heavy epoxy base coat and an
exterior weather coat as noted herein.
Insulated panel system consists of an interior profiled liner, insulation core and a fully protected
exterior weathering unit.
Substrate:
Hot-dipped galvanized steel, according to BS EN 10147: 92, with a minimum zinc coating weight
of 275 g/m2 total both sides (Triple Spot Test).
Pre-treatment:
After cleaning, a 'chemical conversion' of the zinc coating to a non-metallic surface with corrosion
inhibiting and adhesion additives.
Primer:
Nominal 5 micron thick anti-corrosive pigmented epoxy primer applied to both sides.
Epoxy barrier coat:
Nominal 70 micron thick Epoxy Barrier coat with special flexibilizer compounds applied to both
sides and baked to a hard corrosion resistant finish.
External weather coat:
Nominal 50 micron thick polyurethane exterior coating pigmented in one of the standard colours
in the manufacturer's colour range.
Internal decorative coat of the interior profiled liner:
Nominal 20 micron stoving polyester decorative finish.
The coating material shall be moisture resistant for plant and auxiliary equipment buildings.
Insulation core:
Insulation core shall be min. 55 mm thick, and shall be placed between the inner and outer sheets.
Panels:

Roof and wall claddings shall normally be constructed of approved composite wall panels,
comprising of profiled hot dip galvanized steel sheeting in composite insulated (injected rigid
foam) panel form. The foam insulation shall be at least 50 mm thick, heat transmission coefficient
in each case has to be kept, and the internal lining shall match the required appearance.
The panel shall be flat with a shallow 3 mm deep profile across the panel face and a return edge
detail providing a concealed butt joint side lap. Deflection of the roof shall be less than 1/200 of
the span, except where roof slopes are below 5 degrees when their limiting deflections shall be
1/300 of the span. Deflection of the wall area shall be less than 1/150 of the span.
External and internal flashings shall be manufactured from materials matching the external and
internal sheeting in gauge, colour and finish. Fixing of panels shall be done only with stainless
steel self-tapping screws, complete with stainless steel (or aluminium) washers incorporating
neoprene sealing washers and PVC colour caps. Screws shall be fixed through the profile crown.
Flashings and side laps shall be fastened with No 14 x 12 stainless steel sticher screws. Where
applicable, black synthetic rubber profile filler blocks shall be used in conjunction with flashings
to adequately seal ridge, eaves, gables and drip.
Where the angles of the roofs are 7° or below, end laps shall be a minimum of 200 mm. On roof
slopes in excess of 7°, end laps shall be a minimum of 150 mm. On vertical areas, end laps shall
be a minimum of 100 mm.
On trapezoidal internal liners, end laps shall be 75 mm and the tray shall be butt-jointed.
The cladding shall be sealed with a non-drying, non-corrosive permanently belastic pre-formed
metal sealing tape capable of performing in a temperature up to 100 °C.
The external weathering sheet shall be secured to the galvanized sub-girts or structural supports
with stainless steel hexagon headed self-tapping screws, each with an integral EPDM washer
bonded to a dished aluminium washer. The internal liners shall be secured to the supporting
structure with galvanized self-tapping screws. Galvanized sub-girts dependant on their type shall
be secured with galvanized self-tapping screws or rivets.
The number and location of the structural fixings to be determined by the cladding supplier who
shall take into account the specified negative loads. Side laps fixings shall be blind rivets located
at cladding supplier’s recommendations. The cladding supplier shall submit calculations, which
substantiate that his fixing allowance will meet the specified design loads.
Fire resistance
Sheeting shall comply with BS 476 parts 3, 5, 6, 7 - class “0”.
Requirements for walls
These requirements apply to all walls (not only for wall cladding). External walls are to be
constructed such that, taking into account the climatic conditions and any air conditioning plant
installed in the rooms as well as the manner of their use, no damp will penetrate the walls. All
external walls shall have a minimum sound absorbing index of 20 dB (A) and a heat transmission
coefficient of 0.75 W/m². K. Appropriate insulation materials will have to be used to achieve the
above figures.
The walls shall not allow the passage of rain or moisture into the building. The walls shall be
provided with all necessary horizontal and vertical damp-proof courses and flashings.
All walls and wall panels shall be sufficiently strong and thick in order to withstand superimposed
loads, dead loads and wind loads without cracking or distortion.
All walls and wall panels shall be adequately secured to the supporting structure.
All walls and wall panels shall be designed and constructed with expansion joints to prevent
cracking or distortion through thermal movements. The expansion joints shall be formed with
approved flexible metal closer strips and/or non-extruding mastic fillers.
All walls and wall panels are to be free of harmful soluble salts which could form noticeable
efflorescence.
Requirements for roofs
These requirements apply to all roofs (not only for roof cladding). The roof construction shall be
such that, with due allowance for the climatic conditions and any air conditioning plant installed in
the rooms, and with their intended use, no damp will penetrate into the materials used.
All roofs shall have a minimum sound absorbing index of 20 dB (A) and a maximum heat
transmission coefficient of 0.45 W/m2K. Appropriate insulation materials will have to be used to
achieve the above figures.
Roof surfaces are to be designed with a minimum slope of 3%.
Roof deflection under load
Deflection shall be limited to between L/150 and L/200 for roofing depending on load conditions,
roof pitches etc. and L/150 for walls. This reduces the possibility of lap joints opening and of
damage to sheets at fixing points as well as limiting stress on the fixings.

Panels shall be factory manufactured units, produced on a continuous online injection facility with
the bonding foam completely filling the space between the panels. Temperature control of the
metal substrates, of the chemical dispensing area and of the online conveyor press is obligatory
to maximise the uniformity of the foam density and the foam substrate adhesion.
The insulation foam shall be a factory injected rigid closed cell fire retardant CFC free,
polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam with a minimum depth of 50 mm between the inner and outer sheets.
The heat transition value “U” of the panels shall be less or equal to 0.4 W/m2*K
Roof and wall cladding shall provide an acoustic attenuation factor of R’w = 20 dB.

Properties and tests for the insulation foam shall be as follows:
Property Test Test Requirements

Density ISO845 40kg/m3
Compression Strength
ISO844 C 10=1.5kg/cm2
Modulus Of Compressibility ISO 844 37kg/cm2
Tensile Strength ISO 1926 2.8kg/cm2

Thermal Conductivity ISO 2581 0.019W/m*K
Flame Resistance ISO 3582 Foam only B2 rated
minimum
Water Vapour Transmission SO 1663 72g/m2/24h(at38%-90% relative

humidity)
Panels shall provide an effective cover width of 1000 mm and shall be manufactured in exact
lengths to suit the structure and minimise jointing. Panels shall have encapsulated side-tapes to
ensure maximum side lap joint uniformity.
External steel sheeting shall be of a hot dip galvanized steel sheet (total of both surfaces-G90-
275 g/m2) of at least 0.75 mm thickness with a 45/250 trapezoidal profile. The external coating
system shall be a multi-layer system consisting of:
• Prime Coat : Epoxy primer of a nominal thickness of 8 μm

• Base Coat : Two components polyamide cured epoxy, nominal thickness of
100 μm
• External Weather Coat: Two components polyurethane pigmented colour coat, nominal
thickness of 40 μm
The inner skin of the panel shall be of hot dip galvanized sheets of at least 0.5 mm thickness,
corrosion protected with a polyester coating of white colour.
Single Sheeting
Single sheet non-insulated roof and wall cladding shall be of trapezoidal profiled FRP / non –
corrosive cladding.
Storage, installation and modification of panels at Site shall be done in strict compliance with
Manufacturer’s instructions. Sheets shall be cut using a powered circular saw or nibbler machine.
Structural liner tray
The interlocking Liner Trays shall be manufactured from high strength (Fe E550 G) hot dipped
galvanized steel and shall be pre-coated on the inside face with a 50 micron thick white PVC
Organosol finish.
Translucent sheeting

They shall consist of polyester resin reinforced with glassfibre incorporating UV light stabilizers
/UV protection.
Gutters/Rainwater Pipes
Gutters /rainwater pipes design procedures shall be based on DIN EN 12056-

3. The materials shall be galvanized steel pipes with internal epoxy coated lining of suitable gauge
with a finish matching the colour of the sheeting and the appliances and components shall comply
with the requirements of the applicable British Standards.
Down pipe shall be Schedule 80 PVC pipes, externally coated with UV resistant paint. The colour
to match with the walls’ colour.

All execution works shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification.
Supporting structure
The supporting structure shall provide a firm framework for the cladding. All vertical and horizontal
fixing faces shall be plumbed and lined, deviations from a true plane being compensated for by
packing. At the top and bottom of each elevation there shall be a continuous supporting member
to which the edges of the profiles and drip/cap flashing, can be firmly attached.
Before commencing fixing ensure that the sheet is correctly aligned at right angles to the ridge
and eaves, and for walls, that sheets are plumb and laps correctly engaged. Ensure that exposed
ends of the sheet line up so that any tolerances on sheet length are accommodated and under
laps are not visible. Where profiled corner pieces are required the horizontal line shall be
maintained on adjacent elevations.
Fasteners
Main fasteners (self-tapping or self-drilling/self-tapping screws) are applied to the external side of
the sheet through the centre of every other through, at every purlin, except at the end laps and
end of sheets. Fasteners shall be placed in every through at end laps and sheet ends.
All holes shall be drilled, not punched, and swarf removed. If left, the swarf will corrode and the
corrosion will stain the coating.
Selection of the correct fastener for each application is important. Fastener of incorrect type size
and material can result in leaks, corrosion and premature failure.
Unless otherwise stated, fasteners are manufactured from SS 316L. The fasteners are assembled
with twinseal washers made from a combination of EPDM and metal. This generates an effective
seal at the sheet surface, around the threads and under the head of the fastener. Where 19 mm
washers are specified they are made from Stainless Steel. It is essential to ensure that the correct
fastener is specified for each application as point design varies according to the type of structural
purlins.

20.7 QA/QC
5.1.7 of this specification. Performance tests Performance criteria are for:
• Humidity Resistance: ASTM D-2247
• Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D-968
• Pollution Resistance: DIN 50018
• Coating System integrity: ASTM B-117
• Colour change and fade resistance shall be substituted by test results certified by an
independent test laboratory.
20.8 Acceptance
specification.

21 METAL WORKS/JOINER’S WORK–DOORS AND GATES

This specification covers the scope of door and gate systems in accordance with clause 5.1


5.1.3.

General
With regard to thickness of material, sub-construction, stiffening etc., doors and gates shall satisfy
the structural requirements. The fire protection and sound insulation regulations are to be
observed by suitable construction. All security and emergency exit doors to be in accordance with
the Local Safety Regulation.
For fire rated doors, certificates issued by an approved testing laboratory shall be submitted.
The sub-construction shall not show any pressure marks on the surfaces; the type of construction
used shall not be liable to warping.
The locks, roses and lock sets shall suit the lock cylinders. The cylinders are to be matched to
the door leaf thickness.
The locking systems are to be furnished to the Employer’s choice for all types of security systems,
master key systems, group master key systems, central key systems or combinations of the
different systems. The number of keys will be as per master key system specification hereafter.
Plywood doors
Plywood doors are to be of rebated five-ply construction approx. 38 mm thick with bonding
resistant to hot weather and with PVC-proof paint finish. Cases and linings are likewise to be
suitable for painting. Loose and black knots are not permitted.
All fittings such as drilling hinge, single-turn room door mortice locks and door furniture with

concealed screws shall conform to the proper standard.
Natural timber doors are to be with knife cut fine wood veneer. All visible edges are to have
concealed solid wood lipping glued on. The double turn locks are to be arranged for cylinders.
Door cases and linings are to have secret fixing by screwing or glueing. The furniture is to match
the high standard required. All-round lip seals are to be fitted in the rebates. The surfaces are to
be treated according to clause “Corrosion protection and painting” of Clause “General” above.
Glass panels in doors are to be retained by narrow beads fixed by glueing and brass screws
respectively. BSI IS 2202: Part 1 is to be observed.
Framed timber doors and gates
Framed natural finish wood doors are to consist of frame and panels or are to be doubled-up
doors. The wooden panels shall fit into grooves in the frame and be able to expand and contract
freely. The doors are to be made in the manner and according to the type desired by the Employer.
The highest standard is to be applied. The jamb is to be rebated.
Sound-insulated doors are to be constructed such that an insulation value of 35 dB is achieved.

The rebates are to be sealed with double lip seals. At the bottom there shall be no closing edge
and no threshold, sealing being by means of a mechanical threshold seal.
Door cases, linings and frames shall meet the stipulated requirements.
Door hinges, double-turn locks and furniture are to be of suitably heavy brass pattern.
All wall connections are to be made with suitable profile strips; wood edges are to be molded.
Decorative moldings on panels and frames shall only be glued on.
Glass panels are to be placed in a rebate and held on the other side by a narrow frame head fixed
to the frame or bars by oval head brass screws; a shallow bedding of putty may be needed
between the beads and the glass panels.
As door closers, only the floor type of the necessary pattern shall be used. Suitable protection is
to be provided for the bottoms of external doors and gates; on the inside a metal kicking plate of
brass is to be screwed on, whilst the outside shall be provided with a glued-on wooden board with
weather molding.
Frames and fanlights are to conform to the prescribed types.
Two-leaf gates are to be fitted with concealed espagnolettes or edge fitted flush bolts. The sill
sockets are to be removable for cleaning/purposes. BS EN 1995-1-1 are to be observed.
Aluminium units
The aluminium doors and frames shall be of extruded tubing and/or plate aluminium. All extruded
members shall be aluminium alloy 6063-T5. Door stiles and frame sections shall not be less than
2 mm in thickness. Doors and frames shall have cut-outs and reinforcement for installation of
hardware including concealed overhead closers, top and bottom flush bolts in active doors,
lockset, pivots and push plates for both sides of doors. Windows shall be furnished and erected
as required, including all necessary hardware, anchors etc.

All sections shall be anodized to the Engineer approval. Aluminium sash shall consist of frames
assembled from members of extruded aluminium. The section shall be as shown on the detail
drawings.
Aluminium doors shall be made to DIN 18360.
Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be of
stainless steel 316L. Precautions shall be taken against electrolytic action and other sources of
corrosion.
Pivots, closer, lockset, flush bolts, push plates door closers and iron work as provided and
installed by aluminium door Contractor. Lock cylinder shall be provided on all doors. A hardware
schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer's approval.
Aluminium doors, windows and glass walls as well as aluminium frames shall be powder coated
in accordance with BS EN 1615 or BS 3987. Their hardware shall be of concealed construction
in the aluminium frame and shall be made of stainless steel complying with BS EN ISO 3506.
Sections of aluminium extruded box profiles shall not be less than 50 mm deep and 2 mm thick.
Aluminium alloys shall be of uniform quality, free from defects impairing strength and durability
with regularity of surfaces and accuracy of right angles. Glass panels in the door shall be placed
as and if required by the Engineer.
All doors shall be provided with door closer, door stops and tube dust proof. Panic bars are to be
foreseen as and if directed by the Engineer or as required by local authorities.
All windows that can be opened shall be provided with fly screens consisting of a separate
aluminium sub-frame and aluminium fly wire. Fly screens shall be removable for maintenance.
Windows at high levels shall be fitted with approved mechanical devices allowing for opening from
the ground level. Marble sills of 30 mm thickness shall be installed under all windows internally
(with the exception of windows in steel cladding).
Door and window elements shall be fixed to the structure with a separate rectangular aluminium
frame. Joints of door and window frames to the walls shall be covered with an aluminium angle
on each side, and they shall be sealed with permanent elastic material in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Steel doors
Steel doors used for fire protection shall provide an adequate fire resistance value for the
particular application and be constructed of inflammable materials. They shall close fully into the
rebate and be provided with an external stop, an automatic door closer or spring closer, three-
bolt mortice lock, arranged for cylinder locking, furniture with handle or knob, black stove
enamelled between smooth sheets of scale- and stress free steel folded in such a way as to
produce a double-walled internally hollow door leaf which is free from joints in the face view; a
filling of fire protection matting is to be inserted. Double-leaf doors are to have a dead lock and a
latch.
Doors on escape routes shall be fitted with panic bars to ensure that the possibility of exit in the
escape direction is maintained when the doors are bolted and locked. The paint finish shall suit
the intended application. Illumination apertures and port holes in doors shall be fitted with fire-
resistant glass (safety glass).
Steel doors shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 6510 and proprietary make. Joints of
doorframes to walls shall be fire sealed.
The Contractor shall provide the following documents for all steel doors:
• Detailed shop and construction drawings as well as the door schedules.

• Test certificates proving the conformity of the physical properties stipulated in this
specification and the relevant DIN.
All steel surfaces for doors and frames shall be hot dip galvanized and painted as specified, and
the minimum thickness of the steel sheets shall be 1.5 mm. No joints shall be permitted in the
steel sheets. All steel doors shall be of double-skinned construction, with all necessary
reinforcement for hinges, locks and other fixture. The two skins shall be mechanically interlocked
and bonded together to form an envelope, which shall be closed at the top and the bottom with
two steel channels welded to the steel sheets and stiffened by intermediate stiffener. External
surfaces of door leaf shall not be plain to avoid shiny appearance, if directed by the Engineer.
Polyurethane or equivalent for approval by the Engineer shall be provided as insulation over the
whole interior area of the door and shall be fixed with a plastic binder such that no part of the door
may become un-insulated due to shocks, blows or use of the door.
Single doors shall in general be 1000 mm x 2200 mm minimum height, double doors 2000 mm x
2500 mm or as required. Three or four (for heavy doors) steel butt hinges of 140 mm length shall
be provided for each door leaf. Steel for door frames shall be 4 mm thick, and shall be fixed to
the reinforced concrete frame by approved anchor bolts M12, passing through holes of 25 mm
diameter in the frame. Steel frames shall be fixed to steel structures and walls by galvanized steel
screws and bolts respectively. The clearance of doors shall be 3 mm at heads and 6mm at
meeting stiles of pairs of doors and at the bottom.
Steel doors shall be provided with automatic door closer, door selectors (at double doors), and
fitted with rubber cushions. External doors shall have an external weather strip. All steel doors
shall be provided with panic latch system with horizontal bar action parallel to the door face
moving in the direction of the door travel. Sign plates of anodized aluminium or stainless steel
shall be screwed to the door under or above the horizontal bar, on which the sign
„PUSH BAR TO OPEN“ shall be engraved and printed. The thickness of the normal steel door
shall be 44 mm for both single and double doors.
Fire doors and frames
For normal, fire resistant (T30) and fireproof steel doors (T120), ratings according DIN 4102 shall
apply.
Door leaves shall be manufactured with double flush skins of galvanized steel sheet, minimum
1.5 mm thick, edged and welded to the case. The case shall be stiffened with steel section frame.
The door shall be filled with suitable fire- resistant material to withstand fire for the time required.
Single doors shall have a minimal leaf clearance of 1.00 meter.
The door frame shall be of galvanized steel Z-profile. Door leafs and door frame shall be one (1)
unit and shall be constructed in accordance with the relevant drawing.

The fixing of the door frame to the walls shall be carried out by means of flat steel anchor strips
steel bolts, diameter 6 - 9 mm, either cemented into the masonry of concrete wall or to be screwed
or welded to the steel structure.
Three (3) anchors shall be provided up to 2.10 m length with a minimum of six
(6) anchors per door frame.
"Fire-resistant doors" shall withstand fire for a time of minimum 30 minutes as specified in the
Standards (T30)
"Fire-proof doors" shall withstand fire for a time of minimum 120 minutes as specified in the
Standards (T120).
All fire doors shall be arranged to either remain in the normally closed position with suitable self-
closing device or in the normally open position with a fusible element actuated mechanism which
will close the door automatically in case of fire.
Steel gates
Steel gates for fire protection purposes shall have the same construction as the fire protection
doors. Sound protection gates shall be constructed double- walled with mineral wool filling in such
a manner that the minimum insulation value of 17 dB(A) will be achieved.
The appropriate fittings shall be employed for the type of gate adopted. For wicket doors in gates
adequate stiffening of the gate leaves shall be provided.
Single-walled steel gates shall be constructed of smooth steel sheet formed in such a manner
that the sub-structure is completely enclosed on the visible sides. Electromechanical gate
actuators with geared motor, gate control unit and operating controls shall be installed in a
watertight version.
Folding doors
The folding doors shall be of the accordion type and shall be made of aluminium materials. They
shall move easily and quietly. The ceiling and floor guides shall be constructed to be maintenance-
free. These doors shall be insulated to ensure thermal and acoustical transmittance compatible
with the surrounding walls.
These doors shall be electrically operated. Easy manual operation of electrically operated doors
shall be possible.
Folding doors may be used, if approved by the Engineer. The units shall be manufactured as top
hung folding doors of edged steel sheets and steel sections. Door leave shall be manufactured
with double flush skin of steel sheet, min. 1.5 mm thick, edged and welded to the case. The case
shall be stiffened with steel section frame. The door shall be constructed for one way normal
manual use under subtropical conditions for exterior openings in accordance with the architectural
design.
Folding doors shall be furnished with heavy duty type hardware of stainless steel consisting of:
• Truck brackets and floor channel

• Intermediate hinges with nylon washers
• Hangers with nylon wheels, ball bearing, lubricated for life incl. wheel centre pattern
• Flush handles outside
• Fold-aside butt hinges, min. three (3) per 2.5 m length
• Door guides with end and centre pattern, furniture, bolts and screws with all fittings
Roller shutter doors
For entrances to workshops, stores, machine halls, etc., electrically operated vertical lift steel
doors shall be provided. These rolling shutter type doors shall be double skin and thermally
insulated. Manual chain roller lift device shall be additionally provided. Doors shall be double-leaf
of size 4.5 m width and 5 m height (minimum) unless otherwise specified in particular
specifications or as shown in the drawings.
Roller shutter doors shall be made of a sandwiched aluminium structure with insulation. They
shall be used only as external doors. The aluminium structure shall be made of highly corrosion
resistant aluminium alloys, the surface being coated electrolytically with a heavy aluminium oxide
skin capable of withstanding the climatic conditions. These doors shall be provided with motor
drive (commanded from outside and inside) in order to be moved easily. The power supply for the
motor and control shall be taken from the relevant low voltage switchgear.
The roller for rolling up the door shall be located directly above and on the inner side of the door
opening. The guides for this door shall be constructed to be maintenance free.
Profile cylinders
The cylinders shall be of brass, matt nickel-plated, with six mushroom headed tumbler pins below
the keyhole, with legally protected profile complete with protection certificate, to guard against
unauthorised entry attempts and duplication of keys. These cylinders shall be fitted to any mortice
lock without particular difficulty. They shall be secured by means of a screw from the faceplate.
Profile cylinders shall be used together with round and oval cylinders in the same lock installation.
For corrosion protection and surface treatment, see clause “Corrosion Protection and Painting” of
Clause “General” above. The door and gate installations shall be manufactured complete
including accessories and catches.
Automatic and photocell-operated doors shall have means of manual operation in an emergency.
Master-Key System
An appropriate serviceable and functional master key system for the whole plant shall be installed.
The elaboration of the system itself shall be made in close co-ordination with the Employer and
only after obtaining the Employer’s approval in writing shall the order of production be placed.
Generally, the following requirements shall be kept
• The general master key shall operate all locks

• The main key shall open all locks of one main compound
• The sub-key shall open all locks of a certain group within the main Compound
• The single key shall open the lock of a single room
Necessary attention shall be paid to later extensions of the master key system, which shall be
suitable for the entire plant including all final stages.
The profile cylinders shall be resistant to the prevailing corrosive atmosphere and shall suit all
plant requirements and shall be of types such as half, double, asymmetrical, short-cylinder, etc..
The material of the cylinders shall be of massive brass, nickel-plated with six security pawl studs.
Outside doors shall be provided with protection cover for the cylinder.
The keys shall have an engraved indication of the applicable key system and the
compound/group/ or door number.
Keys shall be supplied in the following numbers
• General master key 25 numbers

• Main keys 15 numbers per each compound
• Sub-keys 5 numbers per each group
• Single keys 3 numbers per each door.
Room Designation Signs
The entrance to each room shall be furnished with the following room designation sign type:
• Anodized aluminium plate, with specially treated surface, 260 x 100 x 4 mm

• Four horizontal grooves, 10 mm wide at the lower end of the plate to take plastic strips
with designation printed in English and Arabic language. At the upper portion the room
number shall be engraved.
Fixing: The sign plates shall be screwed to the wall with non-corroding screws.
The type and material may be changed at the discretion of the Engineer.
Sunshades
Sunshades shall be made of single sheet trapezoidal profile and made of FRP.
Where people need to stay to operate the equipment, sunshade shall be provided with minimum
height of 2.20m. Generally, the eaves shall extend beyond the area covered by the equipment by
a reasonable margin, which shall be about one third of the height of the sunshade. Depending on
height the eaves shall be curved down to improve shading angle but not to affect the movement
of the personnel around the equipment. Fixing and detailing shall be in line with the metal cladding
specified in the above clause. Supporting steel structure shall be designed and corrosion
protected as specified in relevant Parts.
Sunshade shall be arranged such that sunlight will not directly shine on the shaded equipment
any time between 10:00 and 14:00 hours. This shall be accomplished by providing partial side
walls as required of sufficient length to deflect the sunlight. Side walls shall extend from the roof
downwards and placed so as not to impede the normal entrance and exit of personal or
maintenance equipment (i.e. the open area around the shade shall be a minimum of 2.0 m from
finish grade level). Where equipment require more open area, partial side walls are not to be
used, but the roof area is to be enlarged to maintain the required shading.
Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling)


Aluminium windows
All aluminium glazed windows shall be insulated double glazing with wired glass for plant buildings
and tempered glass for Control Office buildings.
Aluminium units
Doors shall be weather-stripped at jambs, heads and meeting stiles of pairs with rubber or
neoprene. Bottom rails of doors shall have a vinyl sweep strip.
Frames shall be accurately fitted and securely joined to obtain tightly closed, strong joints (one
fitting every 50 cm). Doors shall be accurately fitted to frames. The construction when complete,
including glass, shall be capable of withstanding the effect of a 160 km/h wind without deflection
greater than 1/300 of the length of the element.
Aluminium contacting other non-compatible metals shall be coated with zinc chromate primer.
Surfaces in contact with Portland cement concrete or mortar shall be painted with asphalt. It shall
be the Contractor’s responsibility to protect the exposed surfaces of all installed aluminium work
against damage during construction.
All exposed aluminium surfaces of all aluminium doors and frames shall be cleaned. A protective
transparent lacquer coating resistant to stain shall be applied before shipment.
21.6 QA/QC
All quality assurance and quality control activities shall be in accordance with 5.1.7 of this
specification.
21.7 Acceptance

22 METAL WORKS/JOINER’S WORKS–WINDOWS

This specification covers the scope of window systems in accordance with clause 5.1 “General”
in all parts in accordance with this specification.
All frame section and panes shall have dimensions and properties suited to the duty concerned.


5.1.3.
In addition, the following standards shall be observed:
DIN 18360 Metalwork
DIN 18361 Glazing works
DIN 18 364 Corrosion protection of steel structures
DIN 18357 Mounting of door and window hardware
DIN 1O55 Design loads for buildings and loads in silo bins
DIN EN 1999 Eurocode 9: Design of Aluminium Structures

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant design criteria specified in clause
5.1.4.
The windows or shades shall be designed that the outsides of the window panes can be cleaned.
Aluminium windows
Aluminium windows shall be made of highly corrosion resistant aluminium alloys, the surface
being coated electrolytically with a heavy aluminium oxide skin capable to withstand the climatic
conditions. The anodizing colour or the colour of the stove enamelling shall as selected by the

Employer. Contact surfaces of sheets, sections, fastening elements and the like shall in principle
be painted prior to assembly even if the overall construction does not stipulate painting. Any
necessary painting shall be applied directly after assembly.
Before being installed in concrete, mortar or masonry, aluminium parts shall be primed and thickly
coated with phenol free bitumen or with an insulating paste such that direct contact between the
aluminium and the above mentioned materials is avoided. If composite construction is necessary,
special measures shall be taken. Wood shall be painted before coming into contact with
aluminium; impregnating agents for wood shall contain only substances which do not attack
aluminium, failing this reliable isolation shall be applied.
In composite constructions involving steel and aluminium, the steel parts shall be protected all
over prior to assembly. Light metal primers can be used with good results for this purpose. On no
account shall red be used. After effective insulation of the parts to be connected, e.g. by the use
of sealant compound, the components shall be jointly given a uniform finishing coat matched to
the makeup of the primer coat. The heads of steel rivets including the transition to the aluminium
areas shall be cleaned and protected by painting or an equivalent coating. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the cleaning process does not damage the aluminium surface.
The window corners shall be mitred and joined in a reliable manner. All screwed fastenings shall
be invisible.
Hardware shall be concealed and similarly of light metal, other parts shall all be of non-rusting
type.
The glazing shall be of insulating glass. Glazing beads shall be invisibly clipped and shall lie in
the same plane as the frame sections. Double lip seals shall be inserted in the rebates. In all other
respects the functions of wood windows as specified herein shall be observed.
Strip windows in aluminium frames
The aluminium frames for strip windows shall meet the requirements of the above clause
“Aluminium Windows”.
The strip windows shall be double-glazed with U-section construction glass without glazing bars.
The types of section and thicknesses of the glazing elements shall suit the requirements for the
particular application.
As protection against splintering, ample longitudinal wires shall be present in the glazing
elements. Colourless sealing of the panes on a silicone basis shall be provided internally and
externally.
Frames for vents shall be constructed like those for aluminium windows. The operating rods shall
be brought down to within reach.
Windows in steel frames
The steel frames shall exhibit adequate rigidity. They shall have a rebate for the glazing and a lip
to bear against the substructure.
The sections shall be of hot-rolled galvanized steel. The window units shall be divided into
uniformly large sections by means of piers at suitable intervals. Top-hinged vents shall be
attached to the head of the frame by a pair of steel window hinges milled from the solid and fitted
with a brass pin. A central operating system may provide for locking.
Each casement has two stays, an operating rod and a handle of anodized light metal. On the
inside at the bottom shall be a condensate channel with caps at the ends.
Cavities between window frames and any steel frame construction shall be fully insulated with
mineral wool.
Externally at the bottom a galvanized sill cover folded four times and with a corresponding
developed shape shall be fitted.
The sill cover shall be made of 2.0 mm thick galvanized steel sheet and shall run unbroken for
the entire length of strip windows. Where joints occur, these shall be lapped and sealed with
permanent elastic mastic on a multicomponent Thiokol base.
As a finish to each end of the strip window, a galvanized angle with the same height like the
window and made from steel sheet provided with bonded on insulation on the rear shall be fixed
to the frame.
The windows shall be fixed by welding to lugs previously concreted in or to existing structural
steel work. The glazing of wired glass shall be fitted with galvanized glazing beads retained by
brass screws. Internal and external sealing on a multi-component Thiokol base shall be provided.
Louvers
Ventilation louvers shall be constructed with an enclosing frame and fixed weatherproof slats. On
the inside a bird guard shall be fitted. Fixing shall be effected as described under clause
"Windows".
Venetian blinds
Venetian blinds shall be made of light metal with operation from inside. Separate raise and tilt
controls using special non-fraying cords shall be used, and these shall run over pulleys in the
head rail, the cord lock and return points. The blinds shall be capable of being locked at any
desired height. Slat adjustment of 180° shall be possible in both directions.
The slats shall be of concave form and made of highly flexible special aluminium alloy, resistant
to scratching, knocks and bending. The colour shall be chosen by the Employer.
The slat tapes shall be made of boil-proof, dimensionally stable, weatherproof material insensitive
to temperature, resistant to light and maintaining the slats parallel. Bottom rail of lacquered
aluminium stiffened underneath without visible external coverings, ends closed by plastic caps.
Wind stays in the form of glass-clear nylon rods fixed at the top in the metal head rail and attached
at the bottom to aluminium brackets. Fixing rails shall have a galvanized finish.


Anti-Sun Glass
Sun protection insulating glazing shall have a reflecting bronze metal coating on the inside of the
panes and shall have a mirror finish.
Colour reproduction shall be very good in the terms of DIN 6169 for average daylight.
Leaded Glazing
Leaded glazing for windows shall be constructed with coloured glass, due allowance being made
for weather effects. Fixed leaded glazing shall be subdivided into individual panels and held in
the reveals by means of surrounds.
The windows shall be shaded with strips of suitable material at a distance of at least 40 cm in
front of the window surface with lateral overlap. The selected materials shall be treated in
accordance with the clause “Corrosion Protection and Painting” of Clause "General" above and
when aluminium is used the surfaces shall be anodized as selected by the Engineer. The designs
shall be manufactured in a workmanlike manner in accordance with the expected weather
conditions and shall conform to the structural requirements. Refer Thermal transmittance
specification as stated above in this document.

22.7 QA/QC
22.8 Acceptance

23 GLAZING

This specification covers the scope of glazing works in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of
all parts in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this specification.
General
These regulations shall apply to all parts of the works in which glazing will be used.
All work shall comprise labour, equipment, and the supply of the appurtenant materials and
structural components including transport, loading, offloading and storage at the site unless
otherwise specified.
Noise levels
Following maximum acceptable noise levels in dB(A) shall be kept:
General offices 60 dB(A)
Computer rooms 35 dB(A)


5.1.3.

Design and execution
shall be in accordance with all relevant design criteria specified in clause 5.1.4.

General

All materials and structural components covered by standards shall meet the quality and
dimensional requirements thereof.
Any glass thicknesses specified shall be deemed as minimum thicknesses within the allowable
tolerance unless another glass thickness is specified.
If requested, the Contractor shall furnish samples and state the names of the suppliers of
materials and structural components.
Wire plate glass
All wire plate glass shall be ground and polished on either side so that the surfaces are plane and
shall be clearly transparent and clearly reflective. Inconspicuous scratches, small bubbles and
deviations in their wire netting are allowed only to the extent normally acceptable in glasses of
standard commercial quality.
Standard Fabrication Thickness Allowable Deviation
mm 7 mm ±1.0
Cast glass
Cast glass with or without wire netting, also coloured cast glass, shall be translucent, but may be
transparent to a limited extent only. Minor bubbles and differences in the surfaces and the glass
core as well as scratches and manufacturing deviations in the wire netting may be allowed as
long as they will not exceed the proportions normally to be expected in the particular type of cast
glass specified and will not affect the load-bearing capacity.
Standard Allowable Deviations

Fabrication (mm)
Thicknesses
Wire glass (mm)
Wired ornamental glass - ± 1.0
Wired “difulite” glass 9 ± 1.0
Corrugated wire 6 ± 0.5
Glass
Raw glass 5 ± 0.5
7 ± 1.0
9 ± 1.0
Ornamental glass 4 ± 0.5
5 ± 0.5
7 ± 1.0
9 ± 1.0
Sectional building 5 ± 1.0
6 ± 1.0
7 ± 1.0

8 ± 1.0
Coloured glass and special glasses
All coloured glasses (coloured cast glass, coloured antique glass and flashed glass coloured
crystal plate glass, coated glass etc.) shall be standard commercial quality.
Special glasses, e.g. absorbent, reflective glasses and the like shall have the properties assured
by the manufacturer.
Safety glasses
Wired plate glass as well as wire glass, wired ornamental glass, wired "difulite" glass, and
corrugated wire glass shall be adequately resistant to fire. In the event of breakage of glass panes,
the wire netting shall largely hold the splinters.
If sectional wired building glass is cracked, its wire netting shall retain the glass fragments to the
largest possible extent.
Single-sheet safety glass, being pre-stressed, shall be highly elastic, safe against bending failure
and resistant to temperature variations. In the event of breakage the glass shall not splinter.
Laminated safety glass with or without steel filament netting shall be shatter- proof, impact-
retardant, fast to light and weather-resistant. It shall have good transparency unless otherwise
specified.
Multi-sheet glazing units
This shall mean a glazing consisting of several glass sheets hermetically sealed with air space
being dehydrated. A 5-year guarantee shall be given by the Contractor to the sealed air space
not to leak, e.g. when the inside surface starts to dim and becomes dirty.
Double glazing units
Following properties as the minimum requirements shall be kept
• Opening size as per requirements

• Wind loading 3000 N/m²
• Type of glazing double with 12 mm airspace
• Maximum acceptable noise level 50 dB(A)
• Type of glass float 6 mm
• Light transmittance 0.76
• Solar radiant heat reflectance 0.12
• Shading coefficient 0.84
• Thermal transmittance 2.0 W/m² °K
Double glazing in solar control

To lower internal heat gain and to cut air-conditioning loads solar control glasses such as float
with a bronze tint, body coloured float glasses, colour to choice, and/or laminated reflective
glasses shall be executed having the following minimum requirements
• Opening size as per requirements

• Wind loading 3000 N/m²
• Type of glazing double with 12 mm airspace
• Maximum acceptable noise level 50 dB(A)
• Type of glass float 6 mm (tint) + float 6 mm
• Light transmittance 0.44
• Solar radiant heat reflectance 0.06
• Shading coefficient 0.55
• Thermal transmittance 2.0 W/m²K
• Tint bronze
Sealing compounds
Hardening sealants (putties) shall firmly bond to the glass and the adjacent structural part. They
shall not have any constituents that might adversely affect the adjacent part of the structure of the
glass. They shall not flow; their surface shall be smooth after drying and shall remain unchanged
at the expected temperature and humidity conditions.
Permanently plastic sealing compounds (special putties) shall have a good bond to the glass and
the adjoining structural component. They shall be of adequate compatibility and remain stable at
the temperature ranges involved in each case.
Permanently elastic sealing compounds (surface sealants) shall, at the occurring temperature
ranges, bond to the glass and the adjoining structural member enough to ensure that with due
allowance for the permissible elongation, they will absorb all movement expansion and shrinkage
of the structural components without tearing or breaking off.
They shall withstand atmospheric influences, shall not age-harden and shall have adequate
compatibility.
Seal strips
Seal strips shall retain their properties at the occurring temperature range and resist atmospheric
influences. They shall be of adequate compatibility.
Sealing sections
The quality, dimensions and design of all sealing sections shall suit the intended application. The
sections shall retain their assured properties under the prevailing temperature conditions and
withstand atmospheric influences. They shall be of adequate compatibility.
Glass cements and glass adhesives
All glass cements and adhesives shall have set not later than 2 days after having been applied.
After such period they shall firmly bond and, in addition, be adequately elastic, water-proof, but
dissoluble by agents normally applicable in building construction.
Where in single-sheet safety glass use is made of glass cements or glass adhesives, such
materials shall with an adequate width of joints be sufficient elastic that breakage of any one glass
sheet will not affect the sheet connected with it.

General
The clearance between the pane and the base of the glass rebate shall be about a third of the
depth of the glass rebate.
The glass panes shall be clamped tight in such a way that uniform distribution of the weight of the
panes is achieved, which in turn shall prevent detrimental twist without affecting the ease of
movement of the window and door leaves.
The edges of the glass panes shall not touch the frame at any point. The clamps used shall be
impregnated oil-soaked hardwood blocks or equivalent materials.
Glazing for settings other than vertical shall suit the special requirements resulting from the slope.
Outer glazing shall be rain-proof and absorb the wind loads. It shall further be tight to exclude
draughts except in cases where the design does not permit air-tightness, e.g., in roof glazing,
louvers, etc.
Where glass holding beads can only be fitted at some later stage, the glass panes shall, until such
beads are installed, be secured all around and at minimum distances of 80 cm by 10 cm long strip
sections with elastic intermediate layer.
The Contractor shall thoroughly inform himself of the insurance regulations and categories
pertaining to glazing requirements on the work as they relate to insurability and premiums. In
collaboration with the Employer and the Engineer, he shall propose for the approval of the
Engineer, such adjustments of glass sizes, the manner of installation thereof, and the inclusion of
materials that best approach the minimum life-cycle cost for the work when taking into account
initial cost, replacement due to breakage, and insurance costs, in all cases meeting the desired
levels of quality, serviceability, and adequacy to purpose of the glazing.
Glazing works for all-glass structures of security glass
The panes shall be fitted together across the whole surface at the joints. Abutting panes forming
a level surface shall have smoothly ground butting edges with polished chamfers. The chamfers
shall be narrow enough to ensure that the thickness of the glass will only be slightly reduced.
Glass panes abutting at an angle shall be miter-ground at the joints in accordance with the angle.
The butt edges shall receive narrow, ground and polished chamfers. Unavoidable inaccuracies in
the fit-up of the miter joints shall be allowed on the side of the pane facing away from the viewer.
For abutting panes up to an overall size of 9 m2, the following glass thickness shall be used with
due allowance for the permissible deviations at least 12 mm for panes up to 120 cm in width.

In the event of particular stresses arising, proof shall be furnished that the selected glass
thicknesses are adequate to the expected stresses by wind load and other forces.
The width of the joints shall be at least 2 mm but shall not exceed 5 mm. They shall completely
and uniformly be filled up with glass cement or glass adhesive and stuck off smoothly. Metal fillets
or other inserts of materials alien to glass shall not be allowed to be fitted in the joints.
On end panes, a spacer block shall be installed at the bottom of the vertical edge face.
Special glazing works
For all glazing works with specially developed glass types and methods of glazing, the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation shall accurately be followed. The Contractor shall
convey respective manuals, direction and instruction pamphlets or books to the Engineer in
minimum 3 copies for information.
The following shall among other be considered as special type of glazing works.
• Glazing works for all-glass structures of pre-stressed glass (single-sheet safety glass);
• Safety glazing for burglar-proof and other special purposes;
• Glazing of facades;
• Installation of top-hung glass sheets;
• Glass building elements;
• Sun protection and thermal insulation glazing.
• Glass infill panels with stainless steel hand-railing for stairs in the Auxiliary Building.
Fire glass
The glass shall have a fire resistivity of class G 90, which is min. 90 minutes in accordance with
DIN 4102. Minimum thickness of the glass shall therefore be
6.5 mm.
The sizes of each pane shall not exceed the following dimensions.
• Maximum size 1,200 mm x 2,000 mm

• Minimum size 200 mm x 300 mm
• Tolerance in width/height ± 3 mm
• Tolerance in thickness ± 0.5 mm
The physical data of the fire glass shall not be inferior to the following:
• Specific weight 2.2 g/cm²

• Bending strength 100 N/mm²
• Heat transfer coefficient 6 W/m²°K
• Light transmittance 90%
• Resilience E 63 x 103 N/mm²
The manufacturer's instructions for the use and installation of fire glass in steel frames with regard
to expansion, workability of glass, special putty compound etc. shall be adhered to.

23.7 QA/QC
Tests and properties
All materials to be supplied and installed shall be in accordance with the relevant standards and
certificates of quality testified by an independent authority or institute and shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to execution of the works.
Selection of samples for testing material will be made by the Engineer.
23.8 Acceptance

24 COMPUTER FLOORS

This specification covers the scope of computer floor systems in accordance with clause 5.1
complete in all parts in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this specification.


5.1.3.

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant design criteria specified in clause
5.1.4.
Earthing resistance shall be in accordance to the electrical and I&C requirements.


24.7 QA/QC
specification.
24.8 Acceptance

specification.

25 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

This specification covers the scope of suspended ceilings in accordance with clause 5.1 “General”
in all parts in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this specification.

The design and engineering shall be state of the art in accordance with all relevant cods and
The Contractor shall submit detail drawings and specification of the suspended ceiling system
before installation of the work. Drawings shall show details of tile layouts and erection including
light fixtures and ventilation grills, etc.

5.1.3.
Suspended ceilings shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 8290.

Suspended ceilings shall be provided as specified for control rooms, offices, corridors, bathrooms,
toilets, kitchens etc.
The suspended ceiling system proposed shall have a fire resistance rating of
½ hour.
The building shall be properly enclosed and watertight before suspended ceiling work
commences.
Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions which will exist
when the building is occupied shall be maintained before during and after installation.
Care shall be taken that the grid is square and in proper alignment prior to installation of panels.
Where the grid layout dictates, tiles shall be cut to the required irregular sizes.
The suspension system shall be of sufficient in strength and rigidity to carry the panels, which
shall be supported by aluminium panel carriers. The panels shall be secured with locking clips to
the grid. The rod hangers shall be made of galvanized steel of 4 mm diameter (minimum). The
joints between the panels and the light fixtures and the air supply shall be smooth and regular.

Power driven fasteners shall be used for fixing the rod hangers in the reinforced concrete ceiling.
Suspended metal ceilings
For the wet rooms such as kitchens, toilets, showers ceiling panels shall be
0.8 mm thick, stove enamelled, aluminium sheets. In general, the size of the panels shall be 600
mm x 600 mm. Panels of closed appearance of 75 mm or 150 mm wide and length up to 6 meters
could also be proposed. These should be Aluminium spandrel type 100 mm wide stripes ceiling.
Mineral board ceilings
For other rooms such as offices, mineral board panel with the dimensions 600 mmx600 mm shall
be provided. They shall be in conformity to BS 8290 and non-combustible class 0 to parts 1 and
4 of BS 476. These should be Aluminium acoustic ceiling panels for office rooms.

Ceiling panels
Panels for suspended ceilings shall be non-combustible felted mineral wood fibreboard panels
with square cut edges and a factory applied matt white emulsion paint finish which shall be easily
cleaned or redecorated. Materials used shall be selected with due regard to environmental and
operational conditions prevailing in the area under consideration.
The panels shall have a minimum 80% light reflectance and a thermal conductivity K of 0.036
watt/meter/ºC.
The panels shall provide the following minimum sound absorption coefficients:
0.45 at 500 Hz
0.70 at 1,000 Hz
0.90 at 4,000 Hz
The panels shall have Class 0 resistance to spread of flame and shall be non- combustible Class
0 to Parts 1 and 4 of BS 476. “Fire tests on building materials and structures”.
Suspended ceilings in wet rooms (toilets, showers etc.) shall be Aluminium spandrel type 100 mm
wide stripes ceiling.
Codes and Standards
ASTM E1637 – Standard Specification for Structural Standing Aluminium Roof

Panel Systems
B209 – Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate


The Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of the various disciplines (HVAC, lighting,
fire detection, etc.) and shall take into account the location of diffusers and lighting fixtures.
For each type of ceiling, representative prototypes shall be submitted to the Engineer's approval.
Those prototypes shall be fitted with all the equipment components.
Grid system
Suspended ceiling panels shall be laid in an exposed grid system of galvanized steel sections
suspended from the structure and fixed to true line and level. Each panel shall be adequately
clipped down and perimeter panels shall be suitably supported.
Suspension system
Suspension systems for suspended ceilings shall be manufactured from hot dip galvanized mild
steel flats and/or rods. Suspension systems shall be adequate to support the ceiling and maintain
lines and levels within required tolerances.
Suspension systems shall be independent of all services, etc.
25.7 QA/QC
specification.
25.8 Acceptance
specification.

26 PARTITION WALLS

This specification covers the scope of partition walls in accordance with clause
and complete in all parts in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this specification.


5.1.3.

All partition walls to use block wall construction as specified under Clause 5.16


26.7 QA/QC
specification.
26.8 Acceptance
specification.

27 FLOORING

This specification covers the scope of flooring works in accordance with clause
All work under this division shall comprise all required labour, equipment, and the supply of the
appurtenant materials and structural components including off-loading and storage at the site
unless otherwise specified.
Tiling and flooring shall be applied where indicated as per the finish schedule stated on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
All materials and structural components to be supplied and installed by the Contractor and,
therefore, ultimately incorporated in the work shall be new and unused. They shall be suitable for
their intended purpose and appropriately be matched to each other.
All materials and structural components shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall ascertain the Engineer’s selection of patterns and
colours and shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate samples of the patterns and colours of the
material selected by the Engineer.


5.1.3.

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant design criteria as specified in clause
5.1.4.

Flooring materials shall cover the following:

• Bonded cement screed

• PVC flooring
• Textile flooring
• Raised floor
They shall meet the following requirements as specified hereafter.
Cement screed
Materials for bonded cement screeds shall consist of
• Portland cement as specified for the relevant location or as instructed by the Engineer.
• Sand with following gradation
Sieve Percent passing

9.00 mm 100
4.75 mm 95 - 100
1.18 mm 45 - 65
0.30 mm 5 - 15
0.15 mm 0–5
• Coarse aggregate with following gradation
Sieve Percent passing

12.50 mm 100
9.00 mm 95 - 100
4.75 mm 40 - 60
2.36 mm 0-5
Dry weight proportion of mix shall be 1 part cement 1 part sand and 2 parts coarse aggregates.
All technical requirements shall be as specified under specification “Concrete Works”.
Carpet
Where no standards or quality specifications exist for textile carpet flooring, it shall have the
following properties:
• Dimensional stability,
• Colourfast,
• Lightfast,
• Water-fast of colours and print,
• Resistant to abrasion.
Carpet flooring shall be provided in the prayer room.
Raised floors
Where indicated, on the technical drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and erect removable
modular panels conforming to the following requirements.

Material
Composite panels made of high density (675 kg/m³) waterproof chipboard and aluminium sheets
for protection of the interior face. The panel edges shall be slightly chamfered (5°) and protected
by an aluminium profile or other conductive material. Topping shall be made of high pressure
laminate 1.3 mm thick.
Size of the panels
Normal size shall be 600 x 600 mm .
Tolerances 0.2 mm width and length
0.3 mm diagonal
0.2 mm thickness
Minimum thickness of the panels 40 mm.
Loading
 30 kN/m2
 The maximum allowed deformation shall be 2 mm under 5 kN point load.
 Minimum height of the free space between subfloor and raised floor surface:
• for cable basement 2.00 meter;
• for relay/electronic rooms 1.50 meter;
• for control rooms 1.00 meter.
except if noted otherwise in the execution drawings.
Substructure
The substructure shall consist of adjustable pedestals and stringers. The pedestals are glued to
the sub-base with an epoxy based two components glue or approved equivalent. In addition the
pedestals are to be fixed by bolts to the sub-base. The stringers are bolted to the pedestal so that
large cut-outs are possible.
• the whole system shall be constructed in such a way as to allow conductivity of

electrostatic charges and shall be connected to the earthing system.
• penetrations for cables and pipes shall be arranged
• to allow an elastic connection to abutting walls, a peripheral joint of 3 mm width shall be
arranged and sealed with an appropriate neoprene sealant.
Accessories to flooring
All adhesives shall have suitable properties to ensure a firm and durable bond. They shall not
adversely affect either the flooring or the underlays or the base and shall be odourless once
applied.
All underlays e.g. wool felt and cork felt slabs, hardboards, chipboards, hair felts, jute felts,
compressed cork, built-up corkboards, foamed materials, foam rubber shall provide an intimately
bonding base compatible with the adhesives proposed to be used. They shall not be subject to
attack from such adhesives and shall not give rise to odour grievance. They shall not decompose
nor change their texture or rot. They shall be adequately resistant to aging and shall not be
conducive to contamination by insects and fungi.
All fillers and levelling compounds shall have a firm and durable bond to the base, provide a good
bonding surface for the adhesive and be of suitable property to give an adequate support to the
covering. They shall have no adverse effect on base, adhesive and covering.

General
All materials and structural components shall be processed in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions.
Prior to the start of his operations under this division, the Contractor shall verify that all conditions
are suitable for the timely and effective performance of his work. Where unsuitable conditions are
found, they shall be reported in writing to the Engineer and under the Engineer's direction
immediately corrected.
Work shall be carefully laid out to ensure symmetry about centrelines of the area involved and to
obviate the use of less than half pieces of tiles, slabs, etc.
The work shall be executed with the highest degree of precision and according to the drawings
and specifications.
Preparation of surface
Before wall surfaces are covered with tiles, flags or mosaic to be set in normal mortar bedding, a
sprayed coating of cement mortar shall be applied to the base unless otherwise specified.
Where no adequately even surface is available for work involving thin beddings, special provisions
shall be made to compensate for this, e.g., rendering coat, screed.
The concrete surface for placing tiles, flags, terrazzo, screed, etc. shall be cleaned by wet
sandblasting and washed with water under pressure to produce the specified surface condition.
The concrete surface shall be kept thoroughly wet for a period of 24 hours prior to the placing of
tiles etc.
The screed coat of mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and four parts sand and shall
be worked to a true, level or plumb surface, finishing approximately 15 mm below finished level
for floors, borders, and thresholds and approximately 10 mm back of the finished face of bases
and other vertical surfaces.
The subsurface of floor coverings shall be cleaned carefully prior to commencement of work.
The base for coverings to be placed without underlay shall be smoothed with filler compound. In
the case of major unevenness, a suitable levelling compound shall be used.

Any filler or levelling compound shall be applied so that it will bond firmly and durably to the base,
without crack and adequately withstand to pressure.
Protection of flooring
All flooring work, such as PVC flooring, textile flooring, raised flooring, ceramic flooring, terrazzo
tiling, stairs, etc., shall be protected from any damage. Flooring access barriers to the individual
rooms shall be provided until the floorings can be walked on. Floorings shall be covered by
adequate means, such as sawmill, plastic foils of min. 1 mm thickness or similar protecting
materials. Before handing over, all flooring work shall be properly cleaned.
27.7 QA/QC
27.8 Acceptance

28 TILING

This specification covers the scope of tiling works in accordance with clause
All work under this division shall comprise all required labour, equipment, and the supply of the
appurtenant materials and structural components including off-loading and storage at the site
Tiling and flooring shall be applied where indicated as per the finish schedule stated on the
All materials and structural components to be supplied and installed by the Contractor and,
therefore, ultimately incorporated in the work shall be new and unused. They shall be suitable for
their intended purpose and appropriately be matched to each other.
All materials and structural components shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall ascertain the Engineer's selection of patterns and
colours and shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate samples of the patterns and colours of the
material selected by the Engineer.


5.1.3.

5.1.4.

Tiling materials shall cover the following:

• Tiles
• Ceramic tiles
• Vitrified tiles
• Marble
• Granite
• Porcelain
Acid proof tiles.
DIN 18352, DIN 12912, BS 5385 and BS 6431 shall be considered.
Requirements to be met as follows:
Tiles
Tiles shall have the following properties: sharp, straight, parallel, no crumbling edges, free from
soluble salt and other detrimental constituents; free from cracks and blisters; rear and side
surfaces capable of bonding effectively for placing, laying and jointing.
All tiles shall be of first class quality. They shall be of uniform size and even surface, free from
warps, laminations, serrated edges, chipped corners and other imperfections or flaws affecting
their quality, appearance and strength. Bases, stops, returns and caps shall be supplied as
required to provide a complete and neatly finished installation.
Ceramic floor and wall tiles
Glazed and/or unglazed ceramic tiles shall comply with the following requirements and properties.
They shall bear the identification mark of the manufacturer on the lower face in either positive or
negative embossment.
They shall be made from fine-grained vitrified sandstone ceramics of the highest quality. The
dimensions of the slabs shall be regular and constant, the upper surface plane, smooth and
flawless without a trace of fissures or blotches. The sides shall be perfectly straight and the
corners perfectly rectified. The shade and hue of the colouring shall be uniform.
They shall give a clear sound under a hammer stroke. They shall be nonporous, abrasion-
resistant (2.5 mm after 3,000 hours) flexion and shock resistant (250 g/m²).
Acid (hydrochloric, nitric and sulphuric acid) attacks shall be less than 2.5% of their weight and
their water absorbing capacity shall not be in excess of 1.5% of their dry weight. (ref. to DIN
51102-1 and DIN 51 102-2 or equivalent standards). Ceramic floor and walls shall be resistant to
98% concentrated acid (ref. to BS 5385 and BS 6431).
Colour will be selected by the Engineer.
Marble, granite and porcelain materials
Marble and granite floors or tiles shall be of first class quality and of size, colours, and kind as
selected by the Engineer.
Portland cement shall be white or grey as required by the colour scheme selected for the terrazzo.
The cement shall conform to the requirement specified under clause "Concrete Works” above.
BS 5385-5 shall be considered.
Marble and granite floors shall be provided in the following areas:
• Stairs
• Corridors
• Main entrance
• Elevator (inside)
• Kitchen floor
Porcelain floors shall be provided to all rooms in offices building.
Acid-proof tilling material
Acid-proof tiles shall be of ceramic material and be scored or dovetailed at the back for improving
the bonding properties and to give a good key.
The tiles shall be placed into synthetic resin cement such as
• Polyester resin
• Phenolic resin
• Furanic resin.

General
All materials and structural components shall be processed in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions.
Prior to the start of his operations under this division, the Contractor shall verify that all conditions
are suitable for the timely and effective performance of his work. Where unsuitable conditions are
found, they shall be reported in writing to the Engineer and under the Engineer's direction
immediately corrected.
Work shall be carefully laid out to ensure symmetry about centrelines of the area involved and to
obviate the use of less than half pieces of tiles, slabs, etc.
The work shall be executed with the highest degree of precision and according to the drawings
and specifications.
Preparation of surface

Before wall surfaces are covered with tiles, flags or mosaic shall be set in normal mortar bedding,
a sprayed coating of cement mortar shall be applied to the base unless otherwise specified.
Where no adequately even surface is available for work involving thin beddings, special provisions
shall be made to compensate for this, e.g., rendering coat, screed.
The concrete surface for placing tiles, flags, terrazzo, screed, etc. shall be cleaned by wet
sandblasting and washed with water under pressure to produce the specified surface condition.
The concrete surface shall be kept thoroughly wet for a period of 24 hours prior to the placing of
tiles etc.
The screed coat of mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and four parts sand and shall
be worked to a true, level or plumb surface, finishing approximately 15 mm below finished level
for floors, borders, and thresholds and approximately 10 mm back of finished face of bases and
other vertical surfaces.
The subsurface of floor coverings shall be cleaned carefully prior to commencement of work.
The base for coverings to be placed without underlay shall be smoothed with filler compound. In
the case of major unevenness, a suitable levelling compound shall be used.
Any filler or levelling compound shall be applied so that it will bond firmly and durably to the base,
will not crack and will adequately withstand pressure.
Placing
For interior finishing works, all tiles, flags, and mosaic shall only be set and laid after the fixing of
window and door frames and trims, stop rails, plumbing installations and the application of plaster
All tiles, flags, and mosaic shall be set or laid plumb, in true alignment and horizontal or at the
slope specified, without any projections, with regard to any specified reference and level lines.
In wall coverings, projections shall be allowed only to the extent dictated by the particular type of
tile or slab specified.
Any ceramic tiles, flags, or the like of sizes above 50/50 mm shall preferably be set or laid in
normal mortar bedding unless otherwise specified.
Mosaic tiles of sizes up to 50/50 mm shall be placed on a well prepared cement mortar sub-base
and glued with special adhesives. The Contractor shall guarantee the quality of the adhesives for
being compatible and resistant against the extreme local climatic conditions.
The Contractor shall produce certificates of the material used confirming the properties requested
for any of these materials.
The mortar composition shall be as follows:
Mortar Application Cements and Mix Ratio(Parts by Volume)

Sprayed coat 1:2 To 1:3

Rendering coat 1:3 To 1:4

Setting and laying
Inside 1:4 To 1:6
Outside 1:4 To 1:5
Sand for mortar material shall be clean, sharp and free from soluble salts or organic matters. The
cement quality shall conform to the Standards as specified under section "Concrete Works”.
Water shall be clean and fresh, free from deletions, amounts of acid silkaline organic matters or
other impurities.
Where floor drains are provided, the plans of the finished floor shall be sloped towards the drains.
Intersections and returns shall be formed accurately. Cutting of tiles, where necessary, shall be
done along the outer edges of the floor and done without marring the tile surfaces. Tiles shall fit
closely and neatly around all plumbing fixtures and around electrical outlets, pipes, fittings etc. so
that cover plates or escutcheons will overlap the tiles properly. Tiles shall be secured firmly in
place and loose tiles shall be removed and replaced.
Upon completion of the work, all surfaces of ceramic tiles shall be cleaned. Metal cleaning tools
or metal brushes or acid solutions shall not be used. Where imperfections occur in jointing, the
joint shall be raked back not less than 8 mm in depth and the joint pointed full and tooled smooth
to match adjoining work. All tile and carpet work shall be adequately protected against damage
from subsequent building operations, both before and after cleaning by means of polyethylene
plastic foil of minimum 1 mm thickness.
For the setting and laying of tiles, flags and mosaic by the thin bed process with special adhesives,
the manufacturers' processing instructions shall be observed.
Jointing
The widths of joints shall suit the type of tiles and flags used, the purpose and stress of the
coverings and the type of jointing chosen. The joints shall be equal in width.
Jointing shall be by the washing-in method unless otherwise specified. Cement mortar shall be
used in jointing unless otherwise specified. For jointing wall coverings of glass walling panels,
permanent elastic sealing compounds shall be used.
All expansion and connecting joints shall be closed with suitable sealing compounds unless other
means are specified e.g. elastic joint sections, open joints.
The joints between floor and wall tiles and the vertical corner connections shall be closed with an
elastic sealing compound in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Protection of flooring
All flooring work, such as PVC flooring, textile flooring, raised flooring, ceramic flooring, terrazzo
tiling, stairs, etc., shall be protected from any damage. Flooring access barriers to the individual
rooms shall be provided until the floorings can be walked on. Floorings shall be covered by
adequate means, such as sawmill, plastic foils of min. 1 mm thickness or similar protecting
materials. Before handing over, all flooring work shall be properly cleaned.

28.7 QA/QC
28.8 Acceptance

28.9 SANITARY INSTALLATION

28.9.1 General
This specification covers sanitary installation work in accordance with clause

The work under this division comprises the design, supply and installation of the complete
plumbing system and sanitary fixtures and shall be carried out in compliance with local rules and
regulations for plumbing installations and in accordance with the Specifications and drawings
defined hereafter. The work to be done under this division consists of installing all types and sizes
of water pipes, tubing, valves, fittings, fixtures etc.
Outdoor drainage works are specified under Clause "Drainage works", while this chapter is
deemed to cover all indoor sewage and water disposal.
The Contractor shall prior to commencement of the works, prepare and submit to the Engineer
detailed drawings, indicating the layout and schematic diagram of all piping, fittings and valves,
the position of sanitary fixtures, floor drains, water heaters, etc. Piping shall be indicated by
diameter, slope and invert level. Outside the building, connection points to general water
distribution and drainage system shall be provided.
The installation of the plumbing system shall be arranged in “installation walls” where the second
skin shall be erected after the assembly of the plumbing work itself. Necessary extensions of
piping up to surface of the second wall shall be considered. Furthermore, the installation shall be
coordinated with the relevant tiling layout. Standard heights of pipe connections shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
28.9.2 Materials
All materials and structural components to be supplied, erected, or installed by the Contractor
and, therefore, ultimately incorporated in the work shall be new and unused, and of selected
quality approved by the Engineer.
They shall appropriately match to each other.
All materials and structural components not standardized shall be used only with the approval of
the Engineer.
All materials and accessories for piping, valves, and fittings shall be of the best grade and quality
to suit the requirement. All manufactured item shall be standard commercial products of reputable
manufacturers.
Prior to placing order, the Contractor shall in any case submit a description and/or drawings
showing all technical characteristics, make, type and address of manufacturer, etc. of the offered
materials for approval by the Engineer.
All materials shall be in accordance with ISO, BS, ANSI, DIN or other accepted standards.

• UPVC drainage pipes made to BS EN 13598-1, BS EN 607/ BS EN

12200-1 BS EN 1462
• UPVC water pipes & fittings made to BS EN 1452-2 Class ‘E’, BS EN 1452-1,
1452-3, 1452-4 and EN 1452-5
• Poly propylene pipes made to BS 7291 Class ‘H’
• Copper pipe made to BS EN 1057-2/BS, EN 12449/ BS EN
12451
• Galvanized mild steel pipe made of BS EN 10255 galvanizing
• 50 microns
• Cast iron pipe made to BS EN 877
• Ductile iron pipe made to BS ISO 2531/BS EN 545
• Vitrified clay pipe made to BS EN 295
Minimum quality requirements of materials
General requirements
The general requirements for the sanitary installation works shall be as specified below:
• Potable water pipes inside the buildings from the valve chamber up to the fixtures
• Poly propylene pipes for cold water, diameter 15 to 50 mm, including all required fittings;
nominal pressure NP 16 (16 bar).
• Poly propylene pipes for hot water, including all required fittings, between water heater
and fixtures.
• Storm water and sanitary sewer pipes inside the buildings wrapped in P.E. insulation and
concreted in
• UPVC Class E pressure pipes, push fit sockets.
• Ductile cast iron pipes, either joint or joint less with couplings, diameter 50 to 200 mm,
including all required fittings.
• Service water hose-bib’s with, quick connections and flexible hose of 10 m.
• Cast iron pipes with enamel lining or poly ethylene pipes including all required joint
couplings and fittings shall be used in the water treatment building.
• Salt glazed earthen ware, acid proof including all required joint couplings and fittings shall
be used in the water treatment building up to the neutralization pit.
• Sanitary fixtures as washbasin units, WC sets, eastern squatting WC pan, urinal basins,
showers with shower basins, storage water heaters, sink basins, kitchen sink, etc.,
according to relevant drawings and technical specification, shall be installed with all
necessary accessories and as recommended by the Manufacturer.
Sanitary fixtures
All fixtures specified as hereinafter and shown on the plans shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor in a neat and finished manner, making connections with all supply, waste, soil, and
vent pipes complete in every respect, including electrical connections where applicable.
General requirements for fixtures shall be the following:
• Where required by the Engineer and at any time, a fixture sample of each type designated
on the drawings or in this Technical Specification shall be submitted for approval. The
samples shall be completely fitted and set up at the building or in some other convenient
approved “Mock-up” area.
• The approved fixture sample shall be kept and protected at all times for comparison
purposes until released by the Engineer for removal. All fixtures of poorer quality than the
approved samples will be rejected.
• Any plumbing fixtures shall be of the selected and approved quality as specified
hereinafter fabricated by a manufacturer of established reputation.
28.9.3 Execution of work
General
All parts of sanitary installations shall be suitably adapted to each other so that the required
performance is achieved, safety in operations ensured and corrosion processes largely reduced.
The Contractor shall prepare installation, foundation, block out, and penetration drawings based
on the construction drawings and shall reconcile these with the Engineer's requirements.
Where pipe routing is left to the Contractor's discretion, he shall after receipt of the guide drawings
from the Engineer prepare the detailed and accurate pipe arrangement plans and obtain the
Engineer’s approval early enough to ensure that the necessary block outs and recesses can be
provided. The Engineer's approval shall not be deemed to limit the Contractor's responsibility in
any way.
The Contractor shall arrange for any approvals and acceptance required from local authority for
the execution of the works.
The local regulations concerning connections to utility services shall be complied with.
In carrying out the works, the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations shall
be followed.
For pipe connections not made for longitudinal forces, e.g., socket joints, in which an internal
pressure normally exists or may arise owing to particular operating conditions, the Contractor
shall, especially at changes of direction, secure the pipes against sliding apart (at pressure tests
and under operating conditions) by fixing them to abutments or thrust-blocks. All reaction forces
from expansion members, compensators, and vibration dampers shall be absorbed by “fix points”
in the piping.
Fittings and connections to sanitary ware shall be arranged at the intersection of joints in tiling,
wherever possible. The Contractor shall obtain pertinent information in good time like:
• Type of fixing (bolting, mortar or glue),

• Height of tile skirting,
• Size of tiles,
• Joint width,
• Exact definition of walls on which tile-laying is to start,
• Distance of first tile from these walls as measured at a height of 1m from
the finished floor.
The Contractor shall prepare the operating and maintenance instructions required for the proper
and safe operation of all plumbing and sanitary plant or parts thereof. He shall submit these to
the Engineer upon acceptance of the plant together with as-built drawings, schematic diagrams,
and descriptions of the installed plant, as well as manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
Pipes and fittings
UPVC class ‘E’ and poly propylene Class ‘H’ (cold & hot water) shall be generally used for potable
water. Inside the building, the pipes shall be embedded in the walls (running in sleeves) except
where distribution pipes are installed in the suspended ceilings or in cases where the Engineer
decides to install surface-mounted pipes. Piping shall be insulated with rubber-foam insulation
wrapping bandage or other approved material.
Inside building, the main trunk shall be equipped with two isolating valves and one non-return
valve. At least two breather and de-aerators (air vents) shall be provided at the highest point of
the piping.
All required fittings, such as full-bore valves, non-return valves, angle valves, strainer, discharge
taps, etc., shall be made of red brass or other material, to the approval by the Engineer.
All exposed parts shall be chromium-plated, including “tail pipes” between angle valve and
fixtures.
Distribution piping shall be laid out as to avoid formation of permanent air traps in the lines. De-
aeration and drain devices shall be provided. Block outs and drilling of holes for pipes and all
necessary fastening of pipes, ducts, and other equipment, concreting in and touching up shall be
included in the lump sum for Sanitary Installation.
Pipes and fittings to be embedded in concrete shall be held firmly in position and protected from
damage while the concrete is being placed. No wood supports shall be embedded in concrete. In
the installation of all piping, care shall be taken to prevent the piping from becoming clogged
during the progress of the work and should any pipe become either partially or wholly clogged
before acceptance of the work, it shall be cleaned out by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory
to the Engineer or shall be replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor. Open ends of pipe
shall be plugged or otherwise suitably closed when work is suspended for any reason.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, vertical pipes shall be plumb, horizontal pipes shall
be level, and where two or more adjacent pipes extend in the same direction, they shall be parallel.
Pipes passing through floors, walls, ceilings, and partitions shall be run through metal sleeves of
the proper diameter and the annular space between the pipe and the sleeves shall be caulked.
All embedded piping shall be installed to the correct elevations, gradient, and alignment as shown
on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. Insulation of pipes shall be made in accordance
with the appropriate standards.
All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established on the job and shall be worked into
place without springing or forcing, unless cold springing is specified. Connections to equipment
shall be made such that no stress will be placed thereon because of improper alignment or
hanging. Certain equipment will require special piping provisions, and the Contractor shall comply
with all manufacturers’ instructions in this respect.
Special equipment, such as pressure gauges, pressure reducing valves, sight glasses, etc. shall
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
All valves shall be installed vertically except where lack of clearance space or where accessibility
requires otherwise or where otherwise specified. Great care shall be taken in setting out and
determining the general levels and falls of drain pipes, so that a fall giving a self-cleaning velocity
shall be obtained.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary stoppers, etc., and shall test the drains and pipes in
the presence of the Engineer.
If any piping is found to be unsatisfactory in any way, the relevant part of it shall be removed and
re-laid at the Contractor's expense.
Before covering or insulating the pipework, pressure tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
Jointing of pipes
Jointing of pipes shall be made according to the different types of pipes by solvent-weld, caulked
lead, screwing, welding, flanges, or flexible joints, etc., joints between copper piping shall be by
means of copper-alloy unions.
Care shall be taken to ensure that all piping and fittings are clean internally and free from particles
of sand, soil metal fittings and chips, etc.
Placing of sanitary fixtures
When equipment and fixtures are installed, the Contractor shall install such types of fixing devices
as are required to provide for the convenient removal of the equipment and fixtures.
The Contractor shall submit leaflets or catalogues to determine design and shape of accessories,
such as sanitary equipment, valves, etc.
Lavatory brackets, cisterns, etc., shall be sufficiently fixed to the walls, if deemed necessary by
the Engineer, by bolts going through the wall.
All necessary electrical parts shall be of a type to suit the local conditions and shall be in
compliance with the relevant standards, for electrical equipment and shall comply with the
manufacturer's instructions in respect of installation.
Earthing of metal parts
The Contractor shall ensure electrical continuity of all pipeline networks, as installed by him.
Spare parts
The Contractor shall supply the necessary spare parts to the site to ensure the maintenance and
repair of the equipment throughout the warranty period.
28.9.4 Project requirements
General
All fixtures and equipment specified hereafter are the types and models to be provided for this
project, they shall be submitted for approval.
Ceramic fixtures
All ceramic fixtures shall be of best quality, regular selection, white porcelain thoroughly fused,
producing a white material which, when fractured, shall show a homogeneous mass with close
grain and free from pores. All surfaces coming in contact with walls, floors, or surfaces or other
fixtures shall be reasonably flat in accordance with applicable standards.
Cast iron fixtures
Enamelled cast iron fixtures shall be the best quality and thickness necessary to form fixtures of
the best commercial grade manufactures. Porcelain enamel coat on the surfaces required to be
enamelled shall be applied so that the enamel shall be smooth, of even thickness, white and free
from cracks, discolouration and chips. Exterior exposed surfaces not required to be enamelled
shall be treated with one coat of filler at the factories. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
revisions of the connection required to adapt the roughing sleeves and openings to the particular
fixture he proposes to use.
Installation of fixtures
• All fixtures shall have the manufacturer's label or trade mark indicating first quality.
• All fixtures requiring hot and cold water shall have the cold water tap on the right hand
side of the fixture and the hot water on the left side of the fixture.
• All fixtures shall be of the same manufacture, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
• All plumbing fixtures installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions for conditions indicated and as required to obtain a rigid installation. The
location of each fixture and the fixing method of ceramic fixtures shall be as shown on the
• The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all plumbing fixtures against damage
from building materials, acids, tools and equipment
• After complete installation of all fixtures and before leaving the job, the Contractor shall
thoroughly clean all fixtures furnished and mounted under this Contract, remove all
plaster, stickers, rust stains and other foreign matter or discolourations of fixtures, leaving
every part in perfect condition and ready for use.
• Any accessories for fixtures of steel shall be supplied, adequately protected against
corrosion and receive at least one (1) finishing coat of enamel.
Sanitary wares & fittings
Lavatory basin – type I
Wash hand basin shall be nominal size 560 mm wide x 450 mm deep and shall be white, wall
mounted and provided with tap hole, overflow. The basin shall be with pedestal, in white, pre-
punched for single tap hole as approved by the Engineer. The basin shall be complete with slotted
strainer waste and chrome plated deep seal bottle trap.
The tap for the basin shall be high quality deck mounted or equal and approved with
copper tail pipes and angled stop cocks.
The following accessories will be required:
• Porcelain shelf to match, approx. 560mm long

• Mirror, approx. 560mm long x 500mm height

• Chrome plated soap tray
• Chrome plated ash tray
• Chrome plated towel rail 800mm long
Lavatory basin – type II
Wash hand basin shall be nominal size 560 mm wide x 430 mm deep and shall be white, semi
recessed mounted and provided with tap hole, overflow. The basin shall be, pre-punched for
single tap hole as approved by the Engineer. The basin shall be complete with slotted strainer
waste and chrome plated deep seal bottle trap.
The tap for the basin shall be high quality deck mounted or equal and approved with
copper tail pipes and angled stop cocks.
Cleaners sink
The cleaners sink shall be white glazed fire clay heavy duty 445 mm wide with 150 mm high
splash back and bucket grating and PVC pad as approved by the Engineer with bucket grating,
size 50 mm strainer waste and 2 wall brackets with fixing screws.
The tap for the cleaners sink shall be a wall mounted chromium plated mixer with spout.
Western WC
White porcelain floor mounted toilet bowl, complete with matching low level wall mounted
porcelain cistern of 12-15 litre capacity.
The wash-down WC-bowl shall be fitted with S- or P-trap 100 mm drain connection.
The cistern will be connected to the mains water via a 12 mm chromed angle valve, the water-
level will be maintained by a 12 mm ball-valve with copper float.
The following accessories will also be provided:
• Matching toilet seat and cover in white plastic

• Hand spray with angle valve and hand trigger, 100 cm long hose
• Toilet roll holder
• Ash tray
• Coat hook
• Toilet brush set
Asian squatting WC
White ceramic squatting plate (500x400mm approx.), with raised treads for flush installation at
floor level. The “wash-down” bowl shall be suitable for either P- or S-trap connection, 4” dia.
The high level cistern shall be wall mounted (where possible above false ceiling level), and have
a capacity of 12-15 litres. The enamelled cast iron or white ceramic cistern shall be connected to
the WC-bowl via a recessed 38 mm flush pipe.
The cistern will be connected to the mains water via a 12 mm angle valve, the water level will be
maintained by a 12 mm ball valve with copper float. The flushing will be “chain pull operated”.
The following accessories will also be required:
• Hand spray with angle valve and hand trigger, 100 cm long hose
• Toilet roll holder
• Ash tray
• Coat hook
• Toilet brush set
• 2 hand grips, 25 cm long each
Showers
Shower basin of cast iron, white enamel coated, or of white glassed ceramic, acid and alkali
resistant of size 90 x 90 x 15 cm deep. It shall be complete with 38 mm strainer drain with plug
and chain. The drain shall be connected to the nearest floor drain.
The 12 mm recessed shower mixer consists of the following:
• Single lever mixer / hot & cold

• 3 way diverter valve 18 mm
• One (1) shower arm 12 mm
• One (1) shower head with ball joint and adjustable / variable flow pattern control
• One (1) plastic hand shower with 1.25 m long shower hose, complete with wall mounting
bracket.
• 1 low level spout – for foot rinsing etc.
Additionally, each shower cubicle shall be provided with the following chrome plated accessories:
• Hand grip 25 cm long

• Towel rail 80 cm long
• Soap tray
• Clothes hook
• Curtain rail with shower curtain
Showers - alternative
The “shower-basin” may be formed as a tiled recess in the floor, in this case a “regular-floor drain”
– as described hereafter – shall be installed below the shower head.
The size of the stainless steel grating shall match the tile layout – either 10 x 10 cm or 15 x 15
cm.
All other details of the shower mixer and the accessories remain the same.
Emergency shower
Emergency showers (without shower trays) will be located near the exits of laboratories or other
“hazardous areas”.
The following requirements shall be fulfilled:

• Flow rate 60 - 80 litre/minute

• Stainless steel shower arm with 100 mm dia shower head
• Alternatively wall mounted “deluge shower head”
• Chain stay or push button for automatic release of water flow
• Regular floor drain with 150 x 150 mm stainless steel grating
Stainless steel sink (for pantry’s etc.)
Stainless steel sinks shall be of satin polished chrome nickel 18/10 material. They shall be the
single bowl drains “Inset” type as approved by the Engineer overall dimensions of 860 mm x 435
mm x 150 mm deep complete with 38 mm chrome plated strainer, plug and chain and deep seal
bottle trap.
Taps for sinks shall be high quality deck mounted. Additionally, also 2 stop cocks.
Water tap / hose bib
Water taps for cold water shall be chromium plated red brass and connected to 12 mm pipes via
screwed gunmetal “back plate elbows”.
Taps shall be equipped with threaded hose connection. 10 meter 12 mm flexible hose shall be
provided for each hose bib, stored on a wall-rack.
Refrigerated drinking water fountains
Free-standing, stainless steel bodied, refrigerated drinking water fountain shall comply with the
following requirements:
• Receptor and grille are to be manufactured of heavy gauge stainless steel with No. 4 satin
finish. Resistant to wear, moisture perspiration, heat and sunlight. Designed to be easily
accessible and aesthetically appealing suited for installation in public places.
• Bubbler features, single stream, self-closing, push button operated integral volume
control for maintaining proper stream height. Also to include hood guard and anti-squirt
feature.
• Evaporator/chiller water design concept combines counter flow cooling with efficient
bonding of the refrigerant and water coils for maximum heat transfer. Evaporator shall be
all copper construction.
• Temperature control shall be effected via a positive sensing thermostat for controlling
temperature of evaporator/chiller storage water. Factory set at 50ºF, field adjustable
+/5ºF.
• Fan motor bearing shall be of the self-lubricating type for maintenance free longer life.
• Condenser shall be of copper/aluminium construction. Molded shroud prevents warpage
caused by high humidity conditions.
• Insulation system provided for evaporator/chiller employs totally encapsulated one piece
construction of high efficiency EPS for maximum insulating characteristics.
• Refrigerant system shall be utilising high displacement compressors, counter flow cooling
evaporator/chiller, efficient capillary sizing, large capacity dryer strainer, fan cooled
condenser with maximum heat exchange, hermetically sealed, positive start compressor
with life time lubrication and built-in overload protection. System completely sealed after
deep evacuation, dehydration, and pressure testing at 235 psig. Electrical
rating/connection 200 volt, single phase, 60 HZ. Power requirement 425 watt. Full load
Amps 5.5 A.
Electrical water heaters
Hot water heaters shall be either horizontal or vertical type depending upon the space availability.
Heaters shall be fitted with electric immersion heating elements to give the maximum output kW.
Vessel shall be constructed to the Section IV of the ASME code for 125 PSI working pressure.
Vessel shall be glasslined with magnesium anode protection, and fitted with a safety valve
combination.
Entire vessel and electrical controls shall be encased in a rectangular or cylindrical sheet metal
enclosure with baked enamel finish. Tank shall be insulated with fibre glass or EPU foam.
Enclosure shall have hinged locking doors over electric controls. Heating elements shall be
complete with prewired terminal leads, control with circuits, master pilot switch etc. A thermostatic
control of contacts shall be provided to balance the water heating input to the actual demand.
Water heaters shall be high quality, anti-corrosion tank.
The individual capacity shall be as follows:
• Approx. 80 - 100 litres for lavatory basins and pantry sinks and cleaners sinks
• 80 - 100 litres for showers
Electrical hand dryer
Hygienic hand dryer which operates automatically, when hands are held underneath it, and
switches off when hands are removed. Heater loading 1.65 kW.
Necessary electrical connections shall be included.
Regular floor drains
All wet rooms shall have floor drains of epoxy coated cast iron with bosses for direct connection
to the drain system. The trap shall be covered with grating made of stainless steel 18-8, size
15/15 cm. Floor drains shall have outlets of DN 70 or DN 100, a water-seal of 60 mm minimum
shall be achieved.
Floor drains for water treatment/chemical areas
All drains which need to be connected to the neutralization pit shall be acid resistant. Floor drains
shall be of such construction that an accurate and tight connection to the discharge pipe can be
achieved. Outlets shall be for DN 70 or 100, a water-seal of 60 mm minimum shall be achieved.
Coat hooks
Fabricated of stainless steel with satin finish. Flange shall be equipped with concealed 1.5 mm
mounting bracket which locks to concealed stainless steel wall plate with stainless steel set screw.
Waste box
Waste box shall be supplied for fixing to walls at suitable places. They shall consist of a separate
waste box of light metal beneath; material duranodic aluminium.
Mirrors
Mirror shall be framed with one piece satin finish stainless steel angle (19 mm x 19 mm) with arc
welded corner.
Provide mirrors with 1 mm galvanized steel back with formed edges for additional strength,
equipped with integral horizontal hanging brackets secured with concealed Phillips head locking
screws. Back of mirror shall be protected by shock absorbing waterproof, non-abrasive 6 mm
thick polystyrene padding. Floating/ plate glass mirror shall be guaranteed for minimum 10 years
against silver spoilage and be protected on edges by high impact plastic filler strips.
Soap dispensers
Fabricate unit of satin finish stainless steel with vandal resistant mounting, hinged filler top and
polycarbonate refill window. Stainless steel container shall have a capacity of 1.18 litres.
Paper-towel dispenser & waste receptacle
Fabricate unit entirely of stainless steel welded construction. Door shall be attached to cabinet by
concealed full length stainless steel piano hinge.
Paper towel dispenser shall be adjustable to dispense C-fold or Multi-fold paper towels.
Waste receptacle shall have stainless steel, self-closing, push door covering receptacle opening
with international graphic symbol. Unit shall be furnished with removable leak proof, waste
container.

29 FURNITURE

This specification covers furnishing in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this specification.
The design and execution shall be state of the art, functional and complete in all parts in
accordance with this specification to provide a building or the rooms ready for perfect use. All
supplied furniture shall comply with the latest prevailing design and shall meet the requirements
for their utilisation.
During transportation and delivery all items shall be properly protected against damage and
suitable care shall be taken during installation.
The list of items given hereafter only covers basic furnishings and may not be complete in any
way.
The EPC Contractor shall submit drawings, illustrations, brochures, samples and materials to be
used etc. to the Engineer for approval before starting with furnishing. The Engineer reserves the
right to order changes to be made in the drawings, the performance of construction and furnishing.


5.1.3.
29.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Drawings, Execution

5.1.4.
The standard for furnishing is principally of high quality, no low budget products will be accepted.
This includes all single furniture such as chairs, tables, containers, sideboards, cabinets, couches,
etc as well as built-in furniture, built in cabinets, built in kitchens, kitchen equipment, appliances,
utensils as well as crockery, cutlery, etc.
The specification shall be applicable for all furnishings and appliances for all offices, conference
rooms, archives, halls, locker rooms, bath rooms, kitchens, and other wet rooms, etc. of all
buildings for the power and desalination plant.
Quality Standards

All articles are to be of the best quality and are to meet the highest technical standard available
on the international market.
The Contractor should try to differentiate between the various categories of personnel by using
various furnishing standards while meeting the high quality demands:
Category A: Managers
Category B: Chief Operators and Maintenance Engineers
Category C: Secretaries, Operators, Technicians etc.
Category A - Offices and Meeting Rooms for Managers
Wall cabinets with shelves: built-in sectional, room-high for files, paper etc. One
cabinet section as wardrobe, front oak.
Manger’s desk: chromium plated structure, surface leatheroak,1.00m x

2.40m
Manager’s chairs: swivel armchair, high back, leather upholstery, Swivel

base chrome and 4 chairs with leather upholstery and fixed
base
Sideboard: chrome, surface oak for telephone and others
One conference table: round or oval, oak, chrome plated metal frame, 8 chairs,
chrome, leather
One low table: steel-glass, rectangular or round (matching with armchair
Low wall cabinet sliding doors, shelves, front matching to others
Equipment: one Dictaphone, one telephone with direct PT line, one fax
connection, one PC with 24” flat screen latest design and
colour laser printer
Two table lamps: office type with vertical blinds or drapes, modern design
One laminated white board: fixed to the wall, 5 m²Vertical blinds or drapes
One cork board: 2.00m x 1.00m
One hat stand: chromium plated support structure1 (one)
Couches with comfortable seating shall be provided as follows:
• 2 Seater couch (2 number)

• 3 Seater Coach (2 number)
• Single seat armchair (4 number)
All necessary hardware components and stationary shall be included. For the distribution of
electric cabling for telephone, computer outlets etc. shall be considered for all furniture.
Category B - Offices and Meeting Rooms for Chief Operators and Maintenance Engineers
Built-in sectional wall cabinets with shelves, room-high for files, paper etc.
One cabinet section as wardrobe.
Front: oak
One desk: chrome, surface oak 1.00m x 2.00 m
Sideboard: chrome, surface oak for telephone and others
One conference table: round or oval, oak, chrome plated metal frame, 4 chairs,
chrome, leather
One armchair: swivel, chrome, leather with high backLow
wall cabinet: sliding doors, shelves, front oak
One table lamp: office type, modern design
Vertical blinds or drapes:
One laminated white board: fixed to the wall, 5 m²
One cork board: 2.00m x 1.00m
One hat stand: chromium plated support structure
Equipment: Desktop PC with 24” flat screen latest design and colour
laser printer
Couch with comfortable seating shall be provided with 3 seats
All necessary hardware components and stationary shall be included.
Category C - Offices for Office Assistance, Operators and Technicians
Sectional wall cabinets: adjustable shelves, one section as wardrobe
One desk: 0.80m x 1.60m, wooden elements with melamine finish,

colour according to choice, sideboard for type writer or
computer, compartments for paper
One chair: swivel, metal, fabric upholstery
One chair: matching, fabric upholstery
Low cabinet: sliding doors, shelves, front matches desk

Equipment: Desktop PC with 24” flat screen latest design.Jalousies

or vertical blinds:
All necessary hardware components and stationary shall be included.
Meeting
Sufficient desks, cabinets, sideboards, container for accessories, tables, chairs, armchairs and
couches, of a modular system, of an elegant shape, safe and ergonomic, hard-wearing and easy
to clean. All cabinets, sideboards and containers, etc shall have safe locks.
Meeting Room Type 1
Sectional wall cabinets as described above.
Conference table for at least 20 persons, chrome plated metal, surface wood, matching pertinent
office, 30 chairs leather upholstery, chrome plated steel frame with upholstered arms.
Vertical blinds or drapes.
Equipment:
One LAN network connection
5m magnetic rails for drawings
One telephone set

Socket and data connections integrated in the floor and furniture
Projector and white board (5m wide)
Meeting Room Type 2
Sectional wall cabinets as described above.
Conference table for at least 12 persons, chrome plated metal, surface wood, matching pertinent
office, 12 chairs leather upholstery, chrome plated steel frame with upholstered arms.
Vertical blinds or drapes.
Equipment:
5m magnetic rails for drawings
One telephone set
1 Projector and white board (3.5m wide)
Conference Room
Equipment:
Tables (10 number)
Chairs (4 number per table)
1 projector and white board (5m wide)
One telephone set
Archive
Sectional wall cabinets: As described above, but not less than 10 linear meters. Front:
wooden elements with melamine coating, colour according to
choice, free standing book shelves (adjustable), at least 30
linear meters, matching cabinets and tables for 4 people.
Drawing filing cabinets: 6 Nos. for A0 drawings
Cabinets with drawers: for CD Rom
4 chairs: metal fabric upholstery
Equipment: desk lamps for 4 people
One copy machine A4/A3 with auto sort and double- sided
printing facilities.
One PC with A4 laser printer
One PC with A3 laser printer, colour
Jalousies or vertical blinds.
Common Rooms / Mess Rooms for Management/staff
Sufficient tables, chairs, armchairs and couches with side tables, of a modular system, with an
elegant shape, safe and ergonomic, hardwearing and easy to clean.
The furniture shall be of a modular and stackable system, easy to transport and store, but shall
be non-foldable.
A trolley system shall be provided for easy transport and storage. The number of the furniture
shall be according to the number of people using corresponding offices and shall take account of
a maximum number of 30 visitors.
Kitchens
Built-in-kitchens, ready to use with furniture (floor cabinets with work tops, sink and wall cabinets),
equipment, domestic appliances, accessories, utensils, etc, of a modular system, with an elegant
shape, safe and ergonomic, hardwearing and easy to clean.
Front: coloured or off-white, scratch-proof, light-fast
Work-top: heavy-duty type, scratch-proof, light-fast
Drawers and shelves: easy to move rail system, arrangement as to the needs
Sinks: round, with fittings as described in the sanitary section
Equipment: Floor type hot-air oven with exhaust hood
Microwave oven
Floor type refrigerator three star, 120 l, deep frosting

box
Automatic dishwasher
The number of the kits shall be according to the number of people using the corresponding rooms
(offices, workshops, etc.).
Prayer Rooms
Several carpets, amount depending on the size of room and the amount of operation personnel
at the station. Approval of material, colour, size, amount etc. of the carpets is to the decision of
the Engineer.
Book shelves and loudspeaker system as approved.
The prayer room, on the second floor, shall be furnished with a sound system to cover all of the
Auxiliary Building.
Storage and Filing Systems
Mobile filing system
Scope
Complete modular mobile filing system for optimised usage of storage space, for dust protected
safely locked filing of various goods. It shall be of an elegant design, safe and solid construction,
easy to transport, simple to use and economic to maintain.
The filing systems shall be installed in the record rooms of, i.e. in the
• Central Control Room

• Administration Building
• Workshops
• Gatehouses
• Etc.
Requirements
• Filed goods shall be dust protected

• Safe filing by locks outside the mobile units
• Units shall roll on rails, automatically moved by gearbox(es) on each unit with sufficient
safeguards by active and passive safety systems.
• Accessories for storage of files, documents, boxes, etc.
• Galvanized steels, already painted and covered when delivered

• Assembling of the parts without welding
Mobile storage system
Scope
Complete mobile storage system for optimized usage of storage space for filing of various goods.
It shall be a safe and solid construction, easy to transport, simple to use and economic to maintain.
A two-faced pallet storage system shall be installed in the storage areas of the
• Electrical Store
• Mechanical Store
• Carpenters Workshop
The design of the units shall be for the storage of almost any kind of material, from metal
containers to boxes of almost any size, pallets of finished machinery up to entire machine bodies.
Requirements
The two-faced pallet storage system shall be most frequently moving 1200 mm standard pallets
with a lifting capacity up to 3000 kg by various lifting heights. The movement of the rail based
mobile units shall be electrical and can be effected by pressing a button on the front side of each
section and by a radiofrequency controlled system via a control panel being placed on the forklift.
The dimensions and loads for the units depend on the typical goods to be stored.
• Galvanized steels, already painted and covered when delivered

• Assembling of the parts without welding.



The execution of all works to be done shall be in accordance with clause 5.1.6 of this specification.
29.7 QA/QC
29.8 Acceptance

30 OUTDOOR FACILITIES

This specification covers roads, parking places, walkways and corresponding facilities in
accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of this specification. The design and execution shall be
state of the art, functional and complete in all parts in accordance with this specification.
Paving and surfacing required for this work includes but is not necessarily limited to supply,
storage and transport of materials, equipment, mixing and placing, all tests, workmanship and
finishing of roads and surfacing.
The actual thickness of road-courses shall be calculated based on the final results of the soil
investigation, loads, intensity of traffic, design life, etc.
Walkway around all buildings is required. Walkway shall have a width of at least 1.2 m and shall
be made of interlock with concrete kerbstone 35 cm height and 40 cm long.

Sub-Base
Sub-base material shall be crushed rock or other approved local material having suitable
properties and confirming to the following grading:-
BS Sieve Percentage by Weight
mm Passing
75 100
37.5 85 - 100
10 45 - 100
5 25 - 85
0.6 8 - 45
0.075 0 – 10
When tested to BS 812 the material shall have a minimum "ten percent fines" value of 5. The
material passing the 0.425 sieve shall have a plasticity index of less than 6.
Wet Mix Road Base

Wet Mix road base material shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed rock and shall be suitably
proportioned to confirm to the following grading as approved by the Engineer.
BS Sieve Size Percentage by Weight
Mm Passing
50 100
37.5 90 - 100
20 60 - 80
10 40 - 60
5.00 25 - 40
2.36 15 - 30
0.600 8 - 22
0.075 0–8
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm sieve shall not be greater than two-thirds of the fraction
passing the 0.425 mm sieve.
Material constituents shall comply with the following maximum limits:
For material passing the 0.425 mm sieve:
Liquid limit 25%
Linear shrinkage 3%
Plasticity index 6%
For coarse material:
Stone Size Aggregate 50 mm
Aggregate crushing value 25%
Water absortion 2%
Flakiness index 35%
Elongation index 35%
Mg SO4 soundness 15%
Quarry won material shall be extracted from faces and areas approved by the Engineer. The
aggregate crushing value shall be monitored by regular testing of material prior to its inclusion in
the construction.
The material shall be spread evenly on the sub-base in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted
thickness. Segregation shall be avoided during transport and placing and any segregation evident
after compaction shall be corrected by vibrating in non-plastic fines or made good by removing
and replacing with properly graded material.
The base shall be compacted by approved plant to a dry density which shall be not less than 98%
relative compaction and until movement of the surface ceases and the surface is closed. The
completed layer shall have an in-situ CBR of not less than 80%.
The final surface shall be shaped and finished true to line and level within a tolerance of + 10 mm
to the levels shown on the drawings.
Chlorides and Sulphates
The level of the acid-soluble chloride (as NaCI) (BS EN 1744) in the sub-base and road base
layers shall not exceed 3.5% and 0.5% by weight respectively.
The level of acid-soluble sulphate (as S03) (BS EN 1744) in the sub-base and road base raiders
shall not exceed 2.0% and 0.5% by weight respectively.
Potable water shall be used for compaction purposes.
Hard Shoulders
The material used for any hard shoulders shall comply with the specification for wet-mix road
base.
Bitumen Macadam – General
Aggregate shall be hard, clean, durable crushed rock or gravel, and sand all in accordance with
BS 4987-1 and shall be obtained from approved source which shall not include quarries
containing significant proportions of weather bed, decomposed or extensively fractured materials.
The Contractor shall propose a suitable source, or sources, and samples shall be obtained for
specified testing before arrangements for obtaining aggregate are approved. Laboratory tests
shall be made at regular intervals to confirm the suitability of aggregate.
The Contractor shall obtain whatever permissions are necessary for the exploitation of quarries
and borrow-pits and shall pay royalties, fees, way leaves and the like. The Contractor shall
operate the quarry or pit in an approved manner and provide sufficient evidence by means of
boreholes, test holes and the like to show that the quarry contains aggregate of the required
quality and quantity to complete the Works, and he may be required to produce a geological map.
The aggregate winning and processing operations shall not constitute a danger to health or safety
either during or after completion of the Works, nor interfere with others.
When quarrying operations are complete, the Contractor shall leave the quarry in a safe condition
by, inter alia:
• Barring down all faces so that no loose rock remains on any face.
• Bringing down overhanging rock safely.
• Ensuring that the quarry is free draining and that no water can
accumulate; or, in the case of a quarry below ground level, minimising the
accumulation of water and draining to approved areas. Warning notices in Arabic and English
may be required at any concentrations of water which constitute a hazard.
• Stockpiling surplus rock material to a height not greater than 5 meters with stable side
slopes.
Aggregate and chippings for surface dressing, shall be stored so that segregation, intermixing of
different aggregates and contamination by dirt and other foreign materials is prevented. In
general, each size of aggregate shall be stored separately.
Coarse aggregate is defined as that fraction retained on a 3.5mm BS sieve. It shall have physical
properties which do not exceed the following test values when tested in accordance with BS EN
1744:
Wearing Course Base Course

Aggregate crushing value 20% 25%
Flakiness index 25% 30%
Elongation index 25% 30%
Water absorption 2% 2%
Coarse aggregate may contain up to 15% of pieces with one uncrushed face in each grading size
when tested in accordance with Test Method DM-30l. Aggregate obtained from quarried rock shall
be deemed to satisfy this requirement.
Separate coarse and fine aggregate fractions shall be tested for soundness in accordance with
ASTM C 88. After 5 cycles of immersion in magnesium sulfate solution and drying, the loss of
weight expressed as a percentage of the initial weight shall not exceed 12%.
Any filler, if approved for use, shall comply with BS 4987 (1973).
The aggregate grading for binder shall comply with the following: Finished thickness of binder
(mm) Grading [BS 4987 (1973)]
60 Table 21
Wearing course shall be of 40mm finished thickness, the aggregate grading shall be as follows:
BS Test Sieve (mm) Grading (20mm nominal size)
% by weight passing
28 100
20 95 - 100
14 70 - 90
10 55 - 75
6.3 40 - 60
3.35 25 - 40
1.18 15 - 30
0.075 2 -6
Bitumen shall be of Grade 50/70 penetration with properties corresponding to an interpolation

between Grade 50 and Grade 70 as defined in BS EN 12591. The specific gravity and
temperature/viscosity relationship shall be provided.
The frequency of testing of the penetration index shall be two tests per delivery of bitumen.
The PI range shall be -1 to +1.
Design of Bitumen Macadam
Design mixes shall be submitted for approval and proved by means of laboratory, plant
and field trials. Tracking tests may also be required.
The mixes shall be tested in accordance with the following methods:
• Preparation and testing of Marshall Specimens: Preparation of bituminous specimen as

per ASTM D6926 and Test method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Ashphalt Mixtures
as per ASTM D6927 .
• Bulk Specific Gravity of specimens: ASTM C 1188.
• The values for specific gravities of the aggregates to be used in calculating
the voids shall be taken as the mean of the Bulk, Apparent and Effective
Specific Gravities as defined in the American Asphalt Institute publication "Mix Design
Methods for Asphaltic Concrete."
• The adhesion of bitumen to aggregate shall be proven by comparing the stability of
specimens cured in water and air for eight days at 18 degrees
C. The ratio of stability in the two shall not be less than 0.65.
• Wearing course mix shall be subjected to further Marshall tests at 80 degrees C after
oven heating for a period of 2 hours; the stability/flow ratio shall not fall below 270 at this
temperature.
• Mixes with a bitumen content corresponding to the maximum allowable for the selected
job mix shall be compacted to refusal, or to 600 blows per face whichever shall be reached
first, and the resulting voids-in-mix values shall be not less than 3%.
The designed mixes shall comply with the following:
Binder Wearing
Course Course
Voids in mix 7 - 10 5-8
Voids in mixed aggregate % 14 - 20 14 -20
Minimum stability (kg) 750 1000
Flow (mm) 2-4 2-4
Minimum stability flow ratio (kg/niTn) 270 320

Bitumen content (% of total mix) 3.3 –4.0 3.5 – 4.2
Voids filled with Bitumen (%) 48 - 60 48- 60
After a design mix has been approved and adopted as a job mix, the maximum permitted
deviations from the job mix shall be as follows:
Sieve size: Permitted Deviations
6.3 mm or larger ± 5%
3.35 mm ± 4%
0.6 mm to 1.18mm ± 3%
0.075mm to 0.3mm ± 2%
Smaller than 0.075mm ± 1%
Bitumen ± 0.2%
Voids in mix ± 1%
The application of the above deviation percentages shall not result in values falling outside those
specified in the clause covering the design and testing of bitumen macadam mixes.
Chlorides and Sulphates shall comply with clause “Chlorides and Sulphates” above.

5.1.3.

5.1.4.


Compaction of Sub-grade
The area of the Works shall be cleared of any material or obstructions which in the opinion of the
Engineer might adversely affect the stability of the fill or pavement, and the top layer removed to
a depth of 300 mm (or more if the design so required).
The sub-grade and formation shall be checked and accepted by the Engineer before placing and
spreading operations are started. Any ruts or soft areas caused by improper drainage conditions,
hauling or any other cause shall be corrected and rolled to the required compaction before sub-
base is placed thereon.
The formation shall be compacted to a dry density of at least 95% of the maximum dry density as
determined in BS 1377 – 1 to 9: Test 13 (BS 'Heavy' compaction) and a CBR of 15%.
Where the Contractor is unable to achieve this degree of compaction to the formation level further
excavation shall be carried out to a depth to be defined by the Engineer (but not less than 300
mm). Selected backfill will thereafter be placed and compacted to the requirements of this Clause.
Where the land contours require it, fill in embankment shall be placed and compacted with
minimum embankment slope of 1 : 4.
Compaction shall be carried out by means approved by the Engineer. All construction equipment
shall operate over the full width of the formation to ensure uniform compaction.
Sub-Base
The material shall be spread evenly on the preceding material in layers not exceeding 150 mm
compacted thickness. The minimum thickness of this layer shall be 150 mm after compaction.
Segregation shall be avoided during transport and placing and any segregation evident after
compaction shall be corrected by vibrating in fines or made good by removing and replacing with
properly graded material. If necessary, the material shall be spread using a spreader box or
paving machine to minimise segregation and enable an even depth and the level tolerance to be
achieved.
The sub-base shall be compacted by approved plant to a dry density which shall not be less than
98% relative compaction until movement of the surface ceases and the surface is closed. The
CBR value shall be at least 30% at the maximum moisture content which in the opinion of the
Engineer will occur after completion of the Works.
Where the sub-grade can be compacted as specified by available plant to give a stable load
bearing surface which will resists deformation during subbase placing and with in-situ CBR values
of greater than 30%, the sub-base layer may be reduced to 100 mm thickness at the option of the
Engineer.
Placing of Road Base
Wet mix road base material shall be crushed and mixed by approved mechanical placing plant.
Water for adjusting the moisture content shall be added at the mixer. If required, the moisture
content shall be adjusted to allow for evaporation road base loss during transportation. After
mixing, the material shall be removed from the mixer and transported to the placing location
without delay. The moisture content at the time of laying shall be within + 0.5% of the optimum
value determined in accordance with the Vibrating Hammer Method described in BS 1377 – 1 to
9, Test 14.
Vehicles carrying the plant-mixed material shall be of a capacity suited to the output of the mixing
plant and the site conditions, and shall be capable of discharging cleanly. After mixing is complete,
the materials shall be removed at once from the mixer, transported directly to the point where it
is to be laid and protected from the weather both during transit from the mixer to the laying site
and whilst awaiting tipping. The distance between mixing plant and job site shall not exceed 20
km.
The compaction procedure and plant shall be proved by trials at the commencement of the Works.
The weight, type and number of passes of compaction plant shall be varied to determine the
optimum compaction effort.
Road base material shall be placed and spread evenly, without delay, using a paving machine,
or spreader box operated with a mechanism which level off the material at an even depth and it
shall be spread in layers not exceed 200 mm compacted thickness. Segregation shall be made
good by removal and replacement.
The road base shall achieve a minimum dry density of 981 of the maximum laboratory dry density
and an in-situ CBR value of not less than 80%. Special care shall be taken to obtain full
compaction in the vicinity of both longitudinal and transverse joints.
The completed surfaces of all layers shall be well-closed and free from movement under
compaction plant, and shall have no compaction planes, ridges, cracks or loose material. All loose
segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be made good to the full thickness of the layer and
be re- compacted.
Before placing the next construction layer or applying prime coat, the road base shall be
mechanically swept, then cleaned with compressed air to remove loose material. As soon as
possible after cleaning of the surface, the road base shall be sealed by the application of a prime
coat as specified. Should the surface of the material be allowed to dry out before the seal is
applied, it shall be lightly watered and re-compacted immediately prior to spraying with prime coat.
Should the full depth of layer be allowed to dry out, it shall be removed and replaced, at the
Contractor's expense, with fresh material. Watering and re-mixing in place will not be permitted.
Mixing and Laying of Bitumen Macadam
The mixing and placing of bitumen macadam shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of BS 4987 (1973).
The aggregate and bitumen shall be mixed in an approved plant of the batch type. Constituents
shall be proportioned by weight; the bitumen may be proportioned by a metering pump. Facilities
shall be provided in the mixer to enable the sampling of hot aggregates.
Bitumen and aggregates shall not be heated to above 150°C and 170°C, respectively, and the
temperature difference between them at the time of mixing shall not exceed 15°C. The mixing
temperature shall be established from the bitumen viscosity/temperature graph in accordance
with ASTM D2170 and ASTM D6926 and ASTM D6927. Approved facilities for continuous
measurement of temperatures shall be provided.
The batching plant and equipment shall be properly maintained and cleaned and shall be provided
with means of checking the accuracy of weighing mechanisms and metering devices. These shall
be checked at monthly intervals or as directed.
Bitumen macadam shall be transported in clean vehicles. Dust, coated dust, oil or water may be
used on vehicle bodies to facilitate discharge, but the amounts shall be kept to a minimum and
any excess shall be removed by tipping or brushing.
Heat loss shall be minimised during transit and the macadam shall not be discharged into the
paver at a temperature less than 120 degrees C.
Bitumen macadam shall generally be spread, levelled and tamped by approved self-propelled
pavers.
Immediately after arrival at the site, the macadam shall be supplied continuously to the paver and
placed without delay. The rate of the delivery of material to the paver shall be regulated so that
the paver may operate continuously and it shall be adjusted to provide an even and uniform flow
of material across the full laving width, freedom from dragging or tearing of the material and
minimum segregation.
Excess material arising from placing base course shall be removed by brooming or light raking.
Over-raking causing segregation of the material shall not occur. The excess shall be discarded
and not used elsewhere.
Hand-raking or wearing course material which has been laid by a paver and the addition of
material by hand-spreading for adjustment of level will require prior approval.
If the abutting lane or succeeding strip is not placed on the same day, the joint shall be cut back
to an even line. Loosened material shall be discarded. The joint shall be brushed with a very light
coat of hot bitumen before the next strip is placed. The whole face of the joint shall be treated
before fresh macadam is placed against it. Joints shall be formed only in compacted material and
fresh material placed against a cut face shall be properly compacted.
Joints in wearing course shall be offset by at least 300mm from parallel joints in the layer beneath.
Hand-laying of macadam will be permitted only for laying courses of irregular shape and varying
thickness, and in confined areas where a paver cannot operate.
The Contractor shall obtain approval of compaction methods and plant by carrying out trials to
demonstrate consistent achievement of the requirements. The degree of compaction achieved
during the trials shall be not less than 1% greater than that required during the course of the
Works. The methods and plant shall not be changed without approval. After placing, the macadam
shall be compacted to the thickness shown on the Drawings by rolling to a density of not less than
98% of the maximum density of the approved daily Marshall laboratory density.
Should any individual core, tested in accordance with the clause titled "Testing of Bitumen
Macadam", not have the specified degree of compaction, additional cores may be taken in
adjacent locations, at the discretion of the Engineer.
Should the bitumen macadam fail to achieve the specified density, at the discretion of the
Engineer re-rolling may be allowed subject to the following conditions.
• The densification to be achieved shall be 1% or less.

• Only PTRs shall be used, weighing no greater than 18 tonnes.

• Re-rolling shall take place within 72 hours after the time of the initial rolling of the bitumen
macadam.
• Re-rolling shall take place at the time of day when the bitumen macadam has attained it
maximum natural temperature.
• Re-rolling shall be applied for a maximum of two hours.
• Re-rolling shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer's
Representative and a Representative from the Employer's Materials Testing Laboratory.
• The section of the works in question shall be cored for density determination immediately
after the completion of re-rolling.
• If, after re-testing, the density achieved is equal to or greater than 99.5% of the specified
density, the bitumen macadam will be accepted in the Works subject to a 20% reduction
in the billed rates. If, on other hand the density achieved is less than 99.5% of the
specified density, the bitumen macadam shall be removed and new material to the
specification laid at the Contractor’s cost.
Before pavement construction is commenced, a trial area of each pavement materials shall be
laid. The extent and location of these areas shall be as approved. The materials, mix proportions,
plant and methods shall be those which are proposed for the main work.
A priming coat of grade MC 30 petroleum bitumen shall be applied to the roadbase at the rate of
0.55 to.7 litre per m2, before placing macadam. The binder course, shall not be laid until the
priming coat has been cured. The binder course shall be prepared to receive the wearing course
by removal of dust and deleterious materials by air jetting or other approved means.
A tack coat of grade MC 30 cut-back bitumen or SS1H emulsion shall be applied to the binder
course at the rate of 0.25 to 0.35 litre per m2 before placing, the wearing course. The wearing
course shall not be laid until the tack coat has cured. The wearing, course shall adhere
satisfactorily to the base course.
If approval has been given for macadam to be placed at night, approved lighting shall be provided
at locations where mixing, laving and testing operations are in progress.
The horizontal alignment of the road as constructed shall not deviate by more than ± 10nim from
the true alignment as given by the dimensions on the Drawings. The rate of deviation shall not
exceed 1 in 1000. The required levels of base course and wearing course shall be determined
from the finished road surfaces calculated from the vertical profiles and the true level of any point
shall be ± 5mm for base course and ± 3mm for wearing course. The thickness of the individual
layers of base course and wearing course shall not vary by more than 5 mm from the theoretical
thickness of the respective layers. The combined thickness of binding course and wearing course
layers shall not vary from the theoretical combined thickness by more than 10% of that thickness,
or by 10mm, whichever is less.
The numbers of permitted longitudinal irregularities in the wearing course, base course and hard
shoulder surfaces shall not exceed the figures in the following table.
Wearing Course Binder Course
Irregularity 3 mm 6 mm 4 mm 7 mm
Length m 300 75 75 300 75 300 75
Number of irregularities 20 9 1 40 18 4 2

An irregularity is a variation greater than 3 mm or 7 mm in the longitudinal profile of the road

surface as measured from a 3 in long straight edge.
No irregularities exceeding 8 mm shall be permitted.
Wearing courses shall also be measured transversely for irregularities by a 3 in straight edge
placed at right angle to the centre line of the road. The maximum permissible deviation in this
case shall not exceed 3 mm.
Traffic shall not be allowed to run on any surfaces without approval.
Final Surfacing of Bitumen Macadam
The Bitumen Macadam binder course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated as long as it
remains uncovered by a wearing course. Should the binder course become contaminated the
Contractor shall make good by cleaning to the satisfaction of the Engineer and if this is
impracticable by removing the layer and replacing it to specification.
When all heavy plant has been delivered and all soft, fatty or otherwise objectionable areas of the
road have been reinstated and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the wearing course
shall be laid.
Jointing new to Existing Pavement
Where new pavement is required to join into existing road construction, the joint shall be formed
and treated in accordance with the Drawings.
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, each layer of existing bituminous course shall be cut
back to a clean vertical face and coated with hot bitumen of a grade suitable for the purpose
immediately before laying adjacent new bituminous material.
If cutting back of the existing pavement layers is required to form a stepped pattern, the lower
layers of bituminous courses shall be prepared to receive the new covering coats by removal of
dust and deleterious materials by air jetting or other approved means, and shall be coated with
bituminous tack coat.
Exposed existing road base surfaces shall be scarified then re-compacted and sealed with
bituminous prime coat in accordance with road base specification.
Overlays
Overlays shall be placed in accordance with the requirements for placing bitumen macadam.
In addition to the requirements for base course preparation, the area to be overlaid shall be
cleaned by soaking with potable water and mechanical brushing while wet. This operation shall
be carried out twice and shall be followed by air-jetting.
Where the existing pavement layer is smooth or where bitumen, oil, rubber, dust etc. has
accumulated, the area shall be cold-planed to a nominal depth of 10 mm, to provide a key for the
overlay.
A bituminous tack coat shall be applied to the prepared surface before the overlay is laid.
Overlays shall be laid to achieve the minimum specified thickness. Protrusions of the existing
pavement shall be removed to give the minimum depth required. Holes and local depressions
shall be cut out to at least 25mm depth and filled with base course or wearing course material, as
appropriate, prior to commencement of the overlaying course.
Interlocking Paving Blocks
Roads and areas to be paved with interlocking concrete blocks shall be excavated and placed
with 300 mm depth of compacted material at the exact levels and falls required for the finished
work.
If parts of the base are found to be unstable the Contractor shall excavate further to a firm bed
and fill with layers of fine crushed rock or aggregate, thoroughly compacted. The upper surface
of the base shall reflect the exact profile, fall or contour of the final paving as irregularities shall
not be compensated for by varying the depth of sand bedding.
Compaction of formation and base for interlocking concrete slabs shall be as Clauses
(Compaction of Sub-Grade), (Road Base), (Tests on Sub-Base and Road Base).
A stable edge shall be provided to retain the paving units and sand bedding by means of precast
concrete edging unit or kerbs set in-situ concrete. The sand bedding shall be a fine, well graded
sand in a dry to moist condition and laid to an un-compacted thickness of 50 mm.
Samples of the paving blocks are to be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. No orders shall
be placed with the manufacturers until the Engineer's approval has been given.
The mix for paving blocks shall contain a water repelling additive.
The paving blocks shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and shall be
compacted at completion of each day's work.
The interlocking block shall be a minimum of 80 mm thick and the concrete quality shall be
Site Surfacing
Chippings for site surfacing shall consist of a 75 mm thickness of 25 mm uniform gauge crushed
and washed gravel as approved by the Engineer.
Kerbs
Kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants shall be cast generally to BS -'140 but to the dimensions
shown on the drawings where these differ from preferred dimensions list in BS 340. They shall be
cast to the required radius for all curves not less than 12 meters. Paving slabs will be to BS -'68.
Raised kerbs shall be laid with a 6 mm gap and pointed with I to 3 polymer modified cement
mortar above road level only. Concrete bedding and backing to kerbs shall be cast in-situ to the
dimensions shown on the drawings.
Flush kerbs shall be similarly laid and jointed or may be cast in-situ. The outside comer of the
kerbs shall be chambered.
In the case of precast kerbs one joint in ten shall be left unpainted and 6 mm compressible insert
provided, and a construction joint formed in the haunching at this point for expansion. Similarly
expansion joints are to be formed in in-situ kerbs at 4.0 in intervals.
Marginal strips and kerbs shall be protected against covering or splashing with bitumen or cement.
Kerbs and manhole frames shall be primed before bituminous macadam is laid.
All raised kerbs shall be painted alternately black and white in the plant area and at junctions.
Traffic Signs
Traffic signs shall be reflectorized and unless specifically stated to the contrary shall comply with
the latest revision or replacements of:
• BS 873;
• The "Traffic Signs Regulations and Directions" published by H.M.S.0;
• The "Traffic Signs Manual" published by H.M.S.O.
• Relevant authorities of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabian and Traffic Police requirements.
The signs and their individual elements shall be capable of withstanding the minimum wind
pressure referred to in the design requirements.
The Contractor shall design the signs, based on typical details provided by the Engineer. Number,
type and position of the signs shall be as agreed with the Engineer. All signs shall be fabricated
from sheet aluminium to BS 1470.
Mounting posts shall be of circular hollow steel section structural steel, Grade 43 to BS 4360.
Post caps, also of Grade 43C steel to BS 4360, shall be continuously fillet welded DM to the post
heads to prevent the ingress of water.
Single post signs will generally be cast directly into a concrete base but signs having two or more
posts shall have suitable base plates for mounding flat down to a previously constructed concrete
base. The base plates shall be continuously fillet welded to the posts, shall be suitably stiffened
if necessary, and shall be pre-drilled to accommodate holding down bolts.
Where there is a possibility of aluminium and steel coming into contact with each other at fixing
points a suitable non-degradable inert packing shall be provided to prevent such contact.
All steelwork shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS 729 and shop painted in a salt and dust free
covered area, the finishing colour coats being according to the Local Traffic Authority
requirements.
Carriageway Markings
The material for markings shall be hot applied 'Spray-plastic' complying to the requirements of BS
3262, as manufactured by Prismo Universal Limited, or similar approved for use in the tropics.
Carriageway markings shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean and dry. Where owing to
the action of traffic or otherwise, the pavement has become polished before the application of
road markings, at the direction of the Engineer a tack coat compatible with the marking material
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Markings shall be free from
raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and free from streaks.
"Ballotini" is to be incorporated at 18% to 22% by weight of total mix and also to be applied to the
surface of the markings at the rate of 400 to 500 g/m2.
The laid thickness of the markings shall be 1.5 ± 0.5 mm measured in accordance with Appendix
H of BS 262.
The Contractor shall state the maximum safe heating temperature, the temperature range of the
apparatus and the method of laying shall be used.
Guard rails
Guard rails shall be provided where the occupants of a vehicle or passers-by can be endangered
by a vehicle leaving the road.
Guard rails shall be used also to protect pipes and structures located at traffic areas and shall be
designed to withstand impact forces in accordance to the traffic type and speed.
Railings shall be of galvanized steel which shall be epoxy-painted in addition. Plastic guide posts
with glass reflector elements shall be used where required.
Concrete Paving Slabs
Areas to be paved with concrete paving slabs shall be excavated and replaced with 300 mm depth
of compacted material at the exact levels and falls required for the finished work. If parts of the
base are found to be unstable the Contractor shall excavate further to a firm bed and fill with
layers of fine crushed rock or aggregate, thoroughly compacted. The upper surface of the base
shall reflect the exact profile, fall or contour of the final paving as irregularities shall not be
compensated for by varying the depth of sand bedding.
Samples of the paving slabs shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. No orders shall
be placed with the manufacturers until the Engineer's approval has been given.
The paving slabs shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Temporary Traffic Signs and Carriageway Markings
For road diversions the signs and markings shall generally follow the specification for permanent
works.
Posts and foundations shall be designed to facilitate re-use but also shall be robust.
Warning lights, heavy duty bollards, etc., shall be provided.
All diversion works and the location, quantity and specification for all signs, lights, bollards etc.,
shall be approved by the local Authorities and the Traffic Police Department.

30.7 QA/QC
Tests for Sub-Grade
The sub-grade compaction test shall be modified AASHO compaction test as described in BS
1377-1 and 2: Test 13', and shall be carried out in a mold 10 cm internal diameter and 12.5 cm
internal height. The mold shall be filled in five equal layers; each layer being given 25 blows of a
4.5 kg hammer failing freely for 45 cm.
Except when otherwise specified, the CBR specimens shall be soaked for 96 hours or such other
period of soaking as may be determined by the Engineer to correspond with the moisture content
pertaining under the most unfavourable conditions to which the material may be subjected.
Laboratory tests shall be done using surcharge weights as required by the Engineer.
If due to the high proportion of granular material retained on the BS 19 mm sieve, or for other
reason, the Engineer may select to measure sub-grade compaction by the vibrating hammer
method of using a CBR mold as in BS 1377-1 and 2: Test 14. The compaction requirements
measured by this means shall be taken as that stipulated for the compaction test plus 5%.
In-situ dry density tests on each layer of compacted material shall be carried out at an average of
not less than 2 per 100 m length of carriageway. In-situ CBR tests shall be carried out as directed
by the Engineer. Where any test fails, removal of unsuitable material and/or re-compaction will be
carried out over an extent as required by the Engineer. Retesting will then be required.
Classification tests shall be carried out as necessary to ensure that true comparisons can be
made between in-situ densities, laboratory compaction densities and field trial densities, i.e., that
variations in the properties of materials being used in the test are not affecting results. Each in-
situ dry density result shall be the mean of the in-situ dry density result of three close test holes
approximately 0.5 m apart.
Tests on Sub-Base and Road Base
Before any section of the road works is commenced and during its construction, the Contractor
shall carry out on the Engineers instructions tests and control tests to determine the degree of
compaction in the subgrade, sub- base and base. No section of the work shall be covered until it
has been approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer may make use among others any of the following tests:
Density/Moisture tests
Compaction tests
CBR in-situ test
CBR remolded test
The laboratory tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377-1 and 2.

The specified requirements shall be achieved in each successive layer. Checking that the
specified requirements have been attained in lower layers after higher layers have been placed
will not be accepted, except where existing road surfaces have been removed.
Any departure from the method of constructing in layers will not be permitted.
The results of control tests shall be furnished daily to the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost and execution of all density tests, moisture tests and CBR tests necessary
in establishing the compaction procedure and subsequent control tests required by the Engineer.
Frequency of Testing
In-situ dry density tests on each layer of compacted material shall be carried out at an average of
not less than 2 per 100 in length or carriageway. In-situ CBR tests shall be carried out as directed
by the Engineer.
Classification tests shall be carried out as necessary to ensure that true comparisons can be
made between in-situ densities, laboratory compaction densities and field trial densities, i.e. that
variations in the properties of materials being used in the tests are not affecting results.
The compaction procedure and plant shall be proved by trials at the commencement of the Works
for approval by the Engineer. Compaction trials shall be carried out at varying moisture contents.
The weights, types and numbers of passes of compaction plant shall also be varied to determine
the optimum compactive efforts.
No traffic shall be permitted on the completed base in excess on the minimum required to place
the overlying construction.
Testing of Bitumen Macadam
Unless otherwise specified the sampling and testing of bitumen macadam shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of BS 598. (ASTM 2172 for bitumen content).
Frequent testing of the mix and of the compacted macadam shall be carried out to ensure that
the design requirements will be achieved. Aggregate gradings shall be checked frequently to
ensure that they comply with those used in determining the mixes. The bitumen metering
equipment, the bitumen temperature and the temperature of the aggregate at the exit from the
dryer shall be regularly tested.
Samples for analysis shall be taken from the final mix as it leaves the mixer and from around the
augers of and/or behind the paver. Marshall cylindrical test specimens shall be made from the
mix and tested. Cored samples shall be taken after placing and shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1188.
The entire operation of mixing and compacting bitumen macadam shall be performed under close
control. Frequent testing of the mix and of the compacted pavement will be required as the work
proceeds to ensure that the design requirements will be maintained. The Engineer may check the
aggregate grading in the various stock-piles to ensure that they comply with those used in
determining the mixes. The Engineer may test the bitumen metering equipment, the bitumen
temperature and the temperature of the aggregate at the exit from the dryer.

The Engineer may take samples for analysis from the final mixture both as it leaves the mixer and
after it is laid. In particular, Marshall cylindrical test specimens shall be made from the mix and
shall be tested to ensure the continuing suitability of the job mix in relation to the design criteria
specified herein.
The preparation and testing of Marshall cylindrical specimens shall be carried out as specified
herein.
Specified gravity of the mixed material shall be measured by the ASTM D2041 Standard test and
cored samples taken from the compacted pavement to measure in-situ density.
The frequency of testing shall be as directed by the Engineer. In general, routine testing of the
mix, which shall include at least, Marshall type tests. Bitumen extraction, and grading tests, shall
be carried out at least 4 times a day during full production or at the rate of one sample for every
100 tons produced whichever is the more frequent.
Cores shall be cut and tested at the rate of 1 per 500 m2. As soon as possible after cutting, core
holes shall be painted on their sides with a thin coating of hot bitumen and refilled with bitumen
macadam of the appropriate mix. Compaction shall be carried out with a Marshall hammer or
other approved means.
If tests show that the specified requirements are not achieved, the whole process of mixing and
laying bitumen macadam shall be stopped and shall not recommence until corrections have been
made to the methods adopted for mixing and laying that will ensure that the minimum
requirements are achieved.
Sampling and Testing of Materials Used in the Construction of Roads
Samples shall be taken in accordance with the relevant British Standard where applicable.
Materials subsequently supplied shall at least equal the approved sample in all respects. No
source of supply shall be changed without prior written approval from the Engineer. Any samples
not approved or materials failing to comply with the approved samples shall immediately be
removed from the site of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all orders for materials to be incorporated
in the Permanent Works if required to do so.
All materials to be used in the permanent Works shall be subject to inspection and tests as the
work proceeds. The Contractor will be responsible for carrying out all tests required under the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer from time to time and will provide the necessary
laboratory facilities, apparatus, equipment, skilled laboratory staff and labour required for this
purpose. The Engineer and his staff shall have access at all reasonable times to the laboratories,
laboratory staff and equipment required for the testing of the Works. The results of control tests
shall be furnished to the Engineer.
30.8 Acceptance
specification.

30.9 Parking
Dedicated parking bays shall be covered as follows:
PCV/PVDF cover material (roof) to accommodate temperatures of +70/-30oC and minimum

guarantee of 10 years on all materials and workmanship for UV, IR and colour.
All structural membranes to be CHS galvanised (55 microns minimum thickness)

31 OFFSHORE WORKS

This specification covers the scope of offshore works in accordance with clause 5.1 “General” of


5.1.3.


31.7 QA/QC
specification.
31.8 Acceptance
specification.

32 LIFTS

This specification covers the scope of lifts and wall cladding systems. The design and execution
shall be state of the art, functional and complete in all parts in accordance with this specification.
The required lift installations shall be designed as cable-operated lift with traction machine,
including but not be limited to:
• The car with two sectional automatic telescopic-sliding doors

• The counterweight and cladding of the counterweight runway in the shaft pit
• The lift machinery including driving-pulley, gearbox, clutch, brake and motor, as well as
the motor overload protection device
• All load and control ropes as well as the bottom chain or bottom ropes required for
compensating the weight of carrying ropes
• Guide rails for car and counterweight
• The necessary devices for monitoring speed and the safety gear at the car
• The necessary equipment for floor selection switching and for automatic door operation
• The necessary stops, buffers and limit switches for car and counter weight
• The shaft doors designed as fire-inhibiting telescopic sliding doors made of stainless steel
• The shaft lining between the shaft doors where necessary
• Complete electrical control equipment, including all contactors, relays, time switches, etc.,
as well as the control cabinets required for these
• All necessary devices for ventilation of the machinery room such as fans, filters, ducts,
etc
• The all-pole mains isolating switch (main switch)
• All control panels and control switches
• Telephone equipment for car and lift machinery room, designed as telephone system for
connection to the internal communication system, including cables and the complete
emergency signalling equipment
• Illumination and air conditioning of the car shall be installed in the ceiling
• Lift shaft illumination
• The auxiliary power supply for alarm signal, air conditioning and illumination in the car
• The necessary equipment for inspection and moving of the lift
• One hand-lamp each, with approx. 6 m connection cable with plug on the top of the car
and in the machinery room
• The entire electrical cabling and wiring from the all-pole mains isolating switch (main
switch) in the lift machinery room



Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant standards as specified.

Design and execution shall be in accordance with all relevant design criteria specified.
Special Design Criteria
The lifts shall be designed, manufactured, erected and tested according to excepted standards.
If the specification contains requirements beyond the requirements of the standards, the
requirements of the specification shall have priority.
The cars shall be made of stainless steel. An anti-drumming substance is to be applied on the
outer surface. On the inside, the cars shall be provided with skirting strips, a handrail made of
anodized aluminium and two protecting strips made of hardwood.
The cabin and counterweight guides shall be designed in the form of roller guides.
The buffers for the car and counterweights in the pit of the lift shaft shall be of oil-hydraulic design
and must be equipped with a sight glass or dipstick for checking the oil level and also with an
electric safety device. This device must prevent the lift from operating if the buffers are not fully
extended and/or operational.
Instantaneous types of safety gear are not permissible.
The control voltage shall be 230 V AC. The control voltage shall be produced by the control
transformer to be delivered by the supplier of the lifts. The entire switchgear shall be installed in
separate lift machinery rooms provided for this purpose above the shafts.
The fastenings of the lift machinery have to be provided with sound absorbing bases to prevent
the excitation of mechanical vibrations. The brakes are to be designed as double-shoe brakes
with magnetic brake motor. The gears are to be completely enclosed and must run in an oil bath.
The floors shall be made of sheet steel and are to be provided with hard wearing plastic floor
covering (PC or equivalent).
During the construction period, the sides of the cars (without doors) and the floor of the cars shall
be provided with protective coverings (hardboard panels or similar). The protective coverings shall
be removed by the Contractor after the construction period.
Photo-electric light barriers are to be fitted at the car entrances.
A floor indicator with floor symbols and 'up' and 'down' arrows is to be provided in the cars.
The car roofs are to be fitted with three-sided, twist-resisting railing. A mounting plate fixed to the
railing must be fitted with all equipment and power sockets required for inspection rides, repair
work, etc.
The lift shall be equipped with an adjustable overload protection device with a visual and audible
signal in the car.
All floor selector buttons - including the lift call buttons on the outside panels - shall be designed
in the form of pushbuttons with call acknowledgement.
All lift cars shall from equipment point of view be suitable for disabled persons and shall receive
the respective additional floor selection buttons.
At every landing call acknowledgement buttons and an "out-of-order" sign have to be provided.
The shaft doors must, like the cabin doors, be of the telescope type and must be fire-resistant
and made of stainless steel.
Lift shaft illumination shall be provided at each landing and at intervals of not more than 3 m. In
the pit of the lift shaft illumination must also be provided as well as a power socket. One switch
each is to be provided in the machinery room and in the pit of the lift shaft.
The safety gears shall be of the progressive type.
In the event of failure of the mains voltage for car illumination, alarm equipment and ventilation,
the emergency power supply must be able to keep the alarm equipment and ventilation
operational for at least four hours. During that period emergency illumination must be effective in
the car, too. For the telephone, cabling, screened telephone cable is to be used.
Telephones shall be of a wall-mounting design. In the cars, telephones are to be placed in

recesses next to the car panel. The make and type of telephone will be decided by the Engineer.
All motors, switching installations and switchgear must be designed for an ambient temperature
of at least 50°C and must be fully operational at this temperature.
The machinery rooms shall be air conditioned such that the temperature may not rise beyond
27°C.
The drives are to be equipped with electronic control ensuring absolutely continuous and load-
independent control of acceleration and deceleration. During the latter, the mechanical brake
must not operate before complete standstill has occurred.
Controls are to be designed as direction-sensitive two-button collective. The controls for the lifts
shall be supplemented by a priority control in the car and an external priority control at all levels.
Operation of the priority controls shall be achieved by means of key switches.

All materials and related works shall be in accordance with this specification.

All execution works shall be in accordance with this specification.

32.7 QA/QC
All quality assurance and quality control activities shall be in accordance with this specification.
32.8 Inspection, Testing and Acceptance

All inspection, testing and acceptance tests and related activities shall be in accordance with this
specification.
33 HVAC
Specifications for the HVAC system are included as part of the Volume IX – B12.

Vol VII - B0.4 - Civil Works

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol VII - B0.4 - Civil Works

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol VII - B0.4 - Civil Works

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AL-KHOBAR SWRO DESALINATION PLANT PHASE 2

Saline Water Conversion Corporation

AL-KHOBAR SWRO DESALINATION PLANT PHASE 2

Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-1

7 SITE INSTALLATION/DEMOBILIZATION ................................................... 58

11 SPREAD FOUNDATIONS ........................................................................... 76

14.5 Materials (Quality, Delivery, Storage, Handling) .................................... 118

17.9.2 Design/Engineering ..................................................................... 165

20.7 QA/QC 187

Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-7

28.1 Scope of Work, Completeness ................................................................ 218

Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-9

31 OFFSHORE WORKS ................................................................................. 261

Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-10

1.1 Scope of Work, Completeness

1.2 Civil Design/Engineering

Approval by the Engineer

Approval by relevant authorities

1.3 Codes and Standards

• American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

• American Concrete Institute (ACI)

• American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

• American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

• American Water Works Association (AWWA)

• Uniform Building Code (UBC)

• International Building Code (IBC)

• American Welding Society (AWS)

• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

• National Plumbing Code (NPC)

• American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

• Portland Cement Association (PCA)

• National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA)

• Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)

• European Norm (EN)

• International Organization for Standardisation (ISO)

• British Standard (BS)

• British Standard Code of Practice (BS CP)

• Deutsches Institut für Normung eV (DIN)

• Verein Deutscher Ingenieure (VDI)

• Recommendations of the Committee for waterfront structures, harbours and waterways

e) Local Standards and Regulations

• Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete. in the Arabian Peninsula (CIRIA)

• Saudi-Arabian Security Directives (SD)

• Other local standards and national regulations, if any

• Building regulations and guide lines by the Kingdom of Saudi-Arabia, if any

• HCISS; High Commission for Industrial Security and Safety

• Coast Guard requirements

• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS)

• Swedish Standards for sand blasting of steel parts

• Centre for Civil Engineering Research and Codes (CUR)

• CUR /CIRIA Reports and Manuals

• ICE Institution of Civil Engineers

Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-13

1.4 Design Criteria for Layout, Arrangement, Drawings, Execution

Volume VII – Part B.04 – Civil Works Page-14

• Design Loads/Load Assumptions

Area Value Unit

Sloping Roof-sheet metal construction 1.5 kN/m2

• Erection dead load